Skip to content

 iPhone 6S + 6S Plus Apple Media Event Wednesday Sept 9  Pre-Orders Start Sept 11,  Retail Stores Event Sept 18, 2015 

1440694053.jpg

iPhone 6S to be Announced in Only 9 Days, there is Excitement in the Apple Crowd of 500,000,000.

iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus Pre-Ordering Begins Friday Sept 11th, Goes on Sale on the 18th

 Apple’s Special Media Event Key-Note public address announcing their new iPhone 6S and 6S Plus begins at 1:00pm Eastern Wednesday Sept 9th, 2015

Apple’s Media Event will be held at the Bill Graham Civic Auditorium in San Francisco at 1:00PM Eastern 9/9/2015, a 7000 seat venue. Apple on Thursday {8/27} morning sent out thousands of invitations for their special Media Event to be held on September 9, 2015.

Historically Apple media events are used to Announce New Products, and in recent years September media events, announce new iPhone iterations. This year’s event will be exposing some very innovative iPhone Camera upgrades.

Apple’s iPhone 6S upgrade, requires a huge multi-year investment with research, development, engineering and testing, as with all iPhone model upgrades. This next upgrade of the iPhone 6 should be available for online Apple Store internet Pre-Sales likely on 9/11; Apple’s USA Retail Stores will be Open at 8am for the Sales event of the iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus that will commence likely Friday, Sept 18, 2015).

iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus. The supply-line has commenced mass-producing 90 Million iPhones for the initial production run of iPhones for its September lunch. This represents the largest initial production-run order in Apple’s history. For Apple this release could this mean 15-to-18 Million iPhone sales in its opening 3-Day Weekend Launch.

Sept, 2014: Last year Apple delivered 12 million iPhones in the 3-Day opening weekend. Recall, the iPhone was not available in China during the initial release of the iPhone 6, due to China-Governmental {China’s version of our FCC} approval delays.

iPhone 4S and 5S and likely with the 6S, the “S” iPhone model upgrades have focused on its Camera, Lens, Imager, Image Processing, among other significant internal upgrades, like processor and storage.

iPhone 6S Upgrade News Roundup. Sources within Apple’s vast supply-line leaked documentation and component photos, indicating details regarding the iPhone’s Cameras, its case, processor, and RAM memory.

iPhone 6S Front-Facing {FF} Camera will likely contain 5 million pixels, a 400% increase from the current 1.2mp imager, for greatly improved SELFIE picture taking, true HD 1080p video recording and FaceTime Calling. We’ve just learned that the FF Camera will have a Flash for improved selfies in low light settings.

iPhone 6S Rear-Facing Camera will contain 12 million pixels, a 150% increase from the current 8.0mp imager, for improved image resolution, plus better digital-zoom range. The iPhone is reported to be delivering true 4k video capability; 4-K Video means that these Videos may capture at each 2160×3840 pixel frame, at a rate of 30fps, and where each frame contains 8.847MP. This is Huge, 4 times traditional HDTV frames of 1080px1920 pixels. Video capture may also be capable of 240fps for super-slow-motion videography, all of which would be very significant accomplishments in the iPhone video platform, actually any $1000 platform.

iPhone 6S to be 7.1mm Thin. Examination of the of the iPhone 6S case blueprints, reveal that the iPhone 6S will be 7.1mm in thickness, while the iPhone 6 is currently 6.9mm. Apparently the new 6S model will be 0.20mm thicker than the previous model. This may be due to Apple’s attempt to strengthen the shell to prevent a 2015 version of “Bend-Gate” or the addition of ForceTouch display grid.

iPhone 6S to be 0.2mm Thicker, in Perspective. A straind of Human Hair is about 0.10mm thick. This 0.20mm slight increase in thickness of the iPhone 6S is equivalent to the thickness of 2 Human Hairs, an almost in-perceivable measure to earthlings; however, Star Trek’s Vulcan Lieutenant Spock may be able to feel this difference.

iPhone 6S Front-Facing Camera. Examination of the iOS 9 Code Remarks , reveals that the FF Camera will be capable of Panorama photographs, 1080p 60fps video recording, and 720p 240fps slo-motion video capture, and HDR imaging. It also appears that the FF and RF iPhone Cameras will display Real-Time HDR visualization, on the LCD display.

iPhone 6S and 6S Plus Upgrade. Marilyn and I upgraded last year with AT&T’s 12 month NEXT Plan. This plan permits us upgrade literally to the “Next iPhone” seamlessly every 12 months. The plan provided to us a 20 month installment purchase contract with no interest charged. For the iPhone 6S Plus, lets assume prices are equal to last year’s, a price of $849, which includes $100 for 64GB memory storage.

AT&T’s NEXT 12 Plan in an installment purchase plan that takes $849 divided by 20 equal payments = $42.45/month for 20 months, paying the sales tax only at time of sale. The first $42.50 payment was included in one’s Next month’s AT&T billing.

iPhone 6S Plus Arrival in September, 8 weeks from now, we will present our iPhone 6 Plus smartphones in good physical and working condition, and receive new iPhone 6S Plus smartphones with the payment of $50.94 sales tax, and the 20 month installment plan (with 8 months remaining) is reset for another 20 months. If we don’t want to upgrade this year, continue to pay the remaining 8 months, and the installment sale would be completed, and the iPhones are then owned free and clear.

AppleCare+ Accident Protection. Increase the Warranty and Apple Support to 2 Years, PLUS includes 2 years of Accident protection for an up-front onetime price of $99 for 2 years. For accident protection, there is a $79 deductible paid when returning the phone to the Apple Store, say for water damaged iPhone replacement. For any warranty repairs or replacements during the 2 year period, there are no deductible charges. AppleCare+ does Not provide coverage if you loose the iPhone. Most of the cellular providers’ protection plans cost $99/year with a deductible.

iPhone 6S Rear-Facing Camera will contain 12 million pixels, a 150% increase from the current 8.0mp imager, for improved image resolution, plus better digital-zoom range. The iPhone is reported to be delivering true 4K video capability; 4K Video means that these Videos are captured at each 2160×3840 pixel frame, at a frame-rate of 30fps, and where each frame contains 8.847MP. This is Huge, 4 times traditional (industry nick-named 2K) HDTV frames of 1080px1920 pixels. Video capture may also be capable of 240fps for super-slow-motion videography, all of which would be very significant accomplishments in the iPhone video platform, actually any $1000 platform.

iPhone Videography – Think About it… With iPhone 6S being capable of 4k video capture PLUS slow-motion, accompanied with the iOS9 software upgrade, the iPhone 6S Camera App may have tools to select individual “still-image” photographs from the video clip, during play-back. Recall with digital videos, shot at 30fps (frames per second), the videos are actually a string of 30 still-images in sequence for the duration of the video-clip. For typical iPhone 6 video recording, each video consists of a string of thirty 2.1mp still images per second. Each frame would produce an excellent 4×6″ photograph.

iPhone 4k video recording, this would provide the opportunity of selecting the exact frame (an 8.8mp frame) when a football team’s wide-received catches a Touchdown pass, the Baseball hitter with the Ball literally “On the Bat” at the exact moment of the hit, or the Golfer whose drive shows the Golf Ball at the exact moment of impact with the Driver… professional photographers practice for many years to capture these precise moments. With 4k video frame selection, everyone can capture these amazingly timed Photographs. This would produce an excellent 8×10″ photograph.

iPhone’s iOS9. Lets not forget that the iPhone is an elaborate well packaged bundle of technology, albeit an amazing achievement. Combine iPhone HARDWARE with iOS SOFTWARE and the iPhone 6S comes to life. Hardware development is crucial; however, its the Software, the iOS that permits the 770 Million Users COMMUNICATE with the iPhone.

Combine iPhone 6S + iOS9 + Vast array of iPhone Apps, and the iPhone becomes much more than a Cell-Phone. Therefore, Take Time in discovering the features of Apple’s to be released iOS9, as teams of thousands of Apple Engineers are working 24/7 to make the USER Experience Exceptional and Secure. iOS9 will be bundled in all the new iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus when they are released in September, 2015

Apple Clearly Understands iPhone Photography (we call it iPhoneOgraphy) is a very important smartphone usage-component. As a teaching Pro, its widely known in the Imaging Industry that Smartphones have stimulated a modern rebirth in picture-taking in a major way.

iPhone Model Updates (A). iPhone was first brought to market by Apple June 29, 2007. Annually, Apple has been upgrading their iPhone with subsequent model releases occurring generally mid-year in a June to October calendar cycle. However, since 2012 iPhone updates have stabilized to the 3rd week of September.

iPhone “S” model releases have occurred on “Odd” numbered years, 3GS in 2009, 4S in 2011, 5S in 2013. And if history repeats itself 2015 will bring us the iPhone 6S, 6S Plus, and perhaps the 6C adding a variety of case colors. While “Even” numbered years, the iPhone model name changes by Number, iPhone 4 in 2010, iPhone 5 in 2012, iPhone 6 in 2014, and likely the iPhone 7 to be released September, 2016.

iPhone Model Updates (B). iPhone “S” updates have focused on improving its Camera, Lens System, Imager, and the iOS System software applicable to Camera Operation and Image Processing. This year should follow this trend, with a number of significant iPhone Camera improvements, among other enhancements, perhaps 2GB of internal RAM (up from 1GB), faster more power-efficient A9 Processor, improved battery chemistry and longevity.

iPhone Force Touch. With the introduction of the AppleWatch, its display and the WatchOS have a technology that is capable of distinguishing between a Tap and a Press. Since the AppleWatch has limited display area, Force Touch provides a software tool to launch Menu selections that a Tap would not provide. With the AppleWatch if one firmly Presses onto the Watch Face, the Watch OS responds with a “Customize” option, and you may Swipe-Left or Swipe-Right, to select from a dozen Watch Faces.

iPhone 6 currently running with iOS8.4, from the HOME Screen, if you Tap onto an App icon, the App launches; if you Press-and-Hold onto an App icon, all the Apps icons in that Home Page starts “jiggling” and the App icons simultaneously display an “X” at the top-left corner of each App icon, inviting the user to Delete the App with a Tap onto the “X” or Press onto the middle of the App icon, to Move the App to another position on that Home-Page or Move the App icon to another Home-Page, or move the App on top of another App to create a Folder to house two or more Apps.

iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus with Force Touch functionality. Apparently Apple engineers have designed an electrical-grid within the Display of the AppleWatch used to differentiate between a user’s Tap and Press. Apple engineering teams have determined that Force Touch will add unique and useful software tools for communicating with the iOS and Apple Apps. When iPhone 6S is released the Operating System pre-loaded will be iOS9, which will incorporate the Force-Touch algorithms.

iPhone cameras are capturing more Pictures than ALL the other digital Cameras Combined, including all the other smartphone cameras.

iPhones are currently selling at a rate of 250 million units per year and growing by +30% or more year over year. iPhone (camera) sales has been destroying the traditional pocket digital camera sales, over recent years. Sometime during 2016 iPhone sales will cross the 1,000,000,000 iPhones in circulation milestone. (1Billion iPhones). Remember the Apple critics were saying that Apple had “no business” entering the already crowded smartphone marketplace in 2007. Good thing Apple does not pay any attention to the critics.

Canon, Nikon, Sony, Leica, Lumix, Fuji have dominated the portable point-and-shoot photography segment for decades. Portable point and shoot cameras transformed to Digital from traditional film about 12 years ago, which stimulated their sales.

iPhone Cameras deliver excellent still-image capture and image stabilized HDTV video recording from 30fps to 240fps, with excellent color rendition and detail. Folks are realizing that there is no discernible need to carry a (second) portable-camera, therefore traditional pocket-camera sales continue to plummet.

iPhoneOgraphy. Having published over 500,000 images in recent years on our site (http://www.416-1100.com), the iPhone digital camera has become very sophisticated. The lens system’s aperture is currently at ƒ2.2 with a top shutter speed of 1/1000 second, Color rendition is very accurate, image detail is sharp. For a fixed focal-length camera one could hardly ask for more, knowing that the entire Camera, Lens, Imager system is the size of Kernel of Corn.

iPhoneOgraphy Wish List. Apple has achieved Patents for an internal Zoom Lens System, a unique Light Splitting system so that the 3-primary colors (Red Green Blue) are separated, processed and then brought together digitally for recording onto the memory data card. Apple also received a patent for a Bayonet Lens Mounting system so accessory Lens attachments may be attached to the iPhone with its precision mounting hardware. If and when Apple brings these unique Patents into the iPhone, another Imaging Revolution will be upon us. While we are wishing, lets increase the Aperture to ƒ1.8 and the maximum shutter speed to 1/2000 second, and a 3x optical zoom lens.

iPhoneOgraphy. There have been occasions particularly for product imaging, landscapes, and evening sunsets, where the iPhone camera does an amazing job. I’ve posted many on my FAU4U Facebook page; Combine iPhoneOgraphy with several of the great iPhone Camera and Imaging Editing Apps available today, such as: 645 PRO, GyroLens, PS Express, Photogene4, to name a few. Notice the screen-capture that displays my iPhone “Image Editing” home-page showing my most commonly used Apps. BTW, since I have not found a Photo App to adjust Perspective similar to the “Photoshop Skew Tool” I use Doc Scan Pro App on the iPhone and Doc Scan HD App on the iPad, to straighten (make parallel) building Edges in Photos. These Apps are designed to square the edges of a scanned page;however I use the App to make Building Walls parallel, as a $2500 CANON Perspective-Control Tilt-Shift Lens would accomplish.

Our Professional Photography colleagues will be shocked to learn that many times, I’ve chosen to use my trusty iPhone 6 Plus (camera) set to HDR mode, to capture landscape scenes and sunsets rather than take out my $3500 Canon Digital SLR rig. When engaged for a photo assignment, one surely cannot whip out an iPhone for a commercial job.

iPhone Cameras. Next year over 1,000,000,000 iPhones (1 Billion iPhones) will be in Circulation.

 Apple knows the Power of iPhone picture-taking and SELFIE picture taking. Addressing this huge imaging demand Apple continues to implement a number of significant image quality upgrades. Recall initially, the front-facing camera was “designed” primarily for FaceTime video-calling. To keep the band-width requirements under control, for the cellular service providers, Apple kept the front facing camera to roughly 1 million pixels. Currently, the cellular providers have greatly enhanced their Networks by a factor of 10x, so live streaming HQ video is now mainstream.

iPhone 6S Front Facing 5pm Camera. Apple increasing the front facing camera to 5mp will deliver very high quality images for publication to Facebook, Twitter and other Social Networks. The Front Facing Camera upgrade will also deliver true 1080p, 30 frames per second, High Definition Video, for making Selfie videos, HDTV Movies, High Definition FaceTime calls, and high resolution selfie Picture taking.

iPhone 6S Rear Facing 12mp Camera. Apple increasing the Rear Facing Camera imager to 12mp is a significant increase. Apple has resisted increasing the pixel count in prior iPhone iterations; however, Apple improved and increased the iPhone’s pixel-size to reduce low-light noise.

iPhoneOgraphy, iPhone Digital Photograph As a frame of reference the traditional 8″x10″ Color Print at 300dpi, requires 7.2mp of image data. (The math: 8x300x10x300 = 7,200,000) One of the principle reasons that Apple retained the 8mp pixel-dimension, was the iPhone’s ability to make Framable 8×10″ prints.

iPhoneOgraphy. Apple continued to improve Picture Taking by re-Engineered the actual Pixels for three subsequent years (rather than increasing the pixel count) improving the Lens Systems, and adding Optical Image Stabilization, reducing blurred-pictures, by virtually eliminating camera shake.

iPhoneOgraphy for the inPhone 6S. Its reported from supply-line sources that the iPhone 6S Front facing camera will contain a 12mp imager. A traditional digital file with a pixel dimension of 12mp RGB (bayer array: red green blue) can deliver a 300dpi print of 10″x13.3″ which is a remarkable capability for a Camera-Lens System that is the size of a small Green Pea, imbedded in the iPhone 6S.

iPhoneOgraphy 4k Video HDTV. The new Rear Facing Camera would also have the capability of recording true 4k HDTV Movies at 30 frames per second. True HDTV 4K recordings means that 30 frames per second with each frame containing a pixel dimension of 4096×2160 pixels, which equates images of 8.847mp each, recorded at a frame rate of thirty frames per second. Canon’s $10,000 five pound DSLR professional camera can capture 4k video, but certainly not “pocket-friendly.” This is a lot of imaging data. Better upgrade your next iPhone to 128GB Phone storage!

In practice, if you were video recording a Tennis Match in 4k format (A), one could scroll through the video Frames, locating the exact Frame where the Tennis Ball was impacted upon the strings of the Tennis Racket, a precise moment in time that Professional Photographers strive for, with their $10,000 Canon SLR cameras, that can capture high-speed photography at just 12 frames per second. Truly, a Wow Factor.

iPhoneOgraphy 4k Video Picture Frames (B), Combine 4k video recording with a Optical Zoom lens, would create an Action Sports camera to behold. Notice the tennis match that I shot in 2005 at a FAU Woman’s Court. With 4k recording this shot would be common-place rather than a hard sought-after lucky capture.

http://www.416-1100.com/gallery/392033

iPhoneOgraphy, One More Thing. Recently, Apple received a Patent for incorporating a Bayonet Mounting System into the iPhone in support for its Rear Facing camera Lens opening. If implemented, Apple (or the After-Market) would be able to manufacturer Lens Attachments to be precision mounted onto the iPhone.

iPhoneOgraphy. If and When Apple chooses to build a stainless steel Bayonet Mount, this would encourage even more picture taking, with an array of zoom lenses, wide-angle lenses, and telephoto lenses.

iPhoneOgraphy ALSO, Apple received a Patent where a 3x Optical Zoom Lens would be built into the iPhone, internally, making the iPhone with no attachments, an all-in-one camera system combined with all the capabilities of the smartphone.

iPhoneOgraphy. Apple is fully aware that its iPhones owners are capturing Billions of Pictures and video clips. Apple knows that the iPhone Camera with its high quality picture taking capability, is one of the major reasons folks buy iPhones, combined with the iPhone’s new larger 4.7″ and 5.5″ Displays, and its incredible array of iPhone designed Apps.


———————– Previously Reported ————————–

iPhone 7 has been on Apple’s Drawing Boards for some time. There may not even be an iPhone 6S, that has been anticipated. Yes, there will likely be a New iPhone released in Q3 of 2015. There are a number of unknowns, among a few: (A) What will Apple call the next iPhone iteration, iPhone 6S or iPhone 7, (B) What are the New iPhone Specifications and improvements from the present day iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, (C) What are the New iSight Camera Specifications, will Apple be able to incorporate a true Dual-Lens Sight camera system, or a 3-Imager Array with Optical Image Stabilization, incorporated with a 3x Optical Zoom Lens with a field of view of say 20º to 60º range (both these iSight configurations are Apple owned Patents). (D) Perhaps the iSight Camera receives a new 12 Million Pixel Imager, with enhanced color rendition and low-noise performance.

iPhones are sophisticated hand-held compact communications devices that require thousands of man-hours to develop, test, engineer, retest, reengineer, construct prototypes, field-test, fabrication production-run tests, then mass-produce.

Question remains: Will Apple release an iPhone 6S in 2015 or choose to call it an iPhone 7. There have been lots of chatter mentioning that the iPhone 6S iteration thought to be released in Sept, 2015, will not occur with the “S” model. However, Apple may release the iPhone 7 in 2015 because of its extensive improvements, that are certainly not an incremental improvement.

Apple’s iPhone 7 Camera may be the Really BIG News. A recent US Patent Awarded to Apple, designs a new image-splitting Cubic methodology, an optical zoom and image stabilization camera lens system, low noise improvement, color rendition. Perhaps a new optical image stabilization system coupled to the three-imager system that separately processes Red, Green, and Blue light.

Current reports out of China indicate that the iSight Camera may increase the Imager to 12 million Pixels. If the iSight Camera system is configured with a dual-camera system, perhaps the 12 million pixels equates to Two Imagers of 6 million pixels each.

iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus mass-production will commence in August, 2015 in preparation to its subsequent release. iPhone 6 to iPhone 6 Plus mass-production will be at a 2:1 ratio, favoring the more popular iPhone 6. Assuming drop-testing is now satisfactory, the iPhone 6 Plus model may incorporate a new Sapphire display-cover; the use of Sapphire would be a First for any current smartphones on the market. Currently the Watch and the Watch edition models utilize Apple’s new sapphire display covering.

iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus have been out for 9 months, with only 3-Months remaining until the next iPhone; Accordingly, it’s time to update the rumors regarding the next generation iPhone. No one knows if the next iPhone will be named the iPhone 6S, or the iPhone 7, but from industry sources, we are expecting the iPhone 7 to arrive in the 3rd quarter of 2015.

The next iPhone may feature an edge-to-edge, or near edge-to-edge display removing all or most of the edge-bezel that exists in the 5.5″ iPhone 6 Plus. iPhone 7 may be the result of removing most of the bezel {the black “boarder” that outlines the display area}. This will have the effect of “creating” a larger image-display area, without increasing the edge-to-edge dimensions of the overall iPhone 7 and iPhone 7 Plus. As for resolution, we think Apple will likely retain the pixel dimensions at 1080p, and physical dimensions of the iPhone 7 models will remain constant with the iPhone 6 and 6 plus.

Apple Software Engineers are busy finishing iOS9. Operating System where the beta version has been circulated to the development community for testing and operability. Oftentimes, these software updates give “hints” on the new iPhone 7 features. We cannot ignore the concurrent developments with the iWatch, when discussing the advent of the next iteration, the iPhone 7.

Force Touch Technology. One of the “Operating System” features that may be brought over from the Apple Watch is Force Touch. This is a software methodology that distinguishes between a Tap and a forceful Touch. Generally speaking a Tap is a brief gesture made to a touch-screen display signifying a menu item, a “send” or “answer” button.

A Forceful Touch is a new gesture where a user applies finger-pressure on a menu item, indicating to the Operating System to launch a “Sum Menu” for example. In actuality the display does not notice or measure physical pressure; however, applying a press, the system recognizes the “diameter” of the finger when a there is a brief Tap, as compared to an “increasing diameter” of the finger, and a longer Press duration that occurs on the touch screen.

Inside the iPhone, Apple will likely replace the A8 processor with a new A9 processor, fabricated by Samsung, however, designed by Apple. Samsung will use the new thinner 14nm FinFET technology when manufacturing Apple’s new A9 custom processor.

Lets Get Scientific for a moment. The term “14nm” refers to the size of the transistors that are used to make a whole integrated circuit or ‘chip’. Back in the days of the earliest integrated circuits these transistors were 10 microns across or nearly 1,000 times larger than they are today. Reducing the size of these transistors has important benefits.

Because of the way integrated circuits are built on fixed-size sheets of silicon, by making each circuit smaller, more circuits may be built on a given sheet size, reducing the cost per transistor and giving greater performance for the same cost.

Additionally by reducing the distance between transistors, the amount of power required is reduced to activate the circuits and to move the signal from one circuit to the next. The results is a reduction in overall power consumption. For Apple “14nm” means greater performance, less heat, lower power consumption and bet better battery life.

Expect a seriously fast Multi-Core processor in the iPhone 7. On the rear of the iPhone 6, 6 Plus, Apple may install a tandem, dual-lens Cameras into the iPhone 7 that will provide “DSLR Quality” images. The rear-facing camera in the Samsung Galaxy S6 and S6 edge is impressive, therefore it will be interesting to test Apple’s new camera systems.

iPhone 7 for the Record. The next iPhone whether its named the iPhone 6S or the iPhone 7, will not actually be the 7th iPhone. The iPhone 6 and 6 Plus were in order, the 9th and 10th iPhone models released respectively. If Apple were to adopt the next Number for all the new model-releases, no more “S” designations for odd-year releases) then the iPhone 7, 7 Plus would be the 11th and 12th in line.
S

Historically, when Apple updates a current iPhone model, Apple adds the “S” moniker to the model name its updating, the “odd-numbered years,” such as 2009, 2011, 2013, and 2015 presumably. For example, iPhone 4S was an update of the iPhone 4, iPhone 5S updated the 5, and this year Apple will likely name this year’s update of the iPhone 6, the iPhone 6S. This year may change this naming sequence.

iPhone 7 Whispers & Rumors are Circulating. Apple’s very complex iPhones are literally self-Powered package of technologies including a high speed, highly compact, power efficient Computer coupled to several sophisticated multi-channel “Radio Transceivers” capable of communicating with over 600 channels of ultra-high frequency cellular networks, countless WiFi Systems, Routers, Bluetooth connectivity, plus a high-quality image-stabilized HDR digital camera, high frame rate HDR full resolution 1080p HDTV video camera, all secured with Biometric FingerPrint technology giving the equivalent of 9-digit password protection.

Apple is concentrating its engineering FOCUS on the iPhone’s iSight Camera, its Processor, and other internal components, when enhancing the iPhone models released in odd-numbered years. This year, 2015, the new iPhone 7 will likely follow this upgrading formula.

Over 35% of the Folks buy iPhone 6 were Android “Switchers” according to Industry Tracking Services, reporting Carriers, and Apple. Apparently there is a large installed base of Android smartphone users that are migrating to Apple, now that the iPhone 6 is offering larger displays.

iPhone 6 and 6 Plus Sales are far and away Better than Analysts predicted, Apple sold 135 Million iPhones Globally for the 6 months period ending March 31, 2015. Surveys conducted by Canaccord indicates that a “greater mix” of Android users {about double} are converting to the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus than did to the iPhone 5, 5s, or 5c. A recent Kantar Worldpanel ComTech study noted that across Germany, France, Italy, Spain, and the U.K., roughly 32.4% of new iPhone buyers migrated from Android in the last quarter.

Data from the IDC’s latest Mobile Phone Tracker survey reveals that 98.8 million smartphone units shipped in China in the first three months of 2015. Despite a 4.5% contraction, Apple grew its sales a massive 62.1% year over year. IDC’s Tracker reports that Apple shipped 14.5 million iPhones in China in the quarter, earning the company 14.7% market share, making iPhone China’s No. 1 smartphone vendor.

Analysts fail to notice the Chinese 4.3% contraction in smartphone sales was largely due to Samsung’s significant 11.3 million unit drop in sales Y-O-Y, from 20.9 million to 9.6 million units sold, more than double China’s percentage contraction.

Reports from Asia claim that this year’s Apple smartphone for 2015 will double its RAM and pack 2GB of LPDDR4 memory, which is a speed and efficiency upgrade from the current LPDDR3. Apple may have made this decision in order to keep iPhone operations (iOS systems, Apps & Games) more fluid, as content becomes more demanding and screen resolutions increase.

In Sum, iPhone for 2015 may be named the iPhone 6S, according to history and recent conflicting reports. For those who don’t remember, the iPhone 5S featured internal improvements (the most notable being Toupch ID Fingerprint, upgraded Processor, Camera, Imager, Lens system) over its iPhone 5 predecessor. The iPhone 6S (it’s not an Apple officially announced name for the 2015 iPhone) could very well be an upgrade to the current iPhone 6 model, or iPhone 7, because of major internal innovations justifying the advanced nomenclature.

One More Thing on this Topic. Lets look at nomenclature from a Marketing perspective. Apple knows that only 20% of the installed iPhone-user-base upgraded from an older iPhone to the New iPhone 6. Apple reported that 13% of existing iPhone users upgraded to the iPhone 6 by December 31, 2014, and an additional 7% of existing iPhone users upgraded to the iPhone 6 by March 31, 2015.

Conversely, this means 80% of existing iPhone owners have not upgraded to iPhone 6 or 6 Plus. To help motivate this large 80% group of {iPhone 5, 5S, 5C, 4, 4S, 3G and 3GS} users, about 250 million of them, Apple may incorporate “magnanimous improvements and technology” into the Next iPhone iteration, to help encourage more existing iPhone users to upgrade this year.

Apple may jump directly to the iPhone 7 to make it indelibly clear that the 2015 iPhone iteration is NOT an Incremental update.

Apple is now the Top smartphone seller in China, topping foreign and domestic competitors alike in the Middle Kingdom, but overall Chinese handset sales fell for the first time in six years, mainly due to Samsung’s 53% drop in unit sales, Y-O-Y. IDC’s annual report cited sales in the first quarter of 2015 found that APPLE has taken over the top spot on the strength of 14.5 million units shipped, an increase of 62% year-on-year. Apple also noted a surge in sales for China during Apple’s company’s last quarterly call. Apple executives reported China revenue was up 71% on the year-ago quarter at a record clip of $16.8 Billion.

Apple’s 14.7% share of the market edged out Xiaomi, who shipped 13.5 million units on the quarter for a 13.7% share of the market. Huawei was third, with 11.2 million units and an 11.4% market share. Followed by Samsung and Lenovo, both of whom plummeted in the Chinese market over the last year. Last year’s leader Samsung saw a 53% year-on-year drop in sales as the Korean firm went from 20.5 million handsets shipped and a 19.9% market share to just 9.6 million units and a 9.7% market share. Lenovo’s position tumbled from 10.2% to 8.3% of the total market as year-on-year shipments fell by nearly a quarter from 10.5 million to 8.2 million handsets. All other vendors sold for 41.7 million handsets, accounting for 42.2% share of the market.

In total, IDC estimates that 98.8 million smartphones were shipped in China on the quarter, down 4.3% from last year’s Q1 total of 103.2 million units. It it noted that 4.4 million unit drop was largely due to Samsung sales were down over 50% from the previous period.

Analysts noted that the market for smartphones in China, as in other nations, has gone flat as consumers have been reluctant to trade in their current handsets for new models. “China is oftentimes thought of as an emerging market but in reality, the vast majority of phones sold in China today are smartphones, similar to other mature markets like the US, UK, Australia, and Japan,” explained IDC China managing director Kitty Fok.


———————– Previously Reported ————————–

 Apple’s Light Separation imager system is not a new development; however, presently these technologies exist in $10,000+ HDTV network video cameras. The unique technology rests with is Cubic-Light-Splitter. “Prism Systems” are incorporated in HDTV video rigs. The New iPhone 7 iSight Camera for 2015… will Apple really be able to incorporate this 3-Imager Array with Optical Image Stabilization, incorporated with a 3x Optical Zoom Lens with a field of view of 22º to 66º range? Notice the Patent received March 24, 2015, describing this design.

My personal opinion, the external dimensions of the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus may remain the same for the iPhone 7 and 7 Plus. Any marginal increases to the display size may be effected by bezel reductions. The other improvements will be display brightness, resolution, pixel density, Processor speed, a jump in RAM to 2GB, and elimination of the 16GB traunch in storage, rendering storage choices of 32GB for the standard configuration, and 64GB and 128GB as option increases.

Why would Apple skip the iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus (established nomenclature) for its 2015 model release in September… My belief is its a Marketing Perception move.

iPhone 6 and 6 Plus have been near-nuclear-hot selling release, with 74,500,000 iPhone 6 and 6 Plus’s sold its Q1, 2015 fiscal quarter, that’s 827,778 iPhones per Day, or 34,490 per Hour, for every hour in a 24 hour day.

Tim Cook mentioned “…that 85% of the 74.5 Million iPhone buyers were NEW to Apple, and 35% of them came to iPhone from Android… and only 15% were previous iPhone upgrades…” These facts were mentioned during Apple’s quarterly Conference Call in January, 2015. This is huge news to Apple, to develop a plan to motivate new buyers and iPhone upgraders to acquire the newest iPhone, plus Apple wants to eliminate the stigma that the “S” model year improvements as just “an incremental release”.

Apple’s 2015 iPhone model name, skipping directly to the iPhone 7 and 7 Plus is justified because of the internal improvements and performances, and eliminates the critics use of “incremental” associated with the “S” model year releases that have occurred in Odd-Year model releases. Additionally, the fact that Apple desires to showcase the very best products, in their categories, has led to speculations amongst media and tech enthusiasts that the Apple iPhone 7, as opposed to the rumored iPhone 6S, will be launched in 2015.

Recall, with the release of the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, only 15% of the existing iPhone 4, 4S 5, 5C and 5S owners upgraded to the iPhone 6 models, and some 35% of the new iPhone 6 buyers came from Android users. This translates to 85% of the existing iPhone (4, 4S 5, 5C, 5S) owners, totaling 220,000,000 for these iPhone models, have yet to upgrade. This 85% market-segment, this over 200 million iPhone owners, is precisely where Apple may likely apply sharp focus, for the September, 2015 iteration cycle.

A Key Factor, the market has reacted extremely positively to the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus. This has led to a change in priorities, with pressure from investors like Carl Icahn pushing Apple to change its two-year aesthetic and technology redesigns to a Yearly Affair, rather than a Major iPhone Upgrade in EVEN numbered Years, and incremental “S” iPhone updates on ODD Years. China is a KEY Stakeholder, a market that Apple wishes to gain more share. CHINA’s demand for iPhone 6 Plus is greater than most other countries’ iPhone 6 demand.

iPhone 7 is expected to have a screen size close to 4.9 inches, an increase from 4.75″ while the iPhone 7 Plus is expected to increase to near 5.7″ screen up from 5.5″ by reducing the horizontal and vertical bezel widths. This would render the iPhone 7 to be its largest iPhone since its inception in 2007. However, the external dimensions of the iPhone 7 models will remain consistent with the iPhone 6 models.

 The new iPhone 7 may likely see a Very Significant iSight Camera upgrade, with its rear camera sensor being increased over 8 megapixels; or a NEW 3-Imager System, collecting Red, Green, and Blue light-segments using a unique Light Splitting Array, building onto the iPhone’s already impressive imaging history.

iPhone 7 may have a quad-core A9 processor to power the two iPhone 7 models, to power the new Imaging Array as well as a near-QHD display resolution, given Apple’s history with using non-standard resolutions for its devices.

iPhone 7 is rumored to have more RAM, like 2GB, and integrated graphics on the next generation flagships’ SoC will be key upgrades that will allow them to power higher resolution displays and provide significant hardware efficiencies over the previous generations.


Previously Reported:

http://www.kantarworldpanel.com/global/smartphone-os-market-share/

https://fau4u2.wordpress.com/category/news-apple-rumors-whispers/

 iSight iPhone 7 Dual Camera System: It has been widely reported over various iterations of the “S” Models, the “Odd Numbered Year” iPhone updates, that the iSight Camera receives considerable engineering attention. This year may not be an exception.

 The rumor-mill is intensifying, our articles will bring to you unannounced product whispers, that have several sources, in effort to keep the “junk” to a minimum. Incidentally, one of our articles that was written 90-days before the iPhone 6 was announced, was recently reviewed… we on-target with most of the iPhone 6 predictions and features. Take a look at our Rumors and Whispers tab looking at the June-July 2014 articles.https://fau4u2.wordpress.com/category/news-apple-rumors-whispers/

 iPhone 6S Dual Camera System.This Year the whispers are hovering around the iPhone potentially receiving a TWO iSight Camera configuration. One lens being set to “slightly Wide Angle” the second lens being set to “slightly Telephoto.” Each lens system would be supported by its own high-resolution [8Mp] low-noise Imager. [Editor: Perhaps 10MP this year]. The heavy lifting is with some very unique software algorithms “OverLaying” the two captured high-resolution images, and creating a single ultra-high-resolution image, similar to what one would expect from a quality digital SLR camera.

 iPhone 6S Dual Lens iSight Cameras. With this unique dual-iSight Camera arrangement, an added benefit would be the resultant image would be rendered with twice the number of pixels collecting light and image information, effectively Doubling the Image Resolution, in addition to Halving Image Noise. Sophisticated software techniques are deployed to improve image quality with auto-digital-zoming with image-matching during the “OverLay” processing. As c|Net has reported about this technology so the technology exists… the question… has Apple licensed the technology, or is Apple engineering their own unique method to be used in future versions of its iPhone.
http://youtu.be/bKyM-XKhZJY

 Apple department heads and engineering teams therefore have to “Predict what the Buying Public will likely Desire years into the Future” years before the Current iPhone Models is released. Accordingly, many iPhone suppliers, beta models, screen makers, sensor makers, lens grinders, chip foundries, processors, batteries… their staffs are aware of what may be coming for the latest iPhone models on the drawing board. There are likely 3 to 4 iPhone models in various stages of development presently, not to mention other new unannounced product creations under wraps.

Apple’s iPhone 6S, iPhone 7 the iPhone 7S, and iPhone 8, are in various levels of Development, given that an iPhone requires years before a new iPhone is “Finalized for Mass Production.”

Apple is currently completing the Finalization of the iPhone 6S, the last stage before it is released for mass production. Accordingly, rumors & whispers of what may come in the next iPhone, may confuse next years components with the year after’s components.

 The iPhone 6S will be due for a Major Update to its internal components occurring September, 2015, about 7 months to go. In recent years, historically speaking, iPhones that were released in even-numbered years, the iPhone model names were: iPhone 4 in 2010, iPhone 5 in 2012, iPhone 6 in 2014.

Apple Software Engineers are busy finishing iOS8.2 Operating System where the beta version has been circulated to the development community for testing and operability. Oftentimes, these software updates give “hints” on the new iPhone 6S features. We cannot ignore the concurrent developments with the iWatch, when discussing the advent of the next iteration, the iPhone 6S.

Interesting discovery in looking at the current beta iOS Code, is the function of a iWatchCompanion App. This App apparently will be a built-in App of the iOS8.2 operating system. When the AppleWatch Companion App is launched, the iPhone to communicate with the iWatch, making for a convenient “Settings Menu” using the iPhone, for convenient selections, watch faces, position of App Icons, etc for the iWatch, once complete, transmit button will send the settings to the iWatch. Settings may also be changed on the iWatch, however the iWatch Companion App is a convenient settings tool. Apple Watch will be compatible with iPhone 5, 5C, 5S, 6 and 6 Plus.

 Over recent years historically, the “odd-numbered years,” such as 2009, 2011, 2013, and 2015 presumably, when Apple updates a current iPhone model, Apple adds the “S” moniker to the model name its updating; for example iPhone 4S was an update of the iPhone 4, iPhone 5S updated the 5, and this year Apple will likely nam”{e this year’s update of the iPhone 6, the iPhone 6S.

iPhone 6S Whispers & Rumors are Circulating. Apple’s very complex iPhones are literally self-Powered package of technologies including a high speed, highly compact, power efficient Computer coupled to several sophisticated multi-channel “Radio Transceivers” capable of communicating with over 600 channels of ultra-high frequency cellular networks, countless WiFi Systems, Routers, Bluetooth connectivity, plus a high-quality image-stabilized HDR digital camera, high frame rate HDR full resolution 1080p HDTV video camera, all secured with Biometric FingerPrint technology giving the equivalent of 9-digit password protection.

Apple is concentrating its engineering FOCUS on the iPhone’s iSight Camera, its Processor, and other internal components, when enhancing the iPhone models released in odd-numbered years. This year, 2015, the new iPhone 6S will likely follow this upgrading formula.

iPhone 6 performs smoothly even with 1GB of RAM ;[‘
,;memory
. The secret lies with the iOS8 platform, ]optimizations, the way the iPhone handles memory, internal tasks, the Apps, as well as Apple’s strict programming requirements for its App developers.

Reports from Asia claim that this year’s Apple smartphone for 2015 will double its RAM and pack 2GB of LPDDR4 memory, which is a speed and efficiency upgrade from the current LPDDR3. Apple may have made this decision in order to keep iPhone operations (iOS systems, Apps & Games) more fluid, as content becomes more demanding and screen resolutions increase.

iPhone for 2015 may be named the iPhone 6S, according to recent reports. For those who don’t remember, the iPhone 5S featured internal improvements (the most notable being Toupch ID Fingerprint, upgraded Processor, Camera, Imager, Lens system) over its iPhone 5 predecessor. The iPhone 6S (it’s not an Apple officially announced name for the 2015 iPhone) could very well be an upgrade to the current iPhone 6 model.

Apple’s own announcement history proves that every two iterations there’s a major change internally and externally; however, for “odd numbered year” model enhancements the iPhone improvements have been viewed as “incremental” updates. Apple analysts say the iPhone experiences major updates every two years, with improvements in specs for the alternate year cycles. [Editor: we believe the “incremental” designation is a gross-oversimplification for thousands of hours of Apple management and engineering efforts.]

iPhone 5S compared to the iPhone 5. Comparing the iPhone 5 to the 5S may give clues in predicting the enhancements to this year’s iPhone 6S. Although the two models (the 5 and 5S) are nearly identical as to its external appearance, its case, and dimensions, the iPhone 5S boasts a number of new significant features internally.

New Bio-metric Finger Print Touch-ID Security” a highly accurate fingerprint scanner embedded within, under the iPhone’s newly sapphire-covered Home Button, reported to have the equivalency of a strong 8-digit password. This is a unique feature of the iPhone 5S (and new to any smartphone) which provides the user the ability to securely unlock the phone just by touching the Home Button. [Editor: think about it, an 8-digit password has over 99 million numerical combinations, which means with Touch-ID Fingerprint technology, only 3 other individuals in the North America continent could unlock your iPhone]

New iSight Imager with larger Imager-Pixels of 1.5 microns each, up from 1.4 microns, iPhone 5S comes with a new iSight Camera whose improved image-sensor, 7.14% larger pixels, provides for higher resolution images with Lower-Image Noise, and better color rendition. [Editor: A 7.14% increase in pixel-size sounds minimal; however, in these compact hand-held iPhones, space is limited, and the imager is about the diameter of a very small green-pea]

Increased the iSight Lens Aperture to f2.2 from f2.4 which has the effect of significantly increasing the “amount of light” exposure onto the image sensor, provides better pictures in Low-light situations. [Editor: This increase in aperture permits 70% more light onto the imager; another example, increasing an Aperture to f1.4 from f1.8 actually Doubles the amount of light passing through the lens to the imager.]

New True-Tone Dual LED Flash System. This new flash system performs by accurately auto-calculating the color of the ambient lighting conditions in the image-area into which FLASH will be added; upon auto-calculation the COLOR of the Flash emulates the natural ambient lighting of the scene. [Editor: sounds simple, but not so; we know of no other Electronic Flash system, regardless of cost or size, that is capable of auto-color-correct its Flash output on-the-fly]

New iSight Camera Records at 120 FPS Slow-Motion Video capability, resulting in high quality slow-motion video clips. Only multi-$thousand SLR cameras had this capability. Typical video recorders operate at 30 frames per second. Recording at 120fps gives the effect of slowing down motion to 1/4th speed. [Editor: Think about it, 120 frames of 2.2mp for each image-frame, each video-frame having a file-size of say 3MB, equates to 360,000,000 bytes of digital image data, processed and recorded every second. A billion BYTES of image information processed every 3 seconds is unheard of even for most desktop PC Computers; yet the Apple critics call the iPhone 5S an “incremental update NOT.]

New 64-bit A7 Processor chip, increased from a 32-bit processor, the first smartphone to have this broad-band architecture, giving blazing fast processing speeds. [Editor: This means, if the processor’s band-width increased from 32-bits to 64-bits, using a “water-pipe” analogy, if the processor band-width increased a 32mm diameter pipe to 64mm diameter, it delivers 400% more throughput]

New M7 Motion Processor chip to measure and processes Motion, GPS, Altitude and other location attributes have been enhanced from the previous M6 chip. [Editor: Apple removed the location attributes and calculations from the main A7 processor and created a separate M7 processor, so that both the A7 and M7 processors may coProcess simultaneously, enhancing resulting speed; also the M7 processor is specifically designed to efficiently process location-based geophysical data.]

Reports from Asia claim that the new iPhone 6S will use “Force Touch” technology a technology that first appeared in the Apple Watch. “Force Touch” incorporates an electronic-grid around the flexible Retina display to distinguish between a person’s light-tap and a firm-depression, which may trigger a different software feed-back response, like instant access to a range of contextually specific controls, such as an Action-menu in Messages, or a Mode that allows one to Select different AppleWatch faces. [Editor: The display’s new “Force Touch” an Apple branding for pressure-sensitivity is the most significant addition to display-sensing-capability since Multi‑Touch on the original iPhone in January 9, 2007]

iPhone 6S iSight camera is likely due for a significant Update. Over recent years the “Odd years” 2009, 2010, 2013, Apple had concentrated its engineering Focus on the iSight Camera, among other components. News reports have stated recently have indicted that the iPhone has captured more Digital Images than any other SmartPhone, dedicated pocket Camera, SLR, by any Brand, or type. Apple knowing this will surely enhance the iSight Camera to provide.

Based on recent Rumors, Whispers, and Reports, the following 9 Enhancements may appear in the Apple’s to be released iPhone 6S and 6S Plus:

1⃣  iSight Camera Lens System Aperture of f2.0 from f2.2 providing for significantly more light exposure on the image sensor

2⃣  iSight Camera Lens System to have true Optical Zoom which gives crystal-clear wide angle and telephoto pictures

3⃣  iSight Camera Imager may have 10 million pixels or more

4⃣  iSight Camera Imager may have 1.6 micron pixel size for better low-light low-noise performance

5⃣  RAM on-board memory increased to 2GB for better multi-App performance

6⃣  RAM Memory to be LPDDR4 high-speed read-wright capability

7⃣  Sapphire Crystal for the main display

8⃣  Main Display to be OLED for improved Brightness in high ambient lighted areas like outdoors

9⃣  Main Display incorporating Force Touch tactile technology similar to AppleWatch’s display

📲 Presently in the USA, over 52% of all American smartphone owners have iPhones, the remaining smartphone users, the 48% smartphone users, are grouped together (the 12 brands and models of Androids, Blackberry, Google, Samsung, HTC, Nokia, Motorola). Apple’s market-share in North America is growing. Industry experts expect, with the release of the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, Apple’s market share for their iPhones will grow at an accelerated rate, as Android users migrate to Apple, now that the Display size objections are resolved, with Apple’s 4.7″ and 5.5″ screens.

📲 Apple iPhone “supply-line” chatter is hot and heavy as the next weeks speed forward. Combine this chatter with several layers of (Chinese) Mandarin translation, it becomes difficult to differentiate between which models are being referred to, either the iPhone 6S, iPhone 7, iPhone 7S, or iPhone 8, all of which are in various stages of development and testing. Expressed above is the best we could surmise.

📲 Virtually all of the rumors and schematics pertaining to Apple’s next iPhone center on its ultra-thin design and two Display sizes: 4.7″ and 5.5″ or larger as bezel dimensions reduce.

📲 Recall none of the figures, dialogs, and proforma-images, come from Apple officially, but from “snitches” in its supply-line. Of course its no surprise that Apple totally ignores, and is aggravated by all the “news” reports and rumors.

📲 Other than leaked supply-line secrets, punishable by aggressive prosecution by Apple, everything displayed and discussed is conjecture. Since there are such a vast number of enterprises, engineers, and factory workers involved with the fabrication and assembly of the new iPhones, whispers arriving from several directions that have a common-thread, could lead an observer to deductions, which are assembled in this article.

Apple’s iPhone Compared to a Burroughs $250,000 Enterprise Computer. Jim Wilson in 1975 is reviewing a COBOL program printout generated by the Burroughs B2700 Computer system.

Burroughs B2700 Computer Specifications are as follows
➖ Burroughs B2700 Computer System $125,000
➖ System Memory configured for 128 MegaBytes upgrade $40,000
➖ System Removable Dual Drives, 2.2 MegaByte Disks $30,000
➖ System Card-Reader and Card-Punch $8,000
➖ System 132 Character high-speed Line-Printer $22,000
➖ System Weight/Size 1720 pounds, Fills a 10’x12′ Room
➖ System Power Requirements, 240v 50 Amp stabilized, $2,500
➖ System Climate Control Required, Force Air System 65ºF to 75ºF

iPhone 6 Plus Specifications are as follows
➖ iPhone 6 Plus base System, $550
➖ System Memory configured for 128 GigaBytes upgrade, $200
➖ 600 Channel ultra-high frequency Cellular Transceiver, Included
➖ High Definition 8 MegaPixel digital Camera, Included
➖ High Definition 1080p digital HDTV Video Camera, Included
➖ System Weight/Size 172 Grams, Fills Hand, 6.2″x3″x0.28″
➖ System Power Requirements, Builtin LiON Battery, Included
➖ System Climate Control Not Required, 45ºF to 95ºF

Pleased you’re reading, with over 88,000 readership world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 26,000,000 visits today: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

🇺🇸🇺🇸🇺🇸 Larry Babato’s Center for Politics at University of Virginia 🇺🇸 Latest on Presidential Primaries 🇺🇸🇺🇸🇺🇸

1440503020.jpg

🇺🇸 The BIG Question: Will Hiliary Clinton face Criminal Indictments for exposing Top Secret National Security Documents housed in an unsecured Server and transmitting emails on unsecured devices.

🇺🇸 Two US Government Inspectors General have asked the Justice Department to open a criminal investigation into whether Hillary Rodham Clinton mishandled sensitive government information on a private email account she used as Secretary of State, senior government officials said Thursday. Subsequently the FBI was ordered by the Justice Department to conduct its Criminal Investigation. These two Inspector Generals have notified Congressional Investigators that two of the four emails examined, contained Top Secret information, the other two emails contained Classified information. See 18 USC 2071

18 U.S. Code § 2071 – Concealment, Removal, or Mutilation of Government Records

(a) Whoever willfully and unlawfully conceals, removes, mutilates, obliterates, or destroys, or attempts to do so, or, with intent to do so takes and carries away any record, proceeding, map, book, paper, document, or other thing, filed or deposited with any clerk or officer of any court of the United States, or in any public office, or with any judicial or public officer of the United States, shall be Fined under this title or Imprisoned not more than three years, or both

(b) Whoever, having the custody of any such record, proceeding, map, book, document, paper, or other thing, willfully and unlawfully conceals, removes, mutilates, obliterates, falsifies, or destroys the same, shall be Fined under this title or Imprisoned not more than three years, or both; and shall forfeit his office and be Disqualified from holding any Office under the United States. As used in this subsection, the term “office” does not include the office held by any person as a retired officer of the Armed Forces of the United States.

🇺🇸 Kyle Kondik, Managing Editor, Sabato’s Crystal Ball, August 20th, 2015, It’s time to ask a question, the answer to which we do not know:

🇺🇸 Will former Secretary of State Hillary Clinton’s private emails and the server scandal do fatal damage to her campaign?

🇺🇸 Over the past few months it’s become clearer that the questions surrounding Clinton’s emails, and a corresponding flood of negative press that she has been unable to counteract, have done her considerable harm, at least in the short term.

🇺🇸 Clinton’s favorability rating has continued to erode. In June, we noted that despite months of questions about her emails, the story broke in early March, Clinton’s net favorability had only gone from 48%-46% favorable to 46%-48% unfavorable, according to HuffPost Pollster’s average. Since then, her unfavorability has only inched up to 49%, but her favorability has dropped to about 41%.

🇺🇸 The fact that her unfavorability number hasn’t grown much while her favorability number has clearly dropped suggests that some Democrats and Democratic-leaning independents are not willing to say they like their party’s frontrunner right now, but they also aren’t willing to say they dislike her. These are the voters that Clinton, as the nominee, would probably be able to bring back into the fold. Polarization raises the floor for candidates of both parties, even ones who are damaged.

http://www.centerforpolitics.org/crystalball/2016-president/



Pleased you’re reading, with about 90,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

★★★ Marijuana Cures Cancer ♻️♻️♻️ Fed Government and the National Institute of Health reveal their Multi-Decade Cover Up ⭐⭐⭐

1440458813.jpg

♻️ Federal Government, the National Institutes of Health (NIH), and the multi-national Pharmaceutical Industry, have concealed a highly effective and completely natural remedy and relief for cancer.

♻️ Marijuana {cannabis} is very effective at killing cancer cells without harming healthy cells that occurs with radiation and chemotherapy, the Federal Government and NIH have {quietly} confirmed in recent weeks.

♻️ On the NIH website devoted to Hideous Disease, Cancer.gov published the truth about marijuana and its effectiveness at combatting cancer.

♻️ Marijuana: This admission is a stunning reversal of over 40 years of deliberate fear-mongering and propaganda portraying Marijuana as Dangerous, apparently to satisfy the financial interests of the Pharmaceutical industry, Prison system, and Law Enforcement Agencies at local, state, and federal levels.

♻️ http://www.cancer.gov/about-cancer/treatment/cam/patient/cannabis-pdq

♻️ The NIH has known for a long time, literally decades, with mountains of empirical evidence, that the compounds in marijuana, cannabinoids (delta-9 THC and cannabidiol [CBD]), are effective at killing cancer cells, they have discovered how the Biochemistry actually works.

♻️ Incredibly since the 1970s these “trusted governmental agencies” insisted that marijuana had absolutely No Medicinal effect or value for human beings, and placed Marijuana in the same classification as heroin…

♻️ Department of Health’s National Cancer Institute is now “advising that cannabinoids {Marijuana} are useful in treating Cancer and its side effects by smoking it, eating it in a baked product, drinking it as an herbal teas, or even spraying it under the tongue.”

♻️ The U.S. Department of Health also made a partial list of other highly-beneficial medicinal uses of Marijuana such as reducing anti-inflammatory activity, blocking cancerous cell growth, relieving muscle spasms in multiple sclerosis sufferers, as an effective anti-viral agent, an anti-bacterial and preventing the growth of blood vessels that supply tumors.

♻️ National Institute of Health, the NIH studies have shown that {Marijuana} cannabinoids reduce the risk of colon cancer, and are effective in its treatment.

♻️ Studies revealed that Marijuana’s component, delta-9-THC killed or damaged hepatocellular carcinoma (liver cancer), and killed cancer molecules in “non-small cell lung and breast cancer cells.” One specific study of Marijuana cannabidiols (CBD) in estrogen receptors showed “{Marijuana} caused cancer cell death while having no effect on normal, healthy breast cells.” Even in advanced cancer stages where it was not diagnosed early, when given as a supplement with chemotherapy, CBD and THC greatly enhance the effectiveness of chemotherapy as well as restoring appetite and relieving nausea.

♻️ This is a partial list of the illnesses which Cannabis or Cannabis extracts can treating the symptoms or curing the illness:

Acquired Hypothyroidism Hepatitis C
Acute Gastritis HIV/AIDS
Agoraphobia Hospice Patients
AIDS Related Illness Huntington’s Disease
Alcohol Abuse Hypertension
Alcoholism Hyperventilation
Alopecia Areata Hypoglycemia
Alzheimer’s Disease Impotence
Amphetamine Dependency Inflammatory Autoimmune-mediated Arthritis
Amyloidosis Inflammatory Bowel Disease (IBD)
Amyotrophic Lateral Sclerosis (ALS) Insomnia
Angina Pectoris Intermittent Explosive Disorder (IED)
Ankylosis Intractable Vomitting
Anorexia Lipomatosis
Anorexia Nervosa Lou Gehrig’s Disease
Anxiety Disorders Lyme Disease
Any Chronic Medical Symptom that Limits Major Life Activities Lymphoma
Arteriosclerotic Heart Disease Major Depression
Arthritis Malignant Melanoma
Arthritis (Rheumatoid) Mania
Arthropathy, Gout Melorheostosis
Aspergers Meniere’s Disease
Asthma Motion Sickness
Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADD/ADHD) Mucopolysaccharidosis (MPS)
Autism Multiple Sclerosis (MS)
Autoimmune Disease Muscle Spasms
Back Pain Muscular Dystrophy
Back Sprain Myeloid Leukemia
Bell’s Palsy Nail-Patella Syndrome
Bipolar Disorder Nightmares
Brain Tumor, Malignant Obesity
Bruxism Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
Bulimia Opiate Dependence
Cachexia Osteoarthritis
Cancer Panic Disorder
Cancer, Adrenal Cortical Parkinson’s Disease
Cancer, Endometrial Peripheral Neuropathy
Cancer, Prostate Peritoneal Pain
Cancer, Testicular Persistent Insomnia
Cancer, Uterine Porphyria
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome Post Polio Syndrome (PPS)
Cerebral Palsy Post-traumatic Arthritis
Cervical Disk Disease Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)
Cervicobrachial Syndrome Premenstrual Syndrome (PMS)
Chemotherapy Prostatitis
Chronic Fatigue Syndrome Psoriasis
Chronic Pain Pulmonary Fibrosis
Chronic renal failure Quadriplegia
Cocaine Dependence Radiation Therapy (Learn more)
Colitis Raynaud’s Disease
Conjunctivitis Reiter’s Syndrome
Constipation Restless Legs Syndrome (RLS)
Crohn’s Disease Rheumatoid Arthritis
Cystic Fibrosis Rheumatoid Arthritis
Damage to Spinal Cord Nervous Tissue Rosacea
Darier’s Disease Schizoaffective Disorder
Degenerative Arthritis Schizophrenia
Degenerative Arthropathy Scoliosis
Delirium Tremens Sedative Dependence
Dermatomyositis Seizures
Diabetes, Adult Onset Senile Dementia
Diabetes, Insulin Dependent Severe Nausea
Diabetic Neuropathy Shingles (Herpes Zoster)
Diabetic Peripheral Vascular Disease Sinusitis
Diarrhea Skeletal Muscular Spasticity
Diverticulitis Sleep Apnea
Dysthymic Disorder Sleep Disorders
Eczema Spasticity
Emphysema Spinal Stenosis
Emphysema Sturge-Weber Syndrome (SWS)
Endometriosis Stuttering
Epidermolysis Bullosa Tardive Dyskinesia (TD)
Epididymitis Temporomandibular Joint Disorder (TMJ)
Epilepsy Tenosynovitis
Felty’s Syndrome Terminal Illness
Fibromyalgia Thyroiditis
Friedreich’s Ataxia Tic Douloureux
Gastritis Tietze’s Syndrome
Genital Herpes Tinnitus
Glaucoma Tobacco Dependence
Glioblastoma Multiforme Tourette’s Syndrome
Graves Disease Trichotillomania
Headaches, Cluster Viral Hepatitis
Headaches, Migraine Wasting Syndrome
Headaches, Tension Whiplash
Hemophilia A Wittmaack-Ekbom’s Syndrome
Henoch-Schonlein Purpura Writers’ Cramp



Pleased you’re reading, with about 90,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

Construction Progress • Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton • Progress Photos • Live Video Streaming • Palmetto Park Rd at Federal Highway • Plans • Specs ⚠️🏨️🚜🏨⚠️🏨🚜🏨⚠️

1439990000.jpg

⚠️ $50,000,000 Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton. Boca’s new Hotel with its Grand Opening planned for Q3 of 2016 will contain 200 rooms, stand 160 feet tall, including 20 feet of structures on its roof of the 140 foot building. Lots of Construction activity on site.

⚠️ Construction is progressing at a rapid pace. The 180′ Crane is in place and lifting and placing millions of pounds of construction materials. The ground floor and 2nd level has been framed and poured with concrete. Ground Level Columns and the Parking Garage are being framed.

⚠️ Notice the 6 Concrete Trucks on site on June 17th. This was the day for pouring a number of the major Foundation components, and the Support for the Boom-Crane (blue iron-work) that will be erected once the Concrete sets over the Week. From 8am through 4pm there was a continuous stream of Concrete Trucks each delivering 8 cubic-yards of mix, that was pumped into the foundation forms on site, all day

⚠️ Structural Engineers say that Concrete reaches over 75% of its Hardness (4000psi compression) within the first 7-Days following the Concrete Pour, and continues towards 100% hardness over the next 100 years. Yes, concrete continues to gains hardness over a 100 year period, although reaches over 95% of its Hardness (5200 psi compression) in the first 4 weeks of curiung.

⚠️ Live Video Streaming. Within this article immediately below at this arrow ➡️ symbol is a convenient link that will take you directly to our Live Streaming HDTV Video camera focused on this project, active 24/7.

⚠️ Hyatt Place has commenced construction to be an integral part of Ram Realty’s mixed-use Mark at Cityscape project. Each month for the next 18 months, we will visit the property, take progress photos, and make informal status remarks. Our review is completely independent from the Property Owner and the City Officials. This Article contains information regarding the following topics

⚠️ Progress Photos of E. Palmetto Park Rd at S. Federal Highway
⚠️ Building Renderings
⚠️ Construction Drawings
⚠️ Site Plans
⚠️ Hotel Amenity Package
⚠️ 1st Floor 20,000sf Lobby & Restaurant
⚠️ Plans • Specs • Estimated Development Costs
⚠️ Live Video Streaming HDTV Camera active 24/7
➡️ http://dropc.am/p/wXpSkA

Site preparation on May 25 2015

⚠️ Construction Progress as of May 25, 2015 for the $50 Million Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton. Displayed above is an image showing the Property as of May 25th, showing that the site has been completely cleared of debris from the Parking Lot previously occupying the 1 Acre site.

⚠️ During May, 2015 most of the effort was concentrated on subterranean site work. Cranes are Hoisting a 24″ diameter, 35 foot long, high capacity water-hydrating auger, that is driven 30 feet below the surface, hydrating the soils, then bulldozers are backfilling the depressions with surface ground, hydrating, stabilizing, and compacting the site. This procedure is the project Geologist’s remediation recommendation for stabilizing the site for above ground construction. Geologists will examine the site (post-remediation) to certify that the subterranean-remediation has stabilized the site for the proposed project

➡️ Next, Geologists will again use subsonic geological instruments to “look” beneath the surface to examine the stability of the site and give their certification that the site is suitable for the 200 room high-rise Hotel project

➡️ Next, if the Recommended Remediation has not stabilized the site, the Geologists will issue another “Remediation Report” outlining any additional procedures necessary to stabilize the site. If more remediation is required, the Geologists will thereafter re-examine the subterranean conditions, and issue its Certification

▶️ Next, Civil Engineers will re-Examine the physical Site, Survey, Verifying all 4 Corners with 8 foot Iron-Rod Monuments outlining the Property boundaries, according to the Survey and the Site Plan

➡️ Next, Professional Engineers will stake-out the outlines and set-back requirements for all the Corners for the Hotel Foundation system, which will control the Excavation crews. These setbacks will be verified two times, before any Concrete is Poured.

➡️ Pre-Construction Remediation and Certification, Why all the Fuss?… Its difficult to shift a 160 foot tall, 15 Million Pound, 200 Room Hotel Building that does not comply with the set-back requirements, or is resting on unstable soil that may collapse if unaddressed.

➡️ As a former Construction Supervisor for several multi-$Billion Banks, I’ve witnessed (although a rare occurrence) a major City’s Building Department, force a Property Owner to either
(A) Cut-Off 4 feet of a multi-story building that was not properly situated on the site, violating the city’s set-back requirements, or
(B) Bulldoze the Project and start over. Both choices are financially devastating to the property owner. Proper pre-construction civil engineering, double checked, prevents these issues.

⚠️ Construction Commenced April 20, 2015 for the $50 Million Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton. Displayed below is an image showing the Property as of 24 April 2015, that has been completely cleared of the debris from the Parking Lot that previously occupied this 1 Acre Lot
▶️ Next, the Civil Engineers and Geologists will examine the Site its stability, the Survey, the site plan, Mark and Certify all 4 Corners with 8 foot Iron-Rod Monuments that exist outlining the Property boundaries
➡️ Next, the Engineers will be staking-out the elevation and outlines for the Hotel Foundation system, which will guide the Excavation crews.
➡️ Next, the Geologists will use subsonic geological instruments to “look” beneath the surface to examine the stability of the site to give certification that the site is suitable for the 200 room high-rise Hotel, or issue a “Remediation Report” outlining the procedures necessary to stabilize the site. If remediation is required, the Geologists will thereafter re-examine the subterranean conditions, and issue its Certification.
➡️ Next, the Engineers will be staking-out the elevation and outlines for the Hotel Foundation system, which will guide the Excavation crews.

⚠️ Construction Progress. If you would like to view the progress of construction, we’ve activated a public-accessible HDTV Video Camera {100′ above ground}. The camera is available to those interested in viewing activities at the HYATT PLACE Construction Site 24/7. Here’s the Link ➡️ http://dropc.am/p/wXpSkA

⚠️ Photographs below were Imaged as Construction Commenced, a very important Day for the Developer and Property Owner. For major commercial developments such as the HYATT PLACE, the project generally requires several years of Planning, Architectural, Engineering, Legal, and Jurisdictional Approvals before Permits are Issued and a Shovel goes into the Ground.

⚠️ During the 1st Week of each Month while the project is being constructed, progress Photos will be published below in Date order.

⚠️ Live Streaming Video Link. The DropCam Camera is zoomed to 6.0x, and operates on a HighSpeed WiFi connection which may effect image-quality. Your image may appear somewhat pixelated due to Internet and WiFi bandwidth issues. The Camera also picks-up ambient sound, notice the Palmetto Park Road and Federal Highway traffic in the Background.

⚠️ Live-Streaming signals occasionally requires several seconds to LOAD due to the Viewer’s WiFi Connection and local issues with the Internet; You may need to Click onto the link again to Connect. {http://dropc.am/p/wXpSkA} The HDTV camera operates 24/7.

⚠️ The HYATT Place Hotel will occupy this 13 story facility containing 151,190 square feet, with a swimming pool amenity package located Roof-Top, and a limited-access Hotel parking garage located on floors two through five. The ground floor the Hotel will have a 10,970 square foot modern lobby and registration area with a 5,625 mezzanine area, plus an 8,000 square foot Restaurant located at the south-east corner of Federal Highway and Palmetto Park Road.

⚠️ Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton. Configuration: 200 rooms 13 story classic design, consisting of 151,190 sq ft. The Hyatt Place Hotel will contain a restricted access (hotel visitors and guests only) integrated 273 Car structured parking garage consisting of 115,354 sq ft, plus 49 offsite Cars, via an irrevocable parking easement at the Mark’s Apartment 700 car parking garage. The structured parking garage is located on levels 2, 3, 4 and 5, housing about 68 Cars per floor for the 4 garage floors.

⚠️ $50,000,000 Property Valuation for the Hyatt Place project. This commercial property may have an estimated property valuation once the property reaches stabilized operating income. Here’s the math
⚠️ $26,250,000. Hard Cost to build Hotel Building of 151,190sf at $175/sf
⚠️ $5,750,000. Hard Cost to build Hotel parking garage, 115,354sf, 273 Car Garage, $20,000/car, $50/sf
⚠️ $5,500,000. Land Cost for the Property, 1.087 site, $116.08/sf
⚠️ $5,500,000. Soft Cost: Permits, Fees, Plans, Architects, Interest, Supervision & Overhead
⚠️ $43,000,000. Total Development Costs
⚠️ $7,000,000. Entrepreneurial Profit
⚠️ $50,000,000. Total Property Value. These cost estimates have not been derived from the developer nor any agency sources; However, the cost of the property was abstracted from Palm Beach County Records. In sum, this project is a relatively massive 13 Story, 200 rooms, and structured parking for 273 Cars. The facility accents Boca Raton Raton’s City Center at the Eastbound lanes of Palmetto Park Road at the intersection of the Northbound Lanes Federal Highway, definitely defined as Boca Raton’s “Main and Main” location.

⚠️ Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton will consist of 200 rooms configured into a 13 story classic design, containing 151,190 sq ft of building area . The Hyatt Place Hotel will contain a restricted access (hotel visitors and guests only) integrated 273 Car structured parking garage consisting of 115,354 sq ft, plus 49 offsite Cars, via an irrevocable parking easement at the Mark’s Apartment 700 car parking garage adjacent to the hotel property. The hotel structured parking garage is located on levels 2, 3, 4 and 5, housing about 68 Cars per floor for the 4 garage floors.

⚠️ Hyatt Hotels promotes its Hyatt Place hospitality brand with a focus towards business travelers; however, experience demonstrates in south Florida, that the new Hyatt Place in Delray Beach, located in the PineApple Grove district of Delray Beach, having opened in 2012, draws business travelers and vacationers. The Delray’s Hyatt Place’s general manager says hotel operations have been “terrific.”

⚠️ The City of Boca Raton Raton and a number of property owners have sought a suitable project for this 47,450 square foot site, 1.087 Acres, the southeast corner of Palmetto Park Road and Federal Highway, literally “Main and Main” for the City. Success finally came late in 2014, as the council unanimously approved Kolter Hospitality’s Development Application (DDRI No. CRP-08-03R2) the official building plan for the proposed.

⚠️ $50,000,000 Property Valuation for the Hyatt Place project. This commercial property may have an estimated property valuation once the property reaches stabilized operating income of $50,000,000. Here’s the math
⚠️ $26,250,000. Hard Cost estimate for the construction of Hyatt Hotel Building containing 151,190sf at $175/sf equals $26,250,000
⚠️ $5,750,000. Hard Cost estimate for the construction of the Hotel parking garage containing 115,354sf or 273 cars at $20,000/car or $50/sf equals $5,750,000
⚠️ $5,500,000. Land Cost for the Real Property, the 1.087 site at $116.08/sf or $5,500,000
⚠️ $5,500,000. Soft Cost estimate for Permits, Fees, Building Plans, Architectural Fees, Interest cost, Supervision and Overhead total $5,500,000
⚠️ $43,000,000. Total Development Costs. $43,000,000
⚠️ $7,000,000. Entrepreneurial Profit. $7,000,000
⚠️ $50,000,000. Total Property Value. $50,000,000. These figures have not been derived from any developer or government sources other than the cost of the property abstracted from County Records. All told this project is a relatively massive 13 Story facility accenting Boca Raton Raton’s City Center at the Eastbound lanes of Palmetto Park Road at the Northbound Lanes Federal Highway, definitely defined as Boca Raton Raton’s “Main & Main” location.

⚠️ Boca Raton has tried to fill its downtown vacant Corner for many decades. You may have expected Applause and Champagne after the City Council’s approval of the project. Instead, the discussion was quite stilted, featured a few questions from council members, some squawking from holdout critics, who questioned setback rules for the proposed hotel.

⚠️ September 22, 2014 at 1:35 pm the City Clerk recorded the Vote at this quasi-Judicial hearing, thereafter CRA Chairman Scott Singer moved on to the next agenda item. Done. Sounds simple, well its not. Recall this 1 Acre site has been vacant for over 25 years, previously developed with a Gas Station with leaking fuel tanks. $200,000 later the site was cleaned of toxic fuels, and replaced with cleaned earth.

⚠️ Make no mistake about it, this project is a really big deal. In downtown Boca, this vacant lot has stood out like a missing tooth in an otherwise great smile. The City leaders and planners believed that it shouldn’t just fill the gap with “just anything…” There were repeated references in the many presentations to the City Council, that this development is a “landmark project” on a “landmark corner.” Councilman Mike Mullaugh called this project a “new benchmark” for downtown development. [Hopefully: the benchmark he’s referring to is Taller Buildings and more Growth. IMHO, a City that prevents growth, is a City that becomes unhealthy.]

⚠️ A Brief history for this 1 acre corner site. In the late 1990’s this corner was “zoned for a 200,000+ square foot office building” that would contain an oversized parking garage to accommodate the new corner office building, plus the garage would have sufficient excess parking to accommodate the existing Merrill Lynch office building whose address is 150 East Palmetto Park Road, a 66,618 square foot facility. Today, and ongoing Merrill Lynch and the other office tenants are parking in the 700+ Car structured parking garage associated with the MARK’s new 208 unit Apartment Building. Previously the SE corner 1 acre site served as a parking lot for Merrill Lynch building tenants and overflow parking for CHOPS Lobster Bar’s valet parking crew.

⚠️ Construction Progress. If you would like to view the progress of construction, we’ve activated a HDTV video camera (from an 8th Floor Balcony) that is available to anyone interested in viewing what’s going on 24 hours a day.

http://dropc.am/p/wXpSkA

⚠️ Live Streaming Video Link. The link {displayed above} will take you directly to this Live-Streaming Camera URL site. The DropCam Camera is zoomed to 6.0x, and operates on a HighSpeed WiFi connection which may effect image-quality. The image may appear somewhat pixelated due to WiFi bandwidth issues. The Camera also picks-up ambient sound. Note: the Live-Streaming may need a few seconds to load, or may require viewers to reload the link displayed above. The HDTV camera operates 24/7.

⚠️ Hyatt Place is the Highest and Best Use for this property, and particularly since there are no existing down-town Hotels in the City of Boca Raton. There are several Hotels in the Boca Raton Raton vicinity, most notably the Boca Raton Hotel and Club, a premium luxury resort, the Waterstone Hotel, both within 1 mile, plus a number of others hotels located 4 or more miles from the city-center. Below in this article are 6-hotel graphic identifying hotels in the Boca Raton Raton SMSA, and another 6-hotel graphic showing similar hotels in the Delray Beach SMSA.

⚠️ The new (2012) Hyatt in Delray Beach works well in the Pineapple Grove neighborhood north of Atlantic Avenue. Though the Boca Hyatt Place with its 200 room capacity will be significantly larger, about 50% larger than Delray’s new 134 room Hyatt Place, and the Boca Raton site also is situated in a more urban environment, considered to by many real estate professionals as a “Main and Main” address.

⚠️ Boca Raton’s Hyatt Hotel was designed by Paul Slattery, Architect, is stylish, with the developers working with the City’s staff and consultants to maximize the Hyatt Hotel’s compatibility with the city’s desires, to be a pedestrian-friendly section of downtown after all the construction is completed.

⚠️ Paul Slattery, the project architect said “…We wanted to break the project down to a human scale, and I think we achieved that for the most part…” Slattery’s Boca Raton firm secured the architectural work for the Hyatt Place, as it did for the Hyatt Place in Delray. The main issue, Slattery says, “…is how to mass the building, to make it work with the surroundings….”

⚠️ The Challenge. Boca Raton’s first downtown hotel will be the first downtown high rise to go on a lot smaller than city rules allow. When it’s finished, the Hyatt Place Hotel Boca Raton, at 120 E. Palmetto Park Road, will be the third downtown building allowed to rise beyond Boca Raton’s initial 100-foot maximum height. The site which was approved months ago is in full conformity with City ordinances which at the time required a minimum lot size of 2 acres.

⚠️ The Hyatt Hotel building was allowed to reach a total of 160 feet tall, with 140 feet for the building floors, plus an additional 20 feet in elevation for decorative elements used to shelter HVAC and Elevator equipment that is mounted on roof structures. This added height permission was granted under temporary rules adopted by the city.

⚠️ Another City development requirement requires that the building be on a lot that is at least 2 acres; however this site is significantly less than 2 acres. The subject Hyatt lot size is 1.087 acres, or 47,350 square feet. The Boca Council members was reminded that a recent sale had severed the hotel site from its original 4.5-acre plot, which was severed from a 9.2 acre site years before. The hotel site would be situated on this a 1.087-acre lot.

🏨 Kolter Group, the hotel developer, purchased the site for $5.5 million on March 18, 2014, court records show for this 1.087-acre parcel. The Mark was the first building to be completed to rise to the new height, 140 feet, plus 20 feet for decorative elements. Tenants for that building started moving recently.

🏨 Kolter Hospitality is the hospitality development, investment and management affiliate of The Kolter Group. To date, Kolter Hospitality’s management team, in addition to having earned the Hyatt Developer of the Year Award, has executed on over $800 million of multiple types of commercial real estate transactions. Kolter Hospitality currently owns and operates four branded select service hotels totaling over 600 keys.

🏨 Kolter is a multi-platform real estate development firm with $9 billion of real estate projects (both completed and currently in development) since 1993
🏨 Residential projects currently in development total over 19,000 units with target sell-out value of approximately $6 billion
🏨 Sales of historical developments in low-rise, mid-rise, tower, and master-planned communities of over $3 billion
🏨 Mostly realized self-developed commercial portfolio valued at approximately $1 billion
🏨 Strong balance sheet and sponsorship
🏨 Leadership team with nearly 200 years of experience and over $17 billion in transactional volume
🏨 Current Kolter projects located in FL, GA, NC and SC.



http://www.kantarworldpanel.com/global/smartphone-os-market-share/

Pleased you’re reading, with about 80,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

♻️ ANTS Driving You BUGGY ♻️ Spread Disease ♻️ Here is the All Natural Solution ♻️ Its SAFE, Non-Toxic and DEET Free ♻️♻️♻️♻️♻️♻️

1440015769.jpg

♻️ Household ANTS Driving You totally BUGGY? Ants Spread Disease, and can contaminate our food. Here is a simple, inexpensive, readily available, all natural solution, plus its SAFE, Non-Toxic and DEET Free.

♻️ Lets have a seat, a Cup of Coffee, and talk about an amazing solution to our Ant issues…. Now that we’ve had our Coffee, please don’t discard the Coffee Grounds.

♻️ Coffee Grounds is the Solution. Ants dispatch scout ants all around their territory looking for food and moisture. Once food is located, the ant-scouts round-up a gang of worker-Ants, directing the platoon to the location of the food source. Used Coffee Grounds, used caffeinated coffee grounds that is, {not decaf coffee grounds} is attractive to most varieties of household, lawn and garden Ant communities.

♻️ Accumulate one measuring Cup {8oz} of used ground coffee. Since the coffee has been processed with 192ºF hot water. Therefore the grounds will be wet or moist. Obtain the used grounds within the same half-day that the coffee was brewed, then spread the grounds onto a large oven-top pan to Dry, or simply spread the moist coffee grounds on a opened News Paper for 12 hours to Dry, or place out in the sunshine for a few hours to Dry.

♻️ Dry the Coffee Grounds so that the grounds do not putrefy or become moldy. Once the coffee grounds are thoroughly Dry, refine the grounds to eliminate all the clumps, so the coffee is as “granular” as when the coffee was before brewing. Bottom line, these Ants have to carry each grain, one-by-one, back to their Colony’s nesting place, so lets not have the package too heavy.

♻️ Coffee Grounds offer a “food supply” to the Ants; However, the Ants unknowingly cannot tolerate the ingestion of the residual caffeine; These Ants effectively become “poisoned” due to an over-dose of caffeine, killing the Queen of the Colony and the Worker Ants. Viola, Ants are Gone generally in several days.

♻️ Placement of the Dry Used Coffee Grounds. For typical indoor use, I pour about a teaspoon of grounds into clean, dry, Red Caps from typical Polyethylene Milk Containers. Place these Caps in a variety of places in the Kitchen and Bathroom, any places where you have noticed Ants. Since these Caps are small, put a teaspoon of the dry coffee grounds in the cap and hide each Cap from your view, in a variety of places; not to worry, the Ants will find them. For very tight places, you can use a iced-tea spoon {with its longer reach} with some dry coffee grounds; reach deep into your Dish Cabinet, and simply dump some of the grounds into several back corners of your kitchen cabinets.

♻️ Coffee Grounds placement Outdoors. For outdoor use, for example where “Ant Hills” appear, simply pour a ring of grounds all around the Ant-Hill. You will notice that in a day or two, all the grounds will have been carried grtain-by-grain into the Ant Colony, and in several days, the Ant Colony will become vacant and dormant.

⚠️ Ant Hill images displayed may be coincidentally red-brown colored sand; these mounds are not the coffee grounds, but are the color of the underground sand and soil. Simply pour dry coffee grounds in a full-circle all around each Ant mound. The Ants will carry the some or all of the coffee grounds into their Colony in a day or two, depending how extensive the colony is underground. This is an excellent solution for outdoor yards and fields with young children or pets.

⚠️⚠️ CAUTION ⚠️⚠️ Please be Very Careful ⚠️⚠️ When dealing with Aggressive outdoor Ant Hills and Mounds, these outdoor Ants are generally very aggressive, where their bites may cause adverse allergic reactions, which may require Hospitalization. When pouring the Dried Caffeinated Coffee grounds in a complete circle around the Ant Hills and Mounds, stand at Arms-Length so as to not disturb the Colony.

⚠️⚠️ Ant Hill infestations that are the size of a Tennis Ball, pour about 1/2 Cup {4oz} of dried coffee grounds around each Ant Hill. No precision in this measurement; for larger infestations where there are multiple and hills seemingly connected, this may require about 1 full cup {8oz} of coffee grounds to complete the circle around all the mounds, plus or minus quantities will not significantly alter the effectiveness of the Coffee Grounds application.

♻️ Major Chemical Companies that manufacture and retail Toxic Poisons that kill Ants do not like the publication of our Coffee Grounds solution… However, this method really works and the net cost is ZIP as folks usually trash the used Coffee Grounds anyway. If you don’t drink coffee, go to your local Starbucks, Coffee Shop, or Diner, asking one of the Servers, if you may have some of the trashed, used Caffeinated Coffee Grounds {recall Decaf coffee grounds will not work}.

♻️ Are Mosquitoes Driving you totally Buggy. EverSāfe™ is the ALL Natural Solution.

♻️ Activate EverSāfe by adding 1 cup (8oz) of Tap Water or Fresh Water (not salt water nor brackish water) from a Spring, Stream, Canal, Pond, or Lake, while Camping, or at the Summer Home. Within the hour mosquitoes will not bite you, nor your pets.

♻️ EverSāfe is Non-Toxic so EverSāfe does not actually kill mosquitoes, it simply causes the fertile-females not to bite. Most importantly, EverSāfe™ is SAFE, Non-Toxic, and its GREEN.

♻️ EverSāfe™ is an All-Natural Mosquito Solutions for People & Pets. With EverSāfe™ you create a “People and Pet friendly” Bite-Free ZONE of 10,000 square feet in your front yard, back yard, side yard, dock side, campsite, tennis court, soccer & football fields, barns, garages, virtually any outdoor area. With EverSāfe™ you create a Bite-Free ZONE without toxic foggers, No harmful sprays or powders.

♻️ EverSāfe is packaged in a convenient GEO-Bag that has the all natural active ingredients locked inside. Simply open the Bag as you would open a bag of snack foods. Add about 6 ounces of room-temperature water, gently move the bag from side to side to stir the contents. Once mixed EverSāfe is effective for a week. With our personal use EverSāfe maintained a People and Pet friendly Bite-Free ZONE for 10 days or so. Gently agitating the GEO-Bag every 3 Days, will increase the number of day of its effectiveness.

♻️ You are now ready to place EverSāfe about 20 feet from your Patio, Dock, Camping Tent. Best to hang the Green Bag on a twig in landscape shrubbery 18″ from the ground. Otherwise use a wire-clothes-hanger. EverSāfe is effective in locations where the winds are calm or breezy. I have spoken to folks that live on the Fort Lauderdale, Florida’s intracoastal waterway, typically very windy, and loaded with lots of mosquitoes. EverSāfe effectively maintained a People and Pet friendly Bite-Free ZONE, unaffected by the constant winds and breezes at their Water Front home.

♻️ EverSāfe does not Kill Mosquitoes. EverSāfe maintains a People and Pet friendly Bite-Free ZONE with no poisons or toxins. EverSāfe works by creating a scent that changes a fertile Female Mosquito’s feeding habits, from obtaining blood, to eating plant-nectar. Male mosquitoes do not bite; only fertile Female mosquitoes bite humans and animals, to sustain their life-cycle. Therefor, once EverSāfe has been activated with water, Mosquitoes may remain in your yard, however they will not bite. Mosquitoes may land on your arm, but they will not bite. EverSāfe creates a Bite-Free ZONE, not a killing zone.

♻️ EverSāfe Geo Bag is pre-punched for hanging. You may also hang the EverSāfe Geo Bag on a fence or tree-trunk, using a small nail. EverSāfe Geo Bag may be placed on a level surface, however, protect it from being tipped over by pets or folks walking about in your yard, patio or dock-side. When selecting a location to place EverSāfe, avoid locations that are near sprinklers, as EverSāfe is effective with 6oz of water; therefor, do not overfill EverSāfe with irrigation water. Also it is best to chose a location where Rain Water will not overfill the EverSāfe GEO-Bag.

♻️ EverSāfe is sold at all Home Depot Stores in Florida, Louisiana and Texas, with more markets coming soon. EverSāfe is also available at HomeDepot on their on-line store. EverSāfe Mosquito Solution is also available on-line at: https://www.eversafeusa.com/category/all/

♻️ EverSāfe is All Natural made entirely from plant extracts and releases a safe, natural scent that is irresistible to Female Mosquitoes and causes them Not to Bite.

♻️ TV News Coverage. Take a moment to view the recent TV News Coverage about EverSāfe™ aired recently in the Tampa market.

http://www.myfoxtampabay.com/clip/10471277/battling-mosquitoes-10pm

♻️ Order EverSāfe Mosquito Solution on-line go to: https://www.eversafeusa.com/category/all/

♻️ Everything You Wanted to know about Mosquitoes, but were afraid to Ask. Interesting Factoids about these Blood-Sucking Pests that have been with us for over 200 Million Years. Below are some informal research results that contains many interesting facts about Mosquitoes, their origins, behavior, flying speed, distances traveled, eating habits, and more. Here are 100 Interesting Factoids about these Blood-Sucking Pests that have been with us on Earth for over 200 Million Years

♻️ Everything You Wanted to know about Mosquitoes, but were afraid to Ask. Below are 100 Interesting Factoids about Mosquitoes that have been on Earth for over 200 Million Years:

🐜 Mosquito is a Spanish word for “little fly”
🐜 The word Mosquito reportedly originated in the early 16th century
🐜 In Africa, mosquitoes are called “Mozzies”
🐜 There are more than 3,500 species of mosquitoes globally
🐜 There are about 175 mosquito species found in the United States
🐜 Anopheles quadrimaculatus, Culex pipiens, and Aedes aegypti most common
🐜 The Anopheles quadrimaculatus is a malaria carrier
🐜 The Culex pipiens, and Aedesand aegypti, spread various forms of encephalitis
🐜 Only Female Mosquitoes Bite people and draw Blood
🐜 Both Male and Female mosquitoes feed mainly on fruit and plant nectar
🐜 Female when fertile needs Human or Animal blood for her eggs
🐜 Female mosquitos rest 3 days after blood-feeding, before laying eggs
🐜 Mosquitoes don’t have any teeth that “bite”
🐜 Mosquitoes “bite” is really not a bite, its a puncture
🐜 The Female’s “bite” occurs with her long pointed mouthpart proboscis
🐜 Female Mosquitoes use the serrated proboscis to pierce the skin
🐜 Proboscis draws blood from a suitable capillary through its tubes
🐜 A mosquito can “drink” up to three times its body-weight in blood
🐜 It would take a million bites to drain all the blood from your body
🐜 Female mosquitoes can lay up to 300 eggs at a time
🐜 Mosquito eggs are deposited in clusters called Rafts
🐜 Rafts float on the surface of stagnant water
🐜 Mosquito eggs are laid in areas that flood regularly
🐜 Mosquito Eggs can hatch in as little as an inch of standing water
🐜 Females will lay eggs up to three times in their lifetime
🐜 Mosquitoes spend their first 10 days of life in water
🐜 Water is necessary for the eggs to hatch into larvae
🐜 Mosquito egg larvae are commonly called wigglers
🐜 Wigglers feed on organic matter in stagnant water
🐜 Wigglers breathe air from the surface of stagnant water
🐜 Wigglers then develop into Pupae, partially encased in cocoons
🐜 Over several days, the Pupae change into adult mosquitoes
🐜 Mosquitoes some varieties hibernate during “winter” months
🐜 Mosquitoes are cold-blooded and prefer temperatures over 75°F
🐜 Weather under 50°F mosquitoes hibernate for the winter
🐜 Female mosquitoes find holes waiting for warmer weather
🐜 Female mosquitoes lay eggs in freezing water, then mom dies
🐜 Mosquito eggs survive Winter until temperatures rise above 50°F
🐜 Female mosquitoes have 60-Day Lifespan in good conditions
🐜 Males mosquitoes have 10-Day lifespan, under ideal conditions
🐜 Female mosquitoes lay Eggs every 3 Days during their lifespan
🐜 Female mosquito species that hibernate, may live six months
🐜 Mosquitoes have six legs, a head, thorax, and abdomen
🐜 The Mosquito’s head has two large compound eyes
🐜 The Mosquito’s head has two ocelli (simple eyes)
🐜 The Mosquito’s head has two antennae and a proboscis
🐜 The Mosquito’s Proboscis, the body-part that penetrates human skin
🐜 Mosquito has two large, scaled wings sprout from the thorax
🐜 Midges and Crane Flies are often mistaken for large mosquitoes
🐜 Biting Midges, smaller than Crane Flies, shorter wings, feed in swarms
🐜 Mosquito “traps” often times attracts and kills biting midges
🐜 Crane flies are much larger than mosquitoes, up to 1½” long
🐜 Crane flies do not bite, however, feed on Mosquitoes
🐜 Male mosquitoes locate Females by the sound of their wings
🐜 Females can beat their wings up to 500 cycles per second
🐜 Males select the higher frequency of those beats to seek a mate
🐜 Mosquitoes do not generally fly very far nor very fast
🐜 Mosquitoes can fly distances of from one to three miles
🐜 Mosquitoes generally stay within 200 feet of where hatched
🐜 Salt Marsh Mosquito species may travel up to 40 miles
🐜 Mosquitos fly at a Top speed is 2.2 feet per second
🐜 Mosquitos fly at Top speed is 132 feet per minute, or 1½ MPH
🐜 Mosquitoes generally fly at or below an altitude of 25 feet
🐜 Some mosquito species found at 8,000 feet in the Himalayas
🐜 Mosquitoes can smell the human breath and the aroma of sweat
🐜 Mosquitoes have antenna receptors to detect carbon dioxide
🐜 Mosquitoes use CO2 to find humans that exhale and perspire
🐜 Mosquitoes use CO2 as “flight-trails”to find a source of blood
🐜 Perspiration (sweat) helps mosquitoes choose their victims
🐜 Human skin produces more than 340 chemical odors, aromas
🐜 Human odors smell like “lunch and dinner” to mosquitoes
🐜 Mosquitoes smell octenol, a chemical released in sweat
🐜 Mosquitoes smell cholesterol, folic acid, certain bacteria
🐜 Mosquitoes smell skin lotions and certain perfumes
🐜 Mosquitoes smell Animal Body-Heat are markers and targets
🐜 Mosquitoes use heat-sensors of its mouthparts detecting body-heat
🐜 Mosquitoes use heat-sensors to detect human blood under skin
🐜 Mosquitoes use heat-sensors to find plump capillaries for tapping
🐜 Mosquitoes feed during the day and nighttime
🐜 Mosquitoes, the Aedes variety are generally daytime biters
🐜 Mosquitoes, the Culex variety start “biting” at dusk for hours
🐜 Mosquitoes have been around the earth since the Jurassic period
🐜 Mosquitoes have been on earth for 210 million years
🐜 Mosquitoes have been mentioned by Aristotle around 300 BC
🐜 Mosquitoes have been mentioned by Sidonius Apollinaris, 467 BC
🐜 The bumps-welts on one’s skin is result of mosquito “bites”
🐜 The bumps-welts caused by mosquito saliva injected into the bite
🐜 One tube housed within the proboscis draws blood
🐜 Second tube housed within the proboscis pumps mosquito saliva
🐜 Mosquito saliva contains a mild painkiller and an anti-coagulant
🐜 Most people after a mosquito “bite” react with an allergic reaction
🐜 Mosquito’s saliva causes the bite-location to swell and itch
🐜 Malaria is caused by a parasite that lives in mosquitoes
🐜 Malaria parasite in mosquito saliva, passed to humans when bitten
🐜 West Nile Virus + other viruses are passed when Mosquitoes “bite”
🐜 Mosquitoes may also carry and pass on canine heartworm
🐜 West Nile virus came to the USA in 1999
🐜 Scientists in 1937 identified a feverish woman in West Nile, Uganda
🐜 Large outbreaks of the Virus reported in Israel and South Africa in late ’90’s
🐜 West Nile Virus first appeared in USA in 1999 with an epidemic in NYC

♻️ Simply add water, to the Pyramid or Eco-Bag unit and place nearby, and enjoy an environment virtually free of mosquitoes and their troublesome bites for one week. It creates a Bite Free ZONE covering about 10,000 to 15,000 square feet around your Pool, Patio, Barbecue, Water front yard, Back Yard, Barn, Stable, Golf Putting Greens and Practice T’s, almost any out-door setting.

♻️ Mosquitoes: Are Mosquitoes Driving You Absolutely Buggy? Recently reported Mosquitos are Spreading Diseases. If mosquitoes bite an Animal or another Human, and then that same Mosquito then bites you… You could infected with the bacteria or viruses from the others that the mosquito recently drew blood from.

♻️ A Mosquito biting you is very similar to sharing Contaminated Hypodermic Needles. The Mosquito’s Proboscis functions as the insect’s hypodermic needle, as injects you, seeking a blood capillary under your skin. The scary part of the story: this same mosquito may have bitten a seriously diseased person 30 miles away several hours ago, then bit You. There is an All Natural Solution – EverSāfe™ ~ It simply WORKS, Just Add Water ~ Its SAFE and GREEN 🏇 ⛳️ ⚽️ ⚾️ ♻️

♻️ One EverSāfe™ Eco-Bag unit protects 1/3 of an acre, a 75 foot circle, 100 foot by 100 foot area, about the size of an average backyard. In most conditions, EverSāfe™ causes your yard full of mosquitoes to stop biting, in about two hours and lasts up to one full week. The container, either an Eco-Bag or the Green Pyramid’s tough exterior stands up to harsh environments, yet it’s small enough to blend in discreetly with your landscaping, yard, Golf Course, Barn, Athletic Fields, Theme Parks, Hotel Grounds, Putting Greens, Golf Driving Ranges.

♻️ Heavy Mosquito infestations or areas blocked by buildings, plants or trees, simply hang multiple EverSāfe™ bags around the perimeter of the area you want to protect. Position the bags 50 to 100 feet apart and 20 to 70 feet away from where people and pets are most likely to be. Keep the bag stationary and in one location, and your protection will last up to one week. EverSāfe will not work if it is in motion.

♻️ Take a moment to view the recent Newsy Coverage about EverSāfe™ aired recently in the Tampa market. http://www.myfoxtampabay.com/clip/10471277/battling-mosquitoes-10pm

♻️ To order this amazing Mosquito Solution on-line go to: https://www.eversafeusa.com/category/all/

♻️ EverSafe™ All-Natural Mosquito Control – Eco-Bag EverSāfe™ safely and effectively controls mosquitoes in virtually any outdoor environment. Simply add water, place EverSāfe™ outside and enjoy the outdoors again, Bite-Free.

♻️ Controls mosquitoes for 1 week
♻️ Protects 1/3 of an acre- the size of an average backyard, for larger yards use two or three EverSāfe™ units
♻️ Use in backyards, gardens, patios and pools, playgrounds, RV sites and campsites, driving ranges, sports fields, barns and stables, and more
♻️ Safe for the earth, people, pets and wildlife
♻️ 100% natural; made with plant and botanical ingredients
♻️ Nontoxic and DEET-free
♻️ EverSāfe™ replaces toxic foggers, messy lotions, and harmful sprays
♻️ Easy to place the Pyramid or hang the Eco-Bag in your landscape
♻️ Easy to use: just add Water
♻️ Expandable: use multiple units to protect larger areas or for heavy infestations
♻️ Small and portable, convenient of you are going Camping
♻️ No power, no candles, and no batteries needed
♻️ Recyclable Bag

♻️ EverSafe™ All-Natural Mosquito Control – Pyramid. With the EverSafe pyramid unit, you have the ultimate in all-natural mosquito protection for up to a full week! Plus, the pyramid unit is refillable for continued enjoyment! Place the pyramid unit outdoors on the ground, or close to the ground, on a stable surface 20 to 70 feet away from where people and pets are most likely to be. No power or batteries are needed, just add water.

♻️ One EverSāfe Pyramid unit protects over 15,000 square feet about a 75-foot radius. In most conditions, EverSāfe clears an area of biting mosquitoes in about two hours and lasts up to a full week. The EverSāfe Pyramid rugged exterior can withstand the harshest environments, yet it blends in discreetly with your landscaping or yard
♻️ Controls mosquitoes for 1+ week
♻️ Protects 1/3 of an acre — the size of an average backyard
♻️ Use in backyards, gardens, patios and pools, playgrounds, RV sites and campsites, driving ranges, sports fields, barns and stables, and more
♻️ Safe for the earth, people, pets and wildlife
♻️ 100% natural; made with plant and botanical ingredients
♻️ Nontoxic and DEET-free
♻️ Replaces toxic foggers, messy lotions, and harmful sprays
♻️ Easy to use: just add water
♻️ Expandable: use multiple units to protect a large area
♻️ Reusable and refillable
♻️ Small and portable: 5″ x 5″ x 5″ inches
♻️ No power or batteries needed
♻️ Recyclable
♻️ 1 EverSafe unit and 1 one-week activating packet
♻️ Refills sold separately

♻️ EverSafe™ Two-Pack Refill. Want more mosquito-free time outdoors? Our refill packets can refresh your pyramid unit for more EverSāfe™ results! Thoroughly rinse out the unit, add 1 cup of water and one EverSafe refill, and experience another full week of bite-free protection
♻️ For use with EverSāfe All-Natural Mosquito Control units
♻️ Each refill keeps mosquitoes away for up to a week
♻️ Safe for the earth, people, pets and wildlife
♻️ 100% natural; made with plant and botanical ingredients
♻️ Nontoxic and DEET-free
♻️ Replaces toxic foggers, messy lotions, and harmful sprays
♻️ Easy to use: just add water
♻️ Refill package contains 2 one-week activating packets: 1.41 Oz (40g) for each packet

♻️ Take a moment to view the recent Newsy Coverage about EverSāfe™ aired recently in the Tampa market. http://www.myfoxtampabay.com/clip/10471277/battling-mosquitoes-10pm

♻️ To order this amazing Mosquito Solution on-line go to: https://www.eversafeusa.com/category/all/


♻️ Mosquitoes ♻️ Are Mosquitoes Driving You Buggy ♻️ Mosquitos are also Spreading Diseases ♻️ There IS an All Natural Solution ♻️ EverSāfe™ ♻️ It simply WORKS ♻️ Just Add Water ♻️ Its SAFE and its GREEN ♻️

♻️ Everything You Always Wanted to know about Mosquitoes, but were afraid to Ask: 70 Interesting Factoids about these Blood-Sucking Pests that have been with us on Earth for over 200 Million Years
🐜 Mosquito is a Spanish word for “little fly”
🐜 The word Mosquito reportedly originated in the early 16th century
🐜 In Africa, mosquitoes are called “Mozzies”
🐜 There are more than 3,500 species of mosquitoes globally
🐜 There are about 175 mosquito species found in the United States, with the Anopheles quadrimaculatus, Culex pipiens, and Aedes aegypti (Asian tiger mosquito) among the most common
🐜 The Anopheles quadrimaculatus is a malaria carrier
🐜 The Culex pipiens, and Aedesand aegypti are known to spread various forms of encephalitis
🐜 Only Female Mosquitoes Bite people and draw Blood
🐜 Both Male and Female mosquitoes feed mainly on fruit and plant nectar, but the Female also needs the protein in Human and Animal blood to help her eggs develop
🐜 Once the Female mosquito is filled with blood, she will rest for a few days before laying her eggs
🐜 Mosquitoes don’t have teeth causing a “bite” so the “bite” is really not a bite at all
🐜 The Female’s “bite” occurs when her long, pointed mouthpart called a proboscis punctures human or animal skin tissue
🐜 Female Mosquitoes use the serrated proboscis to pierce the skin and locate a suitable capillary, then draws blood through one of two tubes
🐜 A mosquito can “drink” up to three times its weight in blood, however, it would take about 1.2 million bites to drain all the blood from your body
🐜 Female mosquitoes can lay up to 300 eggs at a time
🐜 Usually, the eggs are deposited in clusters called rafts on the surface of stagnant water, or the the eggs are laid in areas that flood regularly
🐜 Mosquito Eggs can hatch in as little as an inch of standing water
🐜 Females will lay eggs up to three times in their lifetime
🐜 Mosquitoes spend their first 10 days of life in water
🐜 Water is necessary for the eggs to hatch into larvae, commonly called wigglers
🐜 Wigglers feed on organic matter in stagnant water and breathe oxygen from the surface
🐜 Wigglers then develop into Pupae and are partially encased in cocoons
🐜 Over several days, the Pupae change into adult mosquitoes
🐜 Mosquitoes hibernate during “winter” months
🐜 Mosquitoes are cold-blooded and prefer temperatures over 80°F
🐜 At temperatures less than 50°F mosquitoes shut-down (hibernate) for the winter
🐜 Adult female mosquitoes of some species find holes where they wait for warmer weather, while others lay their eggs in freezing water and the mother mosquito dies
🐜 Mosquito eggs will survive the Winder until the temperatures rise above 50°F, causing them to can hatch
🐜 Female mosquitoes have a lifespan of 60 days or less under good conditions
🐜 Males mosquitoes have the shortest lifespan, usually 10 days or less under ideal conditions
🐜 Female mosquitoes lay eggs about every three days during that their lifespan
🐜 Females of the mosquito species that hibernate, may live up to six months including the hibernation period
🐜 Mosquitoes have six legs, a head, thorax, and abdomen.
🐜 The Mosquito’s head has two large compound eyes, two ocelli (simple eyes), two antennae and a proboscis which is the body-part that penetrates human skin, housing its two-tubes
🐜 Two large, scaled wings sprout from the thorax
🐜 Midges and Crane Flies are often mistaken for large mosquitoes
🐜 Biting Midges are smaller than Crane Flies, have shorter wings and tend to feed in swarms
🐜 Mosquito “traps” more often attract and kill biting midges
🐜 Crane flies are much larger than mosquitoes, up to 1½” long in some cases, do not bite, however, feed on Mosquitoes
🐜 Male mosquitoes locate Females by the sound of their wings
🐜 Females can beat their wings up to 500 times per second, and the Males pick out the higher frequency of those beats when seeking a mate
🐜 Mosquitoes do not generally fly very far or very fast.
🐜 Mosquitoes can fly distances of from one to three miles, and often stay within several hundred feet of where they were hatched
🐜 Salt Marsh Mosquito species can travel up to 40 miles
🐜 The top speed for a mosquito is about 2.2 feet per second, or 132 feet per minute, or 1½ miles per hour
🐜 Mosquitoes generally fly at or below an altitude of 25 feet
🐜 Some mosquito species have been found at extraordinary heights, including 8,000 feet up in the Himalayas Mountains
🐜 Mosquitoes can smell human breath
🐜 Mosquitoes have receptors on their antennae that detect the carbon dioxide released when humans and animals exhale. Those plumes of CO2 rise into the air, acting as flight-trails the mosquitoes follow to find a source of blood
🐜 Perspiration (human sweat) helps mosquitoes choose their victims
🐜 Human skin produces more than 340 chemical odors; some of these odors smell like “dinner” to mosquitoes
🐜 Mosquitoes are fond of octenol, a chemical released in sweat, as well as cholesterol, folic acid, certain bacteria, skin lotions, and certain perfumes
🐜 Human and Animal Body-heat are markers, the target for mosquitoes
🐜 Mosquitoes use heat-sensors around their mouthparts to detect the warmth of the human body, actually, the blood inside it, then land on you and locate the best plump capillaries for tapping
🐜 Mosquitoes feed day and night. Some species, like the Aedes are daytime biters, while others, like Culex, start biting at dusk and continue a few hours into dark
🐜 Mosquitoes have been around the earth since the Jurassic period, making them about 210 million years in existence
🐜 Mosquitoes have been mentioned throughout history, including in the written works of Aristotle around 300 B.C. and in writings by Sidonius Apollinaris in 467 BC
🐜 The bumps on one’s skin from mosquito bites are caused by mosquito saliva injected into the bite location
🐜 One tube housed within the proboscis draws blood, the second tube pumps in saliva containing a mild painkiller and an anti-coagulant
🐜 Most people after a mosquito “bite” react with minor allergic reactions to the mosquito’s saliva, causing the area around the bite location to swell and itch
🐜 Malaria is caused by a parasite that lives in mosquitoes. The parasite gets into the mosquito saliva and is passed on when the insect bites someone
🐜 West Nile and other viruses are passed the same way
🐜 Mosquitoes can also carry and pass on canine heartworm
🐜 West Nile virus came to the U.S. in 1999
🐜 Scientists first identified it in a feverish woman in Uganda, the West Nile district, in 1937
🐜 There were large outbreaks of the virus reported in Israel, South Africa, and Romania up through the late ’90’s
🐜 The West Nile virus first appeared in the United States in 1999 with an epidemic in New York City

Pleased you’re reading, with over 80,000 readers world-wide, growing by 1000/week, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Story: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

25,290,651

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,290,651 visits as of July 30, 2014: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Mini, (I sold my iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and an ACME MADE San Francisco rubberized thin slip-over protective case. This thin package actually fits into my trousers pocket.

UBER Wins 🚖 The People of Palm Beach Win 🚖 Palm Beach County Commission VOTES Down its New Ordnance 🚖 UBER is GOOD to Operate without New Oppressive Regulations 🚖 RIDERS Voices Have been HEARD 🚕🚖🚕

1439941187.jpg

🚖 Palm Beach County VOTES Down “Staffs Recommended” Oppressive Ordnance in attempt to Stifle UBER. Accordingly, UBER is GOOD to Operate under its current Temporary Operating Agreement which expires September 30, 2015 without any new Oppressive Regulations.

🚖 UBER’s Bottom line, thousands of Uber RIDERS Voices {The Public} have been HEARD. Tens of Thousands of Uber riders signed Petitions, Telephone Called, and Emailed the County Commissioners, which compelled the demise of the County’s Proposed Oppressive Ordnance, that would have forced UBER out of Palm Beach County.

🚖 UBER and the Public also Wins in Broward. A similar result in last week’s Broward County Commission meeting which Voted 6:2 in Favor of UBER. Once a new Broward Commission Ordinance is Passed UBER will turn on UBER in Broward. In Palm Beach County, since UBER already has a Temporary Operating Agreement with the Palm Beach County, the commissioners have until September 30th to revise their Ordinance, helping to eliminate any temporary UBER outage.

🚖 UBER vs County Commission: After over FOUR hours of debating and hearing from both Uber and the TAXI Cab industry, the 7 Palm Beach County Commissioners voted to not to further regulate the ride-sharing company when it comes to fingerprint-based background checks, and are likely going to return to Level-1 Background Checks for the entire industry, including taxi cabs, as was the Rule two years ago. According to various reports, fingerprinting for background checks will be voluntary not only for Uber, but for the TAXI Cab industry as well. Uber will continue to run background checks as it always has, but based on its own rigorous verification procedures.

🚖 Palm Beach County Commissioners {four of them apparently} were Working to avoid having Uber suspend its operations in Palm Beach County. UBER was forced to do Suspend its Operations with Broward County last month, when it passed an over-zealeous, punitive Ordinance.

🚖 PBCC went into extended debate over whether or not UBER should abide by its New Proposed Ordinance that would have required fingerprinted background checks, and insurance standards that required 24 hours, every Day coverage on all Cars, rather than UBER’s method of providing $1,000,000 blanket “all events” coverage during the duration of each and every ride RIDE by an authorized Uber Driver.

🚖 UBER vs PBCC. At the end of the PBCC Hearings, Public Comments, and Discussions, the commissioners voted 4-3, voting down the staff’s proposed Ordinance which would have further regulated Uber, beyond the Conditions already imposed by the PBCC in its 6 month Temporary Operating Agreement entered into with UBER in March, 2015.

🚖 Not only did the Commission vote down their own New Ordnance, they directed their County Staff to rewrite the rules for the entire TAXI & Limousine industry so that the County will no longer require Level-2, finger-print checks for any Drivers including Uber drivers, and to revise their County Fee structure so there is a “level playing field” for all transportation entities providing these services in Palm Beach County.

🚖 Palm Beach County Commissioners Paulette Burdick, Melissa McKinlay, and Shelley Vana voted for the harsh regulations against UBER; while Commissioners Steven Abrams, Lou Berger, Priscilla Taylor, and Hal Valeche voted against implementing new regulations on Uber. Abrams and Berger both expressed that the overwhelming public outcry for Uber influenced both to vote against “Staff’s” overly aggressive, harsh regulation of UBER.

🚖 Uber is providing a modern quality service, and the TAXI industry “needs to improve their services to attract their customers” and “the Public in entitled to have transportation choices” both sentiments presented at the PBCC Hearing. UBER and the County Commission will formulate a revised regulation, similar to the existing Temporary Operating Agreement between UBER and the Palm Beach County, that expires September 30th, in order to prevent a UBER service interruption, that occurred in Broward County. The to be revised regulation will attempt to “Level the Playing Field” for all Individuals and Entities {includingTAXIs} that are providing Automobile, Limousine, and Air Port/Hotel Van transportation to the Public.

🚖 Broward and Palm Beach County Commission Hearings were Both Huge WINS for UBER {and the Public} and the free market system. Several County Commissioners stated, “the Public should have the Choice” of which Transportation method they want.

🚖 Level-2 Finger Prints, previously required will be eliminated for Drivers in Both Counties, as UBER cites that their National multi-database background check technologies are extremely effective {more effective than Level-1 background checks} to protect the Public from Convicted Criminals in operating as UBER authorized Drivers.

🚖 True Democracy and Representative Government was at Work this Month. Having watched many hours of the today’s presentations made to the County Commission, and hearing the Public comments, it was clear that Democracy was at play in Palm Beach County.

🚖 UBER disclosed during the Public Hearings that its System delivered over 20,000 Rides per week safely, equating to about 85,000 Rides/Month. In Broward County UBER mentioned that it was delivering over 100,000 Rides/Month.

🚖 Extrapolating the data, UBER has been delivering over 300,000 Rides/Month for South Florida {Miami-Dade + Broward + Palm Beach Counties}. If the Average Uber gross revenue is roughly $11/ride, this equates to some $3,300,000/Month or $39.6 Million annually, UBER retains 20% as its share of the Ride-Fare and the independent Uber Drivers earn 80%.

🚖 Therefore this entire topic is a Very Big Business for UBER, the UBER Drivers, and a very satisfied Public having hailing Uber for over 3,600,000 Rides annually in South Florida.

🚖 UBER Says “For the past 5 months, {March through August, 2015} there had been a very sensible Temporary Operating Agreement (TOA) in place to regulate Uber System in Palm Beach County. Under the TOA, public safety is a definite priority and where local UBER drivers are able to seamlessly make a living and provide you {Palm Beach County residents} with safe, reliable and competitive ride fares. Interviews that I have personally conducted with 80 Uber riders, indicate that Uber ride-fares are better than 30% less expensive than the TAXI rides they have experienced, and Uber Driver’s are significantly more reliable for their pick-up and travel routes.

🚖 Rather than turning this strong, effective TOA into a permanent law, TODAY (August 18th) the Palm Beach County Commission is taking is final vote on a set of new and very burdensome rules that if passed, would Force Uber OUT of Palm Beach County. We {UBER} needs your help to prevent this from happening.

🚖 Please Go to the Meeting and Speak at the Public Hearing, Tuesday, August 18, 2015, 9:30 am, County Commission Chambers, 301 N. Olive Ave, 6th Floor, West Palm Beach, 33401

🚖 Message to Steven L Abrams, posted today on his FACEBOOK Page: “You should not buckle to the TAXI lobbyists. UBER has provided millions of Safe Rides in South Florida. The CITIZENS, and your CONSTITUENTS want UBER; therefore STOP useless bureaucracy. The current Temporary Operating Agreement is working, where UBER drivers are generally Safer than the driving-public at large, where about 50% of UBER drivers have college degrees, and are subject to stringent Driver Record Checks and Criminal Background Checks.” Posted by the author {@FAU4U} Boca Raton, FL.

🚖 County Commissioners Remember We are Your Constituents. There have been millions of Safe Uber rides provided to Uber Riders by Uber Drivers in the one year it has been operating in south Florida. Millions. May I remind the County Commissioners, you work for us.

🚖 Chauffeur Licensing, Fingerprinting, and Driver Commercial Insurance are absurd requirements
🚖 Fingerprinting is duplicitous, as UBER is performing stringent background checks, Uber driving is not a Crime scene
🚖 Personal Uber Driver commercial insurance is duplicitous as UBER is already providing $Million Commercial insurance for all UBER Drivers
🚖 Chauffeur Licensing is absurd as Uber Drivers are driving their personal passenger vehicles of no more than 7 seats in a traditional SUV. Uber Drivers are not driving Stretch Limousines or 20 passenger Airport Shuttle Buses
🚖 If Palm Beach County Law does not permit UBER to function, change the Oppressive Laws.

🚖 Competition can be painful to those that are providing inferior services and higher prices. Have any of you {Commissioners} actually taken a few TAXI rides recently? Have any of you {Commissioners} actually taken a few UBER rides recently?

🚖 By many experiences reported by my Rider interviews, you’d be lucky if a hailed TAXI arrives; and as they arrive, its likely 15 to 30 minutes late. With Uber Drivers, they arrive with 95% confidence, within two minutes of the promised time; and where the UBER Riders may actually visualize the hailed Uber Vehicle’s progress via GPS on the Uber MAP that the Riders see on their UBER App, as the Driver approaches the pick up location.

🚖 UBER Drivers are directed by GPS to give the best-route to the Rider’s destination, helping to prevent the driver from giving an expensive “Joy Ride” using an inefficient, longer route. In the unlikely event of an Uber Driver’s intentionally using a longer-route, the Uber Rider can contact Uber directly to receive a direct monetary credit to the Uber Rider’s credit card.

🚖 Palm Beach County Commission as well as the Broward County Commission: the Commissions collision with UBER centers around the level of the”Background Checks.” There are Two defined Levels of Background Checks. The Florida Department of Law Enforcement (“FDLE”) defines a background check as “a criminal history record check to determine if a person has been arrested and/or convicted of a crime.” If you were to request such a check, FDLE would search the following databases
🚖 The Florida Computerized Criminal History Central Repository for Florida arrests (FL State check)
🚖 The FBI’s national criminal history database for federal arrests as well as arrests from other states (National check)
🚖 The Florida Crime Information Center for warrants and domestic violence injunctions (hot files check)
🚖 Level 1 background check in Florida refers to a check based upon your name and employment history. UBER also requires its Driver’s to provide their Social Security number so that National Background checks, will search National Records outside of Florida Records Databases are possible
🚖 Level 2 background check, on the other hand, refers to a FL State and National records checks based upon the Driver’s fingerprints and consideration of disqualifying offenses. A national background check is based only on your fingerprints, while a FL State check is based upon your name (and other identifying characteristics) or your fingerprints. This Level-2 background check is more comprehensive and applies to those individuals who are designated by Florida Law as holding positions of responsibility or trust, like Lawyer Licensees, Real Estate Broker Licensees, Mortgage Broker Licensees.

🚖 Some History. In the early 1900’s the Hoarse & Buggy manufacturers lobbied local governments against the new FORD Automobiles, as they were displacing a 100+ year industry. Its a good thing that those politicians and their constituents were wise enough to visualize progress was upon them.

🚖 One of the driving forces in American history is the concept of personal or individual freedom. It is no accident that the best-remembered line in the Declaration of Independence is the one about God-given rights to “life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness.” One manifestation of these rights is unfettered freedom to travel, to move wherever the urge and economic opportunity lead. This, in turn, has produced an American fascination with personal vehicles.

🚖 UBER may be thought of as the 21st Century Invention for Hailing a Ride, transforming a 100+ year history of obtaining a safe Ride in a quality Car.

🚖 County Commissioners, We want Uber, the automobiles are newer and safer, they are inspected by third-party ASE Certified Mechanics, the Drivers are thoroughly investigated with third-party independent Criminal Background checkers, Driver’s driving record checks, Insurance verifications, a $Million Commercial Insurance Umbrella and Automobile {TAG} Registration checks.

🚖 County Commissioners, remember you are elected representatives. If you buckle to the specials interests, the TAXI industry, YOUR County Commission may come to an END at the NEXT ELECTION, as there are hundreds of thousands of very pleased UBER riders among your constituency that are MAD that UBER may be Forced OUT of Palm Beach County.

🚖 Prior to the 19th century, personal vehicles usually meant horse-drawn carriages, but during the 19th century, cheaper, lighter vehicles were developed. Designed to be pulled by a single horse, they were less expensive to maintain than a coach.Though based on European designs, the light two-wheeled chaise evolved into the American shay. New England builders developed the four-wheeled pleasure wagon before 1825. It could carry light freight and be used for passengers. The pleasure wagon presaged the appearance of one of the characteristic American horse- drawn vehicles, the buggy.The one-horse buggy — light, strong and designed to bounce over bad rural American roads — was also cheap.

🚖 Henry Ford was not the first to realize the mass potential of the automobile. Ransom Olds, with his $650, one-cylinder,“curved- dash” Oldsmobile, became the country’s largest automaker. But the Oldsmobile was a fragile horseless carriage. A vehicle was needed that combined the low cost of the Olds car with the reliability and capability of larger, more expensive cars.

🚖 Ford’s Model T was the car that was reliable with a confortable seating capacity, at its introduction in 1908, it sold for $850, but by the time Ford’s engineers developed the assembly line in 1913, the price was already down to $600. Ford sold over 15 million Model Ts between 1908 and 1927. Once the buying public could purchase a relatively competent, cheap car it wanted more: more power, more comfort and more style.

🚖 UBER “Forced” to Turn OFF their system in BROWARD County. As of July 31, 2015 UBER had little choice but to "Turn-Off" its System for all of Broward County, to the dismay of hundreds of thousands of UBER Riders. WHY a reasoned person would ask???

🚖 ANSWER – Huge Political Contributions by TAXI tycoon Jesse Gaddis to several Broward County County Commissioners, including Mayor Tim Ryan. Why else would Broward County give special treatment and Dispatcher privileges to the Fort Lauderdale International Airport for over 700 Gaddis owned & operated TAXI, LIMOUSINE, and SHUTTLES, to the dismay of other smaller TAXI competitors. UBER is not the first to be on the Wrong Side of this Corruption on the County Commission.

🚖 Broward County Commission Disrupted the UBER System because of Political Cronyism & Oppressive Regulation, forcing UBER to pull the plug on their highly desired system. It has been said that a number of County Commissioners are in the "Pocket" for the TAXI and Limousine drivers and Companies owned by Jesse Gaddis. From everything we’ve heard, and what has been reported by the media, UBER Cars and Drivers are Superior to the Gaddis’s TAXI, Limousines, and most of the Drivers in most respects.

🚖 MONEY, POLITICAL CONTRIBUTIONS to COUNTY COMMISSION Political CAMPAIGNS. Jesse Gaddis, TAXI tycoon now 83 years old, owns a huge Yellow Cab system, leasing and dispatching most of Broward’s Cabs, over 550 Cars. Gaddis also owns Go Airport Service that spans 150 limos and shuttles, plus Gaddis’s B&L Services Group has the Exclusive contract to Dispatch all cabs, limos and shuttles at the airport, a thorn in the side of many smaller cab companies that also service the airport. How does this happen one would ask?

🚖 Friendliness of the UBER Drivers, On-Time Arrival of the Drivers, Clean Modern of the UBER Cars, and Competitive ride-cost are the frequent complements given the UBER system, as compared to Broward County TAXI services.

🚖 South Florida Business Journal published an article in today’s Journal, mentioning that from Friday 7am July 31 through Midnight Sunday August 2nd, about 40,000 UBER Riders found the System Turned OFF, preventing UBER Riders from being able to hail any UBER Drivers.

🚖 UBER, the Riders and Drivers, the $13 Million/Year Quagmire. Lets talk about the Dollars at stake with the Politicians, the Public and UBER. Media sources say that UBER has Delivered over 1 million Safe Rides in the 11 months Uber has been active in Broward County. As an experienced Uber Driver and a Uber Rider the average Uber Ride {for 77 recent rides} in my case as a Driver is $13.75/Ride. Other industry sources say the average ride is $10 or so, lets use $12/Ride for this analysis.

🚖 Uber Average Ride = $12/Ride for 1,090,900 Rides/Year. One million rides in 11 months equates to roughly 90,900 Rides/Month, or 1,090,900 Uber Rides/Year. If the average ride is $12/ride, then 1,090,900 rides equates to $13,090,800 in Annual revenues paid by Uber Riders through the Uber system. Its well known that Uber/Driver revenue-split is 20%/80%, where Uber is retaining 20% of the Rider’s Fare.

🚖 UBER Company Gross Revenues equals $2,618,000/Year for Broward County Uber traffic; Uber Drivers are receiving $10,472,000 in Uber Rider Fares. {Math: UBER Gross Income = 1,090,900x$12×20% = $2,618,000/Year.}

🚖 UBER, whose APPLE iPhone App allows passengers to Arrange for a Uber Ride, plus pay for the trip with the Rider’s iPhone using their pre-registered Credit Card registered within the UBER’s secure system. UBER still operates in Palm Beach and Miami-Dade counties, where new regulations are in the works.

🚖 Palm Beach County agreed to “TRIAL” compromise arrangements with UBER, established in March 2015 for a 6 month period. Therefore in September the Palm Beach County Commission will reexamine the trial period to see if everything is “working properly” and according to the trial period agreements and conditions.

🚖 UBER passengers can be dropped off in Broward County if the UBER Ride is originated outside Broward; however, folks located anywhere in Broward County cannot use the UBER system to originate a Ride anywhere inside Broward County or to anywhere outside Broward County.

🚖 According to UBER sources they say “Broward’s new law is too onerous” the company said Monday, {Aug 10th}. The Broward County rules are oppressive and require each driver to obtain a county chauffeur registration {which is absurd for a standard passenger car}. The County is requiring UBER Drivers to have a Car permit {even though Uber Drivers dive properly registered and ASE Inspected Vehicle.

🚖 Broward requires “county-run” background check {even though UBER conducts thorough Criminal Background check and Driving Records checks using reputable third-party investigation firms} plus Uber Drivers must carry state-required commercial insurance {even though UBER provides blanket $1million commercial insurance for all its Drivers}.

🚖 UBER has met most of the Background-Check requirements all over the country. However the Broward’s requirements are excessive and onerous according to UBER officials.

🚖 Uber: “Broward County Officials implemented one of the most onerous regulatory frameworks for ridesharing in the nation, in a written statement to the media. UBER had no choice but to suspend operations on July 31. UBER hopes the Board of County Commissioners will revisit the issue when they return from break and work with UBER to bring the UBER System back to Broward. UBER has been valued by some investment bankers at somewhere around $50 billion.

🚖 Broward Mayor Tim Ryan said he thought the county and Uber were working toward compromise, and he found the news “surprising and disappointing.” “To me it’s clear that Uber provides a very good service that people want,” said Ryan, who is asked about UBER everywhere he goes. “The regulations Broward County imposed are very reasonable. The county only asked that Uber have safe drivers, safe vehicles and insurance.”

🚖 Dan Lindblade, president of the Greater Fort Lauderdale Chamber of Commerce, said the county went too far in requiring individual licensure for drivers of Uber or other “transportation network companies.” “There regulations are bad for the citizens, bad for our tourism industry, bad for our economy,” he said. “The County is just over-regulating. They could have done something else than just hammer it all the way to the wall. They went too far.”

🚖 UBER’s popularity hinged on the disdain for traditional cabs and Fare cost. At public hearings and in emails that poured into county commissioners’ in-boxes over the past year, customers said they favored Uber’s lower fares, cleaner cars and friendlier drivers.

🚖 Retiree Steve Machoian, an occasional visitor to Fort Lauderdale who said he is planning a move to South Florida from Maryland, said he would never get in a traditional cab here. “Not only are they rude, the Cars A/C rarely works, they take you for long rides, most claim not to speak English, the cars are filthy, and most cases old and broken down,” he said when he learned of UBER decision. “If I can’t get a UBER ride in Broward, I’m going to take my second choice and move to Delray Beach.”

🚖 Gaddis and his TAXI interests have contributed BIG money to County Commission campaigns and have hired a bevy of lobbyists, including Bernie Friedman, George Platt and Judy Stern, to push for the new regulations that have UBER threatening to leave. Ryan, however, said Gaddis and his companies, which also have to follow the fingerprinting provision, had no special influence on the April vote {Its hard to swallow that statement}.

🚖 Mayor Ryan says Gaddis’ campaign contributions he’s personally received from Gaddis-related taxi industry and their lobbyists had no effect on his vote…. {Really, do you all believe that large campaign contributions from UBER’s competition with Gaddis’s TAXI business had no effect on the Mayor’s decision.}

🚖 Commissioner Chip LaMarca, a pro-UBER County Commissioner, said the new background checks are unnecessary, since UBER is already providing third-Party Background Criminal Checks and Driving Records Checks. “The County setting up this whole new level of regulation in Broward County, to me is a complete waste of taxpayers’ money,” he said. LaMarca said UBER background checks, which track criminal records and other data, are sufficient. “I can’t understand why a progressive commission wouldn’t see this ride-sharing shared economy, what’s going on in this country, really in the world, as a benefit to open competition,” LaMarca said.

🚖 Ryan said the commission will take up the Uber issue when it returns from summer break in August after Uber has promised to stop conducting pickups in the county. Ryan said he wants to negotiate with the company, but he doesn’t understand why it is so dead set against the fingerprint requirement when Uber continues to provide service in three cities that have the same requirement: Columbus, Ohio, Houston and New York City.

🚖 Broward County is New Requiring UBER Drivers
• FBI background checks. Uber already requires their drivers to submit to rigorous, nationally recognized background-check process used by hotels, hospitals and other industries. Forcing drivers to undergo another level of review, one that includes fingerprints, only adds bureaucracy and cost, with little evidence for the need… lets face it fingerprints are used in Crime Scenes. Criminals have their records already in the data-base, no prints are needed.
• Chauffeur licenses for every driver. While most cab drivers work full-time, most Uber drivers only work part-time. In Broward, this means several thousand Uber drivers must dig into their pockets to pay over $80 for a two-year license. Uber fears that if their drivers’ names become public, competitors will alert insurance carriers and put the Uber drivers’ personal coverage premiums at risk for driving for the services, even though Uber provides a $1 million commercial umbrella coverage
• Around-the-clock 24/7 Commercial Car Insurance for every driver. Again, while cabs may be on the road 24 hours a day, Uber drivers most-times use their personal cars for only a few hours per day. Every time Uber Drivers pick up a Uber passenger, the Uber-Ride is covered by the company’s $1 million commercial insurance policy, which is 4-times what taxis are required to have in Florida. Yet Broward wants part-time drivers to carry personal insurance that matches what’s required of cab and limo drivers.

🚖 {Absurd, an obvious conflict of interest comes to bear on any County Commissioners that have taken contributions from the TAXI Cab owners including Gaddis}.

🚖 UBER Rider App and the UBER Driver App, Sounds Simple, however, the UBER systems that support these Apps are extremely sophisticated and revolutionary. The Apps were created by Uber Technologies, a/k/a UBER.

🚖 UBER Rider App. The Uber App may be downloaded from Apple’s App Store free for everyone. When the UBER App is launched you’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver that the Uber System has determined to be closest to you. GPS pinpoints you ad the Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Displayed on the Uber Rider’s iPhone is the Uber Driver’s Car, Color, TAG number, the Driver’s picture. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

UBER App has a companion Watch App, which permits the Uber Rider to request a Driver directly from one’s Watch. Marilyn and I decided to go out to the Waterstone Resort Hotel for Happy Hour which is about a 2 mile trip from our Royal Palm apartment. So instead of driving our own Car, we summoned a Uber Driver using my Watch Uber App. The ride is about $4 each way; however, we save the $8 Valet and Tip cost, and the aggravation of getting our Car from the Garage. The Uber Drivers are terrific with modern, late-model, clean Cars.

UBER Local Statistics. Uber launched their system in south Florida June, 2014, and August for Broward and Palm Beach Counties. Over the represented 11 to 12 month period, Uber has logged over 1,000,000 safe Rides in Broward County. Miami-Dade county Drivers have delivered over 1,300,000 safe Rides and Palm Beach county has delivered 900,000 safe Rides. For the three south Florida Counties, the total safe rides equates to roughly (by data extrapolation) 3.3 Million Safe Rides in slightly less than 12 months, or 300,000 Rides per Month, or 10,000 Safe Rides every Day.

UBER Driver App is downloadable only to Approved Uber Drivers’ iPhones or Android device. Once the Uber Driver downloads the App, Drivers open the App, the UBER Driver-Partner system, for your first time use, directs you to Verify your Account, by providing the Driver’s ID and Password, the first time only, thereafter the Login is automated, when the App is launched.

Uber Partner App is specially designed only for UBER DRIVERS, not Uber Riders. The Uber Partner App is available by “Invitation Only” from the UBER’s Corporate site upon “approval.” This App is not available on Apple’s App store. This article is written from the perspective of the UBER Partner Driver.

UBER Driver Applicant passed: Screening, Background Checks, Auto Insurance verification, Clear Driving Record, Review of the Auto Registration, Uber’s approval of the Driver’s Vehicle ASE certification… When Uber verifies and approves the documentation, UBER issues a TEXT message directly to the Uber Driver’s iPhone, providing a Link to download the UBER PATNER App directly from UBER’s Corporate offices in California.

Uber Partner App. Once the UBER PARTNER Driver opens the App, UBER’s system requests the Driver to GO ONLINE. By a simple TAP on the blue GO ONLINE bar, the UBER System locates the Uber Driver, and the Uber Driver is displayed as an Available Car that UBER Riders will be able to visualize on their UBER App, within a several mile circle around the Uber Rider looking for a Ride. If the Uber Driver is within several minutes of arrival to the Requesting Rider, the Closest Uber Driver is Notified of the rider’s hail.

Uber Driver App and Uber Rider App. The Uber Driver is hailed on his Driver App, the system makes a Request for the Driver to Accept the Rider’s request. If the Driver does not accept the rider’s hail in 60 seconds, the system looks for the next closest Uber Driver. Once a Driver accepts the rider’s request, the Rider can Visually see the Uber Driver’s map location, and tracks the driver’s route to the Rider using the iPhone’s GPS capability. As the Uber Driver arrives at the Rider’s location, the Uber Driver Taps the ARRIVED button on his App.

A notification is sent to the Rider, stating that the Driver has Arrived. Once the Uber Rider is identified by name and confirmed, the Uber Driver Taps a Button “Commence Ride to Destination.” Typically the Rider initially inputs the destination for the Ride. The Uber Driver’s App gives the Driver turn-by-turn directions to locate the Rider; Once the Ride begins, the Driver App gives turn-by-turn directions to the Driver, to the Rider’s Destination.

Uber Technologies Inc. is an American international transportation network company headquartered in San Francisco, California. It develops, markets and operates the Uber mobile app, which allows consumers with smartphones to submit a Ride request which is then routed to carefully screened and background checked Uber Drivers who use their own Cars that are annually Safety Inspected, with proper Insurance coverage. As of May 28, 2015, the service was available in 58 countries and 300 cities worldwide.

Safety is a top priority at Uber, which is why every driver-partner in Florida must undergo stringent local, state and federal background checks and every single trip is covered by a $1M commercial insurance policy, four times what taxis are required to have in the state of Florida

UberX Driver’s Gross Compensation Average $1.55/mile, however, net about $1.25/mile, as Uber’s share is 20% of the Driver’s gross. On average for short Rides of 4 to 10 miles the Rider is charged about $2/mile for the Ride. The Uber Driver receives 80% of $2/mile or $1.60/mile driven. For longer destinations of 25 to 50 miles the Rider pays roughly $1.20/mile. UberXL Drivers earn roughly twice that of UberX. See Fee Charts for details.

UberX Driver’s Net-Net $1.00/mile including Fuel Cost, but no maintenance costs are accounted for. Detailing my particular scenario, my Honda Crosstour consumes roughly 15¢/mile for Fuel only. Since we already own the Car in Warranty, Insurance, Licenses, and giving no deductions for Tires, Wear and Tear, if I net from Uber $1.25/mile and my fuel cost is 15¢/mile, then we’re receiving about $1.10/mile net of Fuel cost; lets round down another 10¢/mile for down-time, to $1.00/mile. Simple, Drive 125 miles/Day (assume 5-hour Driving Day) and earn supplemental income of $125/Day, not accounting for Auto Maintenance or Tires.

Personal Opinion. If you already own a late model UberX qualified car, and want to earn some supplemental income, using your spare time to be a Uber Driver to earn some extra Cash, UBER may be something to consider. However, to buy or lease a vehicle, obtain insurance, maintenance, license tags, etc, Earning $1.00/mile makes no sense whatsoever, IMHO.

UBER Partner App. If you want to GO ONLINE as a Uber Driver AVAILABLE to be Hailed by a requesting Rider, DRIVERS simply open the App, TAP onto the blue GO ONLINE Bar, then the System confirms your Location, and the Driver is Live and OnLine for all potential Uber App Riders to “see.” The beautiful part of the Uber System is the requesting Rider waits only several minutes for an available Uber Driver.

Uber Busy times are from 7am to 11am, and 4pm to 7pm in the evening, plus 9pm to 11:30pm on weekends.

UberX is an inexpensive Ride. The cost of the Ride is automated by the UBER System, and is determined by the type of CAR, the Miles Driven, and the Time of the Trip, and Tolls if any. Everything about the RIDE transaction is Automated, including your Payment when you Arrive at your destination. No Cash needed, except if you want to TIP the Driver, which is not necessary, however appreciated.

Uber, upon arrival at your destination your UBER Private Driver, with his iPhone Uber Partner App, slides the ARRIVAL button to the Right, indicating the trip is complete, the FARE is Computed and displayed the RIDER’s iPhone. The Uber Rider confirms the Charge, selects Five Stars ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️ {hopefully} and the Rider, is Good to exit the Car, collecting their possessions, luggage, etc. The Driver should make sure all the Rider’s possessions are collected before departing.

Uber Experiences. The Uber Ride is really surprisingly nice. The Uber Partner’s Cars are super clean, odor free, late-model fully inspected vehicles, plus the Uber Drivers are motivated to give great service, as there is a ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️, 5-Star rating offered by the Passengers when they Pay; and similarly a 5-Star rating by the Uber-Driver is awarded to the Passenger.

Personally, I was surprised with the quality of the Uber Passengers, FAU students, Private School Students, Folks traveling to Italy needing a Ride to the Airport, Apartment dwellers in the City of Boca Raton, riding to Publix to grocery shop, a Housewife whose Car is at Service needing a Ride home because of a 2-Day repair, a Restaurant manager Riding home for a mid-day nap between shifts, a disabled businessman needing a ride to a Client’s office…

Uber Rides are roughly 25% to 30% less expensive than a typical TAXI Commercial services, plus the Uber RIDE arrives for the pickup within 2 to 5 minutes, where a TAXI may arrive in 20 to 25 minutes, or not arrive at all. These estimates were offered by my Uber Riders when I “interviewed” each for this article.

UBER’s system is a very efficient and provides an easy method to connect to Your own Personal Driver, hailing a Ride, and payment in a CASH-less environment with your Credit Card. Tipping is not required, however, Uber Drivers may accept cash tips.

UBER cities. There are hundreds of Uber Cities that provides this service. If you’re looking for, and need a private driver, you can find one with the UBER App. The Uber App will locate and request a Uber Driver as well as let the Uber Driver know exactly where you are located to pick you up.

Uber Riders. You’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

Uber Riders will be emailed a detailed receipts, plus Riders and Drivers will each be able to view their history in their respective Apps.

Uber Riders. When it comes to requesting a Uber RIDE you may choose from three Cars: uberX (standard 4-door sedan), uberXL (6-seat SUV), and uber SELECT (high value Cars such as Mercedes, BMW or LEXUS). You’ll be able to view a Fare-Estimate, and if you received a “Promotion” Code, you may enter it. Uber Drivers register their Car[s], and based on the Vehicle ID Number, UBER determines whether your is uberX, uberXL or uberSELECT.

Uber App. We’ve found UBER system to be very simple and easy-to-navigate App. The App gives you all the details you need about hailing for the Ride, actually seeing your Uber Driver as he/she travels to your Location, and walks you through the entire process keeping you in the loop until you Arrive and 5-Star your Driver.

UBER Driver Background Checks. Every UBER Driver in the USA is thoroughly screened and background investigated with a multi-step process that includes County, State, Federal, and multi-State Criminal Background checks, that reach back in date, as far as the Driver’s State Law allows, plus ongoing review of the Uber Drivers’ motor vehicle records throughout the UBER Driver’s time driving as a “Uber Partner.” In south Florida, Palm Beach County for example, requires that UBER Driver’s automobiles are Checked annually with a comprehensive 33-point inspection performed by an ASE Certified Technician.

UBER Driver. In effort to verify the facts in this article, I became a Uber Driver, submitted my personal information for UBER’s thorough background investigations that required about three weeks to complete. I also submitted my HONDA automobile inspected by a Certified ASE automotive mechanic, required annually, evidence of Automobile Insurance, a copy of the Vehicle’s Registration.

Riders should be impressed and comforted with the thoroughness of UBER’s investigative process for their Drivers. Uber Driver candidates may check a BOX that on the Investigative Reporting forms, such that the candidate receives all the investigative reporting results, that is discovered in the Public Records and the Criminal Background Checks. Roughly weekly for three weeks, I received email updates on UBER’s investigative process.

As a UBER Driver, giving a number of rides in south Florida, I had many conversations with the Riders, asking them if they liked the UBER experience, the time required for the Uber Driver to arrive, did they like the Drivers, did they like the Cars, the Price of the Ride, etc. In sum, all those that I’ve “interviewed” were thoroughly pleased with the entire UBER Experience, and were impressed with the Clean Cars, and the excellent Uber Drivers. BTW, the Washington Post conducted an extensive survey recently and determined that nearly 50% of the UBER Drivers have College Degrees.

UBER. Make good money driving as a Uber Partner, you may love it like the other 200,000 Uber Drivers world-wide. Get details with this link: https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue When you click onto this link, the image below is a copy of the Uber Form to begin your Enrollment process.

UBER Riders should be comforted with the extensive effort UBER employs to screen all their UBER Driver Partners initially and on an ongoing basis.

UBER has 162,037 Active Drivers in the US. The Washington Post completed an analysis that revealed in January, 2015 that the size of Uber’s Driver pool in the United States and the rapid rate at which it’s expanding, accounted for 162,037 Active Drivers that completed at least four or more trips for the service as of December, 2014. The number of new Uber drivers signing up has doubled every six months for the past two years.

Uber has grown into a tech giant valued by investors at more than $40 billion, and has become something of an economic Rorschach test. Some see in it the hopeful future of work in a digital age, where almost anyone with a car with a clear-background check, (or a home, or a service to offer) can be his own boss, choosing hours and determining income with a flexibility that makes other pursuits — like raising children or going back to school — more feasible.

Make great money driving with Uber, you may love it too. Get details with this link:

https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue

UBER App is compatible: iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, iPhone 4S, iPhone 5, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPod touch (3rd generation and above), all iPads using iOS 5.0 through iOS 8.4



Pleased you’re reading, with about 88,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

 iPhone 6S + 6S Plus Apple Media Event Tuesday Sept 8  Pre-Orders Start Sept 18,  Retail Stores Event Sept 25, 2015 

1439486497.jpg

iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus Pre-Ordering Begins Friday Sept 18th, Goes on Sale on the 25th

 Apple’s Special Media Event Key-Note public address announcing their new iPhone 6S and 6S Plus begins at 1:00pm Tuesday Sept 8th, 2015

Apple’s iPhone 6S upgrade, required a huge investment in research, development, engineering and testing, as with all iPhone model upgrades. This next upgrade of the iPhone 6 should be available for online Apple Store internet Pre-Sales on 9/18; Apple’s USA Retail Stores will be Open at 8am for the Sales event of the iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus that will commence Friday, Sept 25, 2015).

iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus. The supply line has commenced mass-producing of 90 Million iPhones for the initial production run of iPhones for its September lunch. This is the largest production-run in Apple history. For Apple this release could this mean 16 Million iPhone sales in its opening 3-Day Weekend Launch.

iPhone 4S and 5S and likely with the 6S, the “S” iPhone model upgrades have focused on its Camera, Lens, Imager, Image Processing, among other significant internal upgrades, like processor and storage.

iPhone 6S Upgrade News Roundup. Sources within Apple’s vast supply-line leaked documentation and component photos, indicating details regarding the iPhone’s Cameras, its case, processor, and RAM memory.

iPhone 6S Front-Facing Camera will likely contain 5 million pixels, a 400% increase from the current 1.2mp imager, for greatly improved SELFIE picture taking, true HD 1080p video recording and FaceTime Calling.

iPhone 6S Rear-Facing Camera will likely contain 12 million pixels, a 150% increase from the current 8.0mp imager, for improved image resolution, better digital-zoom range. The iPhone may be able to deliver true 4k video capability, which means that Videos may be captured at a frame rate of 30fps, where each frame contains 8.2MP. Video capture may also be capable of 240fps for super-slow-motion videography, all of which would be huge accomplishments in the iPhone video platform.

iPhone 6S to be 7.1mm Thin. Examination of the of the iPhone 6S case blueprints, reveal that the iPhone 6S will be 7.1mm in thickness, while the iPhone 6 is currently 6.9mm. Apparently the new 6S model will be 0.20mm thicker than the previous model. This may be due to Apple’s attempt to strengthen the shell to prevent a 2015 version of “Bend-Gate” or the addition of ForceTouch display grid.

iPhone 6S to be 0.2mm Thicker, in Perspective. A straind of Human Hair is about 0.10mm thick. This 0.20mm slight increase in thickness of the iPhone 6S is equivalent to 2 Human Hairs, an almost in-perceivable measure to earthlings; however, Star Trek’s Vulcan Lieutenant Spock may be able to feel this difference.

iPhone 6S Front-Facing Camera. Examination of the iOS 9 Code Remarks , reveals that the FF Camera will be capable of Panorama photographs, 1080p 60fps video recording, and 720p 240fps slo-motion video capture, and HDR imaging. It also appears that the FF and RF iPhone Cameras will display Real-Time HDR visualization, on the LCD display.

iPhone 6S and 6S Plus Upgrade. Marilyn and I upgraded last year with AT&T’s 12 month NEXT Plan. This plan permits us upgrade literally to the “Next iPhone” seamlessly every 12 months. The plan provided to us a 20 month installment purchase contract with no interest charged. For the iPhone 6S Plus, lets assume prices are equal to last year’s, a price of $849, which includes $100 for 64GB memory storage.

AT&T’s NEXT 12 Plan in an installment purchase plan that takes $849 divided by 20 equal payments = $42.45/month for 20 months, paying the sales tax only at time of sale. The first $42.50 payment was included in one’s Next month’s AT&T billing.

iPhone 6S Plus Arrival in September, 8 weeks from now, we will present our iPhone 6 Plus smartphones in good physical and working condition, and receive new iPhone 6S Plus smartphones with the payment of $50.94 sales tax, and the 20 month installment plan (with 8 months remaining) is reset for another 20 months. If we don’t want to upgrade this year, continue to pay the remaining 8 months, and the installment sale would be completed, and the iPhones are then owned free and clear.

AppleCare+ Accident Protection. Increase the Warranty and Apple Support to 2 Years, PLUS includes 2 years of Accident protection for an up-front onetime price of $99 for 2 years. For accident protection, there is a $79 deductible paid when returning the phone to the Apple Store, say for water damaged iPhone replacement. For any warranty repairs or replacements during the 2 year period, there are no deductible charges. AppleCare+ does Not provide coverage if you loose the iPhone. Most of the cellular providers’ protection plans cost $99/year with a deductible.

iPhone Videography – Think About it… With iPhone 6S being capable of 4k video capture PLUS slow-motion, accompanied with the iOS9 software upgrade, the iPhone 6S Camera App may have tools to select individual “still-image” photographs from the video clip, during play-back. Recall with digital videos, shot at 30fps (frames per second), the videos are actually a string of 30 still-images in sequence for the duration of the video-clip. For typical iPhone 6 video recording, each video consists of a string of thirty 2.1mp still images per second. Each frame would produce an excellent 4×6″ photograph.

iPhone 4k video recording, this would provide the opportunity of selecting the exact frame (an 8.8mp frame) when a football team’s wide-received catches a Touchdown pass, the Baseball hitter with the Ball literally “On the Bat” at the exact moment of the hit, or the Golfer whose drive shows the Golf Ball at the exact moment of impact with the Driver… professional photographers practice for many years to capture these precise moments. With 4k video frame selection, everyone can capture these amazingly timed Photographs. This would produce an excellent 8×10″ photograph.

iPhone’s iOS9. Lets not forget that the iPhone is an elaborate well packaged bundle of technology, albeit an amazing achievement. Combine iPhone HARDWARE with iOS SOFTWARE and the iPhone 6S comes to life. Hardware development is crucial; however, its the Software, the iOS that permits the 770 Million Users COMMUNICATE with the iPhone.

Combine iPhone 6S + iOS9 + Vast array of iPhone Apps, and the iPhone becomes much more than a Cell-Phone. Therefore, Take Time in discovering the features of Apple’s to be released iOS9, as teams of thousands of Apple Engineers are working 24/7 to make the USER Experience Exceptional and Secure. iOS9 will be bundled in all the new iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus when they are released in September, 2015

Apple Clearly Understands iPhone Photography (we call it iPhoneOgraphy) is a very important smartphone usage-component. As a teaching Pro, its widely known in the Imaging Industry that Smartphones have stimulated a modern rebirth in picture-taking in a major way.

iPhone Model Updates (A). iPhone was first brought to market by Apple June 29, 2007. Annually, Apple has been upgrading their iPhone with subsequent model releases occurring generally mid-year in a June to October calendar cycle. However, since 2012 iPhone updates have stabilized to the 3rd week of September.

iPhone “S” model releases have occurred on “Odd” numbered years, 3GS in 2009, 4S in 2011, 5S in 2013. And if history repeats itself 2015 will bring us the iPhone 6S, 6S Plus, and perhaps the 6C adding a variety of case colors. While “Even” numbered years, the iPhone model name changes by Number, iPhone 4 in 2010, iPhone 5 in 2012, iPhone 6 in 2014, and likely the iPhone 7 to be released September, 2016.

iPhone Model Updates (B). iPhone “S” updates have focused on improving its Camera, Lens System, Imager, and the iOS System software applicable to Camera Operation and Image Processing. This year should follow this trend, with a number of significant iPhone Camera improvements, among other enhancements, perhaps 2GB of internal RAM (up from 1GB), faster more power-efficient A9 Processor, improved battery chemistry and longevity.

iPhone Force Touch. With the introduction of the AppleWatch, its display and the WatchOS have a technology that is capable of distinguishing between a Tap and a Press. Since the AppleWatch has limited display area, Force Touch provides a software tool to launch Menu selections that a Tap would not provide. With the AppleWatch if one firmly Presses onto the Watch Face, the Watch OS responds with a “Customize” option, and you may Swipe-Left or Swipe-Right, to select from a dozen Watch Faces.

iPhone 6 currently running with iOS8.4, from the HOME Screen, if you Tap onto an App icon, the App launches; if you Press-and-Hold onto an App icon, all the Apps icons in that Home Page starts “jiggling” and the App icons simultaneously display an “X” at the top-left corner of each App icon, inviting the user to Delete the App with a Tap onto the “X” or Press onto the middle of the App icon, to Move the App to another position on that Home-Page or Move the App icon to another Home-Page, or move the App on top of another App to create a Folder to house two or more Apps.

iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus with Force Touch functionality. Apparently Apple engineers have designed an electrical-grid within the Display of the AppleWatch used to differentiate between a user’s Tap and Press. Apple engineering teams have determined that Force Touch will add unique and useful software tools for communicating with the iOS and Apple Apps. When iPhone 6S is released the Operating System pre-loaded will be iOS9, which will incorporate the Force-Touch algorithms.

iPhone cameras are capturing more Pictures than ALL the other digital Cameras Combined, including all the other smartphone cameras.

iPhones are currently selling at a rate of 250 million units per year and growing by +30% or more year over year. iPhone (camera) sales has been destroying the traditional pocket digital camera sales, over recent years. Sometime during 2016 iPhone sales will cross the 1,000,000,000 iPhones in circulation milestone. (1Billion iPhones). Remember the Apple critics were saying that Apple had “no business” entering the already crowded smartphone marketplace in 2007. Good thing Apple does not pay any attention to the critics.

Canon, Nikon, Sony, Leica, Lumix, Fuji have dominated the portable point-and-shoot photography segment for decades. Portable point and shoot cameras transformed to Digital from traditional film about 12 years ago, which stimulated their sales.

iPhone Cameras deliver excellent still-image capture and image stabilized HDTV video recording from 30fps to 240fps, with excellent color rendition and detail. Folks are realizing that there is no discernible need to carry a (second) portable-camera, therefore traditional pocket-camera sales continue to plummet.

iPhoneOgraphy. Having published over 500,000 images in recent years on our site (http://www.416-1100.com), the iPhone digital camera has become very sophisticated. The lens system’s aperture is currently at ƒ2.2 with a top shutter speed of 1/1000 second, Color rendition is very accurate, image detail is sharp. For a fixed focal-length camera one could hardly ask for more, knowing that the entire Camera, Lens, Imager system is the size of Kernel of Corn.

iPhoneOgraphy Wish List. Apple has achieved Patents for an internal Zoom Lens System, a unique Light Splitting system so that the 3-primary colors (Red Green Blue) are separated, processed and then brought together digitally for recording onto the memory data card. Apple also received a patent for a Bayonet Lens Mounting system so accessory Lens attachments may be attached to the iPhone with its precision mounting hardware. If and when Apple brings these unique Patents into the iPhone, another Imaging Revolution will be upon us. While we are wishing, lets increase the Aperture to ƒ1.8 and the maximum shutter speed to 1/2000 second, and a 3x optical zoom lens.

iPhoneOgraphy. There have been occasions particularly for product imaging, landscapes, and evening sunsets, where the iPhone camera does an amazing job. I’ve posted many on my FAU4U Facebook page; Combine iPhoneOgraphy with several of the great iPhone Camera and Imaging Editing Apps available today, such as: 645 PRO, GyroLens, PS Express, Photogene4, to name a few. Notice the screen-capture that displays my iPhone “Image Editing” home-page showing my most commonly used Apps. BTW, since I have not found a Photo App to adjust Perspective similar to the “Photoshop Skew Tool” I use Doc Scan Pro App on the iPhone and Doc Scan HD App on the iPad, to straighten (make parallel) building Edges in Photos. These Apps are designed to square the edges of a scanned page;however I use the App to make Building Walls parallel, as a $2500 CANON Perspective-Control Tilt-Shift Lens would accomplish.

Our Professional Photography colleagues will be shocked to learn that many times, I’ve chosen to use my trusty iPhone 6 Plus (camera) set to HDR mode, to capture landscape scenes and sunsets rather than take out my $3500 Canon Digital SLR rig. When engaged for a photo assignment, one surely cannot whip out an iPhone for a commercial job.

iPhone Cameras. Next year over 1,000,000,000 iPhones (1 Billion iPhones) will be in Circulation.

 Apple knows the Power of iPhone picture-taking and SELFIE picture taking. Addressing this huge imaging demand Apple continues to implement a number of significant image quality upgrades. Recall initially, the front-facing camera was “designed” primarily for FaceTime video-calling. To keep the band-width requirements under control, for the cellular service providers, Apple kept the front facing camera to roughly 1 million pixels. Currently, the cellular providers have greatly enhanced their Networks by a factor of 10x, so live streaming HQ video is now mainstream.

iPhone 6S Front Facing 5pm Camera. Apple increasing the front facing camera to 5mp will deliver very high quality images for publication to Facebook, Twitter and other Social Networks. The Front Facing Camera upgrade will also deliver true 1080p, 30 frames per second, High Definition Video, for making Selfie videos, HDTV Movies, High Definition FaceTime calls, and high resolution selfie Picture taking.

iPhone 6S Rear Facing 12mp Camera. Apple increasing the Rear Facing Camera imager to 12mp is a significant increase. Apple has resisted increasing the pixel count in prior iPhone iterations; however, Apple improved and increased the iPhone’s pixel-size to reduce low-light noise.

iPhoneOgraphy, iPhone Digital Photograph As a frame of reference the traditional 8″x10″ Color Print at 300dpi, requires 7.2mp of image data. (The math: 8x300x10x300 = 7,200,000) One of the principle reasons that Apple retained the 8mp pixel-dimension, was the iPhone’s ability to make Framable 8×10″ prints.

iPhoneOgraphy. Apple continued to improve Picture Taking by re-Engineered the actual Pixels for three subsequent years (rather than increasing the pixel count) improving the Lens Systems, and adding Optical Image Stabilization, reducing blurred-pictures, by virtually eliminating camera shake.

iPhoneOgraphy for the inPhone 6S. Its reported from supply-line sources that the iPhone 6S Front facing camera will contain a 12mp imager. A traditional digital file with a pixel dimension of 12mp RGB (bayer array: red green blue) can deliver a 300dpi print of 10″x13.3″ which is a remarkable capability for a Camera-Lens System that is the size of a small Green Pea, imbedded in the iPhone 6S.

iPhoneOgraphy 4k Video HDTV. The new Rear Facing Camera would also have the capability of recording true 4k HDTV Movies at 30 frames per second. True HDTV 4K recordings means that 30 frames per second with each frame containing a pixel dimension of 4096×2160 pixels, which equates images of 8.847mp each, recorded at a frame rate of thirty frames per second. Canon’s $10,000 five pound DSLR professional camera can capture 4k video, but certainly not “pocket-friendly.” This is a lot of imaging data. Better upgrade your next iPhone to 128GB Phone storage!

In practice, if you were video recording a Tennis Match in 4k format (A), one could scroll through the video Frames, locating the exact Frame where the Tennis Ball was impacted upon the strings of the Tennis Racket, a precise moment in time that Professional Photographers strive for, with their $10,000 Canon SLR cameras, that can capture high-speed photography at just 12 frames per second. Truly, a Wow Factor.

iPhoneOgraphy 4k Video Picture Frames (B), Combine 4k video recording with a Optical Zoom lens, would create an Action Sports camera to behold. Notice the tennis match that I shot in 2005 at a FAU Woman’s Court. With 4k recording this shot would be common-place rather than a hard sought-after lucky capture.

http://www.416-1100.com/gallery/392033

iPhoneOgraphy, One More Thing. Recently, Apple received a Patent for incorporating a Bayonet Mounting System into the iPhone in support for its Rear Facing camera Lens opening. If implemented, Apple (or the After-Market) would be able to manufacturer Lens Attachments to be precision mounted onto the iPhone.

iPhoneOgraphy. If and When Apple chooses to build a stainless steel Bayonet Mount, this would encourage even more picture taking, with an array of zoom lenses, wide-angle lenses, and telephoto lenses.

iPhoneOgraphy ALSO, Apple received a Patent where a 3x Optical Zoom Lens would be built into the iPhone, internally, making the iPhone with no attachments, an all-in-one camera system combined with all the capabilities of the smartphone.

iPhoneOgraphy. Apple is fully aware that its iPhones owners are capturing Billions of Pictures and video clips. Apple knows that the iPhone Camera with its high quality picture taking capability, is one of the major reasons folks buy iPhones, combined with the iPhone’s new larger 4.7″ and 5.5″ Displays, and its incredible array of iPhone designed Apps.


———————– Previously Reported ————————–

iPhone 7 has been on Apple’s Drawing Boards for some time. There may not even be an iPhone 6S, that has been anticipated. Yes, there will likely be a New iPhone released in Q3 of 2015. There are a number of unknowns, among a few: (A) What will Apple call the next iPhone iteration, iPhone 6S or iPhone 7, (B) What are the New iPhone Specifications and improvements from the present day iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, (C) What are the New iSight Camera Specifications, will Apple be able to incorporate a true Dual-Lens Sight camera system, or a 3-Imager Array with Optical Image Stabilization, incorporated with a 3x Optical Zoom Lens with a field of view of say 20º to 60º range (both these iSight configurations are Apple owned Patents). (D) Perhaps the iSight Camera receives a new 12 Million Pixel Imager, with enhanced color rendition and low-noise performance.

iPhones are sophisticated hand-held compact communications devices that require thousands of man-hours to develop, test, engineer, retest, reengineer, construct prototypes, field-test, fabrication production-run tests, then mass-produce.

Question remains: Will Apple release an iPhone 6S in 2015 or choose to call it an iPhone 7. There have been lots of chatter mentioning that the iPhone 6S iteration thought to be released in Sept, 2015, will not occur with the “S” model. However, Apple may release the iPhone 7 in 2015 because of its extensive improvements, that are certainly not an incremental improvement.

Apple’s iPhone 7 Camera may be the Really BIG News. A recent US Patent Awarded to Apple, designs a new image-splitting Cubic methodology, an optical zoom and image stabilization camera lens system, low noise improvement, color rendition. Perhaps a new optical image stabilization system coupled to the three-imager system that separately processes Red, Green, and Blue light.

Current reports out of China indicate that the iSight Camera may increase the Imager to 12 million Pixels. If the iSight Camera system is configured with a dual-camera system, perhaps the 12 million pixels equates to Two Imagers of 6 million pixels each.

iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus mass-production will commence in August, 2015 in preparation to its subsequent release. iPhone 6 to iPhone 6 Plus mass-production will be at a 2:1 ratio, favoring the more popular iPhone 6. Assuming drop-testing is now satisfactory, the iPhone 6 Plus model may incorporate a new Sapphire display-cover; the use of Sapphire would be a First for any current smartphones on the market. Currently the Watch and the Watch edition models utilize Apple’s new sapphire display covering.

iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus have been out for 9 months, with only 3-Months remaining until the next iPhone; Accordingly, it’s time to update the rumors regarding the next generation iPhone. No one knows if the next iPhone will be named the iPhone 6S, or the iPhone 7, but from industry sources, we are expecting the iPhone 7 to arrive in the 3rd quarter of 2015.

The next iPhone may feature an edge-to-edge, or near edge-to-edge display removing all or most of the edge-bezel that exists in the 5.5″ iPhone 6 Plus. iPhone 7 may be the result of removing most of the bezel {the black “boarder” that outlines the display area}. This will have the effect of “creating” a larger image-display area, without increasing the edge-to-edge dimensions of the overall iPhone 7 and iPhone 7 Plus. As for resolution, we think Apple will likely retain the pixel dimensions at 1080p, and physical dimensions of the iPhone 7 models will remain constant with the iPhone 6 and 6 plus.

Apple Software Engineers are busy finishing iOS9. Operating System where the beta version has been circulated to the development community for testing and operability. Oftentimes, these software updates give “hints” on the new iPhone 7 features. We cannot ignore the concurrent developments with the iWatch, when discussing the advent of the next iteration, the iPhone 7.

Force Touch Technology. One of the “Operating System” features that may be brought over from the Apple Watch is Force Touch. This is a software methodology that distinguishes between a Tap and a forceful Touch. Generally speaking a Tap is a brief gesture made to a touch-screen display signifying a menu item, a “send” or “answer” button.

A Forceful Touch is a new gesture where a user applies finger-pressure on a menu item, indicating to the Operating System to launch a “Sum Menu” for example. In actuality the display does not notice or measure physical pressure; however, applying a press, the system recognizes the “diameter” of the finger when a there is a brief Tap, as compared to an “increasing diameter” of the finger, and a longer Press duration that occurs on the touch screen.

Inside the iPhone, Apple will likely replace the A8 processor with a new A9 processor, fabricated by Samsung, however, designed by Apple. Samsung will use the new thinner 14nm FinFET technology when manufacturing Apple’s new A9 custom processor.

Lets Get Scientific for a moment. The term “14nm” refers to the size of the transistors that are used to make a whole integrated circuit or ‘chip’. Back in the days of the earliest integrated circuits these transistors were 10 microns across or nearly 1,000 times larger than they are today. Reducing the size of these transistors has important benefits.

Because of the way integrated circuits are built on fixed-size sheets of silicon, by making each circuit smaller, more circuits may be built on a given sheet size, reducing the cost per transistor and giving greater performance for the same cost.

Additionally by reducing the distance between transistors, the amount of power required is reduced to activate the circuits and to move the signal from one circuit to the next. The results is a reduction in overall power consumption. For Apple “14nm” means greater performance, less heat, lower power consumption and bet better battery life.

Expect a seriously fast Multi-Core processor in the iPhone 7. On the rear of the iPhone 6, 6 Plus, Apple may install a tandem, dual-lens Cameras into the iPhone 7 that will provide “DSLR Quality” images. The rear-facing camera in the Samsung Galaxy S6 and S6 edge is impressive, therefore it will be interesting to test Apple’s new camera systems.

iPhone 7 for the Record. The next iPhone whether its named the iPhone 6S or the iPhone 7, will not actually be the 7th iPhone. The iPhone 6 and 6 Plus were in order, the 9th and 10th iPhone models released respectively. If Apple were to adopt the next Number for all the new model-releases, no more “S” designations for odd-year releases) then the iPhone 7, 7 Plus would be the 11th and 12th in line.
S

Historically, when Apple updates a current iPhone model, Apple adds the “S” moniker to the model name its updating, the “odd-numbered years,” such as 2009, 2011, 2013, and 2015 presumably. For example, iPhone 4S was an update of the iPhone 4, iPhone 5S updated the 5, and this year Apple will likely name this year’s update of the iPhone 6, the iPhone 6S. This year may change this naming sequence.

iPhone 7 Whispers & Rumors are Circulating. Apple’s very complex iPhones are literally self-Powered package of technologies including a high speed, highly compact, power efficient Computer coupled to several sophisticated multi-channel “Radio Transceivers” capable of communicating with over 600 channels of ultra-high frequency cellular networks, countless WiFi Systems, Routers, Bluetooth connectivity, plus a high-quality image-stabilized HDR digital camera, high frame rate HDR full resolution 1080p HDTV video camera, all secured with Biometric FingerPrint technology giving the equivalent of 9-digit password protection.

Apple is concentrating its engineering FOCUS on the iPhone’s iSight Camera, its Processor, and other internal components, when enhancing the iPhone models released in odd-numbered years. This year, 2015, the new iPhone 7 will likely follow this upgrading formula.

Over 35% of the Folks buy iPhone 6 were Android “Switchers” according to Industry Tracking Services, reporting Carriers, and Apple. Apparently there is a large installed base of Android smartphone users that are migrating to Apple, now that the iPhone 6 is offering larger displays.

iPhone 6 and 6 Plus Sales are far and away Better than Analysts predicted, Apple sold 135 Million iPhones Globally for the 6 months period ending March 31, 2015. Surveys conducted by Canaccord indicates that a “greater mix” of Android users {about double} are converting to the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus than did to the iPhone 5, 5s, or 5c. A recent Kantar Worldpanel ComTech study noted that across Germany, France, Italy, Spain, and the U.K., roughly 32.4% of new iPhone buyers migrated from Android in the last quarter.

Data from the IDC’s latest Mobile Phone Tracker survey reveals that 98.8 million smartphone units shipped in China in the first three months of 2015. Despite a 4.5% contraction, Apple grew its sales a massive 62.1% year over year. IDC’s Tracker reports that Apple shipped 14.5 million iPhones in China in the quarter, earning the company 14.7% market share, making iPhone China’s No. 1 smartphone vendor.

Analysts fail to notice the Chinese 4.3% contraction in smartphone sales was largely due to Samsung’s significant 11.3 million unit drop in sales Y-O-Y, from 20.9 million to 9.6 million units sold, more than double China’s percentage contraction.

Reports from Asia claim that this year’s Apple smartphone for 2015 will double its RAM and pack 2GB of LPDDR4 memory, which is a speed and efficiency upgrade from the current LPDDR3. Apple may have made this decision in order to keep iPhone operations (iOS systems, Apps & Games) more fluid, as content becomes more demanding and screen resolutions increase.

In Sum, iPhone for 2015 may be named the iPhone 6S, according to history and recent conflicting reports. For those who don’t remember, the iPhone 5S featured internal improvements (the most notable being Toupch ID Fingerprint, upgraded Processor, Camera, Imager, Lens system) over its iPhone 5 predecessor. The iPhone 6S (it’s not an Apple officially announced name for the 2015 iPhone) could very well be an upgrade to the current iPhone 6 model, or iPhone 7, because of major internal innovations justifying the advanced nomenclature.

One More Thing on this Topic. Lets look at nomenclature from a Marketing perspective. Apple knows that only 20% of the installed iPhone-user-base upgraded from an older iPhone to the New iPhone 6. Apple reported that 13% of existing iPhone users upgraded to the iPhone 6 by December 31, 2014, and an additional 7% of existing iPhone users upgraded to the iPhone 6 by March 31, 2015.

Conversely, this means 80% of existing iPhone owners have not upgraded to iPhone 6 or 6 Plus. To help motivate this large 80% group of {iPhone 5, 5S, 5C, 4, 4S, 3G and 3GS} users, about 250 million of them, Apple may incorporate “magnanimous improvements and technology” into the Next iPhone iteration, to help encourage more existing iPhone users to upgrade this year.

Apple may jump directly to the iPhone 7 to make it indelibly clear that the 2015 iPhone iteration is NOT an Incremental update.

Apple is now the Top smartphone seller in China, topping foreign and domestic competitors alike in the Middle Kingdom, but overall Chinese handset sales fell for the first time in six years, mainly due to Samsung’s 53% drop in unit sales, Y-O-Y. IDC’s annual report cited sales in the first quarter of 2015 found that APPLE has taken over the top spot on the strength of 14.5 million units shipped, an increase of 62% year-on-year. Apple also noted a surge in sales for China during Apple’s company’s last quarterly call. Apple executives reported China revenue was up 71% on the year-ago quarter at a record clip of $16.8 Billion.

Apple’s 14.7% share of the market edged out Xiaomi, who shipped 13.5 million units on the quarter for a 13.7% share of the market. Huawei was third, with 11.2 million units and an 11.4% market share. Followed by Samsung and Lenovo, both of whom plummeted in the Chinese market over the last year. Last year’s leader Samsung saw a 53% year-on-year drop in sales as the Korean firm went from 20.5 million handsets shipped and a 19.9% market share to just 9.6 million units and a 9.7% market share. Lenovo’s position tumbled from 10.2% to 8.3% of the total market as year-on-year shipments fell by nearly a quarter from 10.5 million to 8.2 million handsets. All other vendors sold for 41.7 million handsets, accounting for 42.2% share of the market.

In total, IDC estimates that 98.8 million smartphones were shipped in China on the quarter, down 4.3% from last year’s Q1 total of 103.2 million units. It it noted that 4.4 million unit drop was largely due to Samsung sales were down over 50% from the previous period.

Analysts noted that the market for smartphones in China, as in other nations, has gone flat as consumers have been reluctant to trade in their current handsets for new models. “China is oftentimes thought of as an emerging market but in reality, the vast majority of phones sold in China today are smartphones, similar to other mature markets like the US, UK, Australia, and Japan,” explained IDC China managing director Kitty Fok.


———————– Previously Reported ————————–

 Apple’s Light Separation imager system is not a new development; however, presently these technologies exist in $10,000+ HDTV network video cameras. The unique technology rests with is Cubic-Light-Splitter. “Prism Systems” are incorporated in HDTV video rigs. The New iPhone 7 iSight Camera for 2015… will Apple really be able to incorporate this 3-Imager Array with Optical Image Stabilization, incorporated with a 3x Optical Zoom Lens with a field of view of 22º to 66º range? Notice the Patent received March 24, 2015, describing this design.

My personal opinion, the external dimensions of the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus may remain the same for the iPhone 7 and 7 Plus. Any marginal increases to the display size may be effected by bezel reductions. The other improvements will be display brightness, resolution, pixel density, Processor speed, a jump in RAM to 2GB, and elimination of the 16GB traunch in storage, rendering storage choices of 32GB for the standard configuration, and 64GB and 128GB as option increases.

Why would Apple skip the iPhone 6S and iPhone 6S Plus (established nomenclature) for its 2015 model release in September… My belief is its a Marketing Perception move.

iPhone 6 and 6 Plus have been near-nuclear-hot selling release, with 74,500,000 iPhone 6 and 6 Plus’s sold its Q1, 2015 fiscal quarter, that’s 827,778 iPhones per Day, or 34,490 per Hour, for every hour in a 24 hour day.

Tim Cook mentioned “…that 85% of the 74.5 Million iPhone buyers were NEW to Apple, and 35% of them came to iPhone from Android… and only 15% were previous iPhone upgrades…” These facts were mentioned during Apple’s quarterly Conference Call in January, 2015. This is huge news to Apple, to develop a plan to motivate new buyers and iPhone upgraders to acquire the newest iPhone, plus Apple wants to eliminate the stigma that the “S” model year improvements as just “an incremental release”.

Apple’s 2015 iPhone model name, skipping directly to the iPhone 7 and 7 Plus is justified because of the internal improvements and performances, and eliminates the critics use of “incremental” associated with the “S” model year releases that have occurred in Odd-Year model releases. Additionally, the fact that Apple desires to showcase the very best products, in their categories, has led to speculations amongst media and tech enthusiasts that the Apple iPhone 7, as opposed to the rumored iPhone 6S, will be launched in 2015.

Recall, with the release of the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, only 15% of the existing iPhone 4, 4S 5, 5C and 5S owners upgraded to the iPhone 6 models, and some 35% of the new iPhone 6 buyers came from Android users. This translates to 85% of the existing iPhone (4, 4S 5, 5C, 5S) owners, totaling 220,000,000 for these iPhone models, have yet to upgrade. This 85% market-segment, this over 200 million iPhone owners, is precisely where Apple may likely apply sharp focus, for the September, 2015 iteration cycle.

A Key Factor, the market has reacted extremely positively to the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus. This has led to a change in priorities, with pressure from investors like Carl Icahn pushing Apple to change its two-year aesthetic and technology redesigns to a Yearly Affair, rather than a Major iPhone Upgrade in EVEN numbered Years, and incremental “S” iPhone updates on ODD Years. China is a KEY Stakeholder, a market that Apple wishes to gain more share. CHINA’s demand for iPhone 6 Plus is greater than most other countries’ iPhone 6 demand.

iPhone 7 is expected to have a screen size close to 4.9 inches, an increase from 4.75″ while the iPhone 7 Plus is expected to increase to near 5.7″ screen up from 5.5″ by reducing the horizontal and vertical bezel widths. This would render the iPhone 7 to be its largest iPhone since its inception in 2007. However, the external dimensions of the iPhone 7 models will remain consistent with the iPhone 6 models.

 The new iPhone 7 may likely see a Very Significant iSight Camera upgrade, with its rear camera sensor being increased over 8 megapixels; or a NEW 3-Imager System, collecting Red, Green, and Blue light-segments using a unique Light Splitting Array, building onto the iPhone’s already impressive imaging history.

iPhone 7 may have a quad-core A9 processor to power the two iPhone 7 models, to power the new Imaging Array as well as a near-QHD display resolution, given Apple’s history with using non-standard resolutions for its devices.

iPhone 7 is rumored to have more RAM, like 2GB, and integrated graphics on the next generation flagships’ SoC will be key upgrades that will allow them to power higher resolution displays and provide significant hardware efficiencies over the previous generations.


Previously Reported:

http://www.kantarworldpanel.com/global/smartphone-os-market-share/

https://fau4u2.wordpress.com/category/news-apple-rumors-whispers/

 iSight iPhone 7 Dual Camera System: It has been widely reported over various iterations of the “S” Models, the “Odd Numbered Year” iPhone updates, that the iSight Camera receives considerable engineering attention. This year may not be an exception.

 The rumor-mill is intensifying, our articles will bring to you unannounced product whispers, that have several sources, in effort to keep the “junk” to a minimum. Incidentally, one of our articles that was written 90-days before the iPhone 6 was announced, was recently reviewed… we on-target with most of the iPhone 6 predictions and features. Take a look at our Rumors and Whispers tab looking at the June-July 2014 articles.https://fau4u2.wordpress.com/category/news-apple-rumors-whispers/

 iPhone 6S Dual Camera System.This Year the whispers are hovering around the iPhone potentially receiving a TWO iSight Camera configuration. One lens being set to “slightly Wide Angle” the second lens being set to “slightly Telephoto.” Each lens system would be supported by its own high-resolution [8Mp] low-noise Imager. [Editor: Perhaps 10MP this year]. The heavy lifting is with some very unique software algorithms “OverLaying” the two captured high-resolution images, and creating a single ultra-high-resolution image, similar to what one would expect from a quality digital SLR camera.

 iPhone 6S Dual Lens iSight Cameras. With this unique dual-iSight Camera arrangement, an added benefit would be the resultant image would be rendered with twice the number of pixels collecting light and image information, effectively Doubling the Image Resolution, in addition to Halving Image Noise. Sophisticated software techniques are deployed to improve image quality with auto-digital-zoming with image-matching during the “OverLay” processing. As c|Net has reported about this technology so the technology exists… the question… has Apple licensed the technology, or is Apple engineering their own unique method to be used in future versions of its iPhone.
http://youtu.be/bKyM-XKhZJY

 Apple department heads and engineering teams therefore have to “Predict what the Buying Public will likely Desire years into the Future” years before the Current iPhone Models is released. Accordingly, many iPhone suppliers, beta models, screen makers, sensor makers, lens grinders, chip foundries, processors, batteries… their staffs are aware of what may be coming for the latest iPhone models on the drawing board. There are likely 3 to 4 iPhone models in various stages of development presently, not to mention other new unannounced product creations under wraps.

Apple’s iPhone 6S, iPhone 7 the iPhone 7S, and iPhone 8, are in various levels of Development, given that an iPhone requires years before a new iPhone is “Finalized for Mass Production.”

Apple is currently completing the Finalization of the iPhone 6S, the last stage before it is released for mass production. Accordingly, rumors & whispers of what may come in the next iPhone, may confuse next years components with the year after’s components.

 The iPhone 6S will be due for a Major Update to its internal components occurring September, 2015, about 7 months to go. In recent years, historically speaking, iPhones that were released in even-numbered years, the iPhone model names were: iPhone 4 in 2010, iPhone 5 in 2012, iPhone 6 in 2014.

Apple Software Engineers are busy finishing iOS8.2 Operating System where the beta version has been circulated to the development community for testing and operability. Oftentimes, these software updates give “hints” on the new iPhone 6S features. We cannot ignore the concurrent developments with the iWatch, when discussing the advent of the next iteration, the iPhone 6S.

Interesting discovery in looking at the current beta iOS Code, is the function of a iWatchCompanion App. This App apparently will be a built-in App of the iOS8.2 operating system. When the AppleWatch Companion App is launched, the iPhone to communicate with the iWatch, making for a convenient “Settings Menu” using the iPhone, for convenient selections, watch faces, position of App Icons, etc for the iWatch, once complete, transmit button will send the settings to the iWatch. Settings may also be changed on the iWatch, however the iWatch Companion App is a convenient settings tool. Apple Watch will be compatible with iPhone 5, 5C, 5S, 6 and 6 Plus.

 Over recent years historically, the “odd-numbered years,” such as 2009, 2011, 2013, and 2015 presumably, when Apple updates a current iPhone model, Apple adds the “S” moniker to the model name its updating; for example iPhone 4S was an update of the iPhone 4, iPhone 5S updated the 5, and this year Apple will likely nam”{e this year’s update of the iPhone 6, the iPhone 6S.

iPhone 6S Whispers & Rumors are Circulating. Apple’s very complex iPhones are literally self-Powered package of technologies including a high speed, highly compact, power efficient Computer coupled to several sophisticated multi-channel “Radio Transceivers” capable of communicating with over 600 channels of ultra-high frequency cellular networks, countless WiFi Systems, Routers, Bluetooth connectivity, plus a high-quality image-stabilized HDR digital camera, high frame rate HDR full resolution 1080p HDTV video camera, all secured with Biometric FingerPrint technology giving the equivalent of 9-digit password protection.

Apple is concentrating its engineering FOCUS on the iPhone’s iSight Camera, its Processor, and other internal components, when enhancing the iPhone models released in odd-numbered years. This year, 2015, the new iPhone 6S will likely follow this upgrading formula.

iPhone 6 performs smoothly even with 1GB of RAM ;[‘
,;memory
. The secret lies with the iOS8 platform, ]optimizations, the way the iPhone handles memory, internal tasks, the Apps, as well as Apple’s strict programming requirements for its App developers.

Reports from Asia claim that this year’s Apple smartphone for 2015 will double its RAM and pack 2GB of LPDDR4 memory, which is a speed and efficiency upgrade from the current LPDDR3. Apple may have made this decision in order to keep iPhone operations (iOS systems, Apps & Games) more fluid, as content becomes more demanding and screen resolutions increase.

iPhone for 2015 may be named the iPhone 6S, according to recent reports. For those who don’t remember, the iPhone 5S featured internal improvements (the most notable being Toupch ID Fingerprint, upgraded Processor, Camera, Imager, Lens system) over its iPhone 5 predecessor. The iPhone 6S (it’s not an Apple officially announced name for the 2015 iPhone) could very well be an upgrade to the current iPhone 6 model.

Apple’s own announcement history proves that every two iterations there’s a major change internally and externally; however, for “odd numbered year” model enhancements the iPhone improvements have been viewed as “incremental” updates. Apple analysts say the iPhone experiences major updates every two years, with improvements in specs for the alternate year cycles. [Editor: we believe the “incremental” designation is a gross-oversimplification for thousands of hours of Apple management and engineering efforts.]

iPhone 5S compared to the iPhone 5. Comparing the iPhone 5 to the 5S may give clues in predicting the enhancements to this year’s iPhone 6S. Although the two models (the 5 and 5S) are nearly identical as to its external appearance, its case, and dimensions, the iPhone 5S boasts a number of new significant features internally.

New Bio-metric Finger Print Touch-ID Security” a highly accurate fingerprint scanner embedded within, under the iPhone’s newly sapphire-covered Home Button, reported to have the equivalency of a strong 8-digit password. This is a unique feature of the iPhone 5S (and new to any smartphone) which provides the user the ability to securely unlock the phone just by touching the Home Button. [Editor: think about it, an 8-digit password has over 99 million numerical combinations, which means with Touch-ID Fingerprint technology, only 3 other individuals in the North America continent could unlock your iPhone]

New iSight Imager with larger Imager-Pixels of 1.5 microns each, up from 1.4 microns, iPhone 5S comes with a new iSight Camera whose improved image-sensor, 7.14% larger pixels, provides for higher resolution images with Lower-Image Noise, and better color rendition. [Editor: A 7.14% increase in pixel-size sounds minimal; however, in these compact hand-held iPhones, space is limited, and the imager is about the diameter of a very small green-pea]

Increased the iSight Lens Aperture to f2.2 from f2.4 which has the effect of significantly increasing the “amount of light” exposure onto the image sensor, provides better pictures in Low-light situations. [Editor: This increase in aperture permits 70% more light onto the imager; another example, increasing an Aperture to f1.4 from f1.8 actually Doubles the amount of light passing through the lens to the imager.]

New True-Tone Dual LED Flash System. This new flash system performs by accurately auto-calculating the color of the ambient lighting conditions in the image-area into which FLASH will be added; upon auto-calculation the COLOR of the Flash emulates the natural ambient lighting of the scene. [Editor: sounds simple, but not so; we know of no other Electronic Flash system, regardless of cost or size, that is capable of auto-color-correct its Flash output on-the-fly]

New iSight Camera Records at 120 FPS Slow-Motion Video capability, resulting in high quality slow-motion video clips. Only multi-$thousand SLR cameras had this capability. Typical video recorders operate at 30 frames per second. Recording at 120fps gives the effect of slowing down motion to 1/4th speed. [Editor: Think about it, 120 frames of 2.2mp for each image-frame, each video-frame having a file-size of say 3MB, equates to 360,000,000 bytes of digital image data, processed and recorded every second. A billion BYTES of image information processed every 3 seconds is unheard of even for most desktop PC Computers; yet the Apple critics call the iPhone 5S an “incremental update NOT.]

New 64-bit A7 Processor chip, increased from a 32-bit processor, the first smartphone to have this broad-band architecture, giving blazing fast processing speeds. [Editor: This means, if the processor’s band-width increased from 32-bits to 64-bits, using a “water-pipe” analogy, if the processor band-width increased a 32mm diameter pipe to 64mm diameter, it delivers 400% more throughput]

New M7 Motion Processor chip to measure and processes Motion, GPS, Altitude and other location attributes have been enhanced from the previous M6 chip. [Editor: Apple removed the location attributes and calculations from the main A7 processor and created a separate M7 processor, so that both the A7 and M7 processors may coProcess simultaneously, enhancing resulting speed; also the M7 processor is specifically designed to efficiently process location-based geophysical data.]

Reports from Asia claim that the new iPhone 6S will use “Force Touch” technology a technology that first appeared in the Apple Watch. “Force Touch” incorporates an electronic-grid around the flexible Retina display to distinguish between a person’s light-tap and a firm-depression, which may trigger a different software feed-back response, like instant access to a range of contextually specific controls, such as an Action-menu in Messages, or a Mode that allows one to Select different AppleWatch faces. [Editor: The display’s new “Force Touch” an Apple branding for pressure-sensitivity is the most significant addition to display-sensing-capability since Multi‑Touch on the original iPhone in January 9, 2007]

iPhone 6S iSight camera is likely due for a significant Update. Over recent years the “Odd years” 2009, 2010, 2013, Apple had concentrated its engineering Focus on the iSight Camera, among other components. News reports have stated recently have indicted that the iPhone has captured more Digital Images than any other SmartPhone, dedicated pocket Camera, SLR, by any Brand, or type. Apple knowing this will surely enhance the iSight Camera to provide.

Based on recent Rumors, Whispers, and Reports, the following 9 Enhancements may appear in the Apple’s to be released iPhone 6S and 6S Plus:

1⃣  iSight Camera Lens System Aperture of f2.0 from f2.2 providing for significantly more light exposure on the image sensor

2⃣  iSight Camera Lens System to have true Optical Zoom which gives crystal-clear wide angle and telephoto pictures

3⃣  iSight Camera Imager may have 10 million pixels or more

4⃣  iSight Camera Imager may have 1.6 micron pixel size for better low-light low-noise performance

5⃣  RAM on-board memory increased to 2GB for better multi-App performance

6⃣  RAM Memory to be LPDDR4 high-speed read-wright capability

7⃣  Sapphire Crystal for the main display

8⃣  Main Display to be OLED for improved Brightness in high ambient lighted areas like outdoors

9⃣  Main Display incorporating Force Touch tactile technology similar to AppleWatch’s display

📲 Presently in the USA, over 52% of all American smartphone owners have iPhones, the remaining smartphone users, the 48% smartphone users, are grouped together (the 12 brands and models of Androids, Blackberry, Google, Samsung, HTC, Nokia, Motorola). Apple’s market-share in North America is growing. Industry experts expect, with the release of the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, Apple’s market share for their iPhones will grow at an accelerated rate, as Android users migrate to Apple, now that the Display size objections are resolved, with Apple’s 4.7″ and 5.5″ screens.

📲 Apple iPhone “supply-line” chatter is hot and heavy as the next weeks speed forward. Combine this chatter with several layers of (Chinese) Mandarin translation, it becomes difficult to differentiate between which models are being referred to, either the iPhone 6S, iPhone 7, iPhone 7S, or iPhone 8, all of which are in various stages of development and testing. Expressed above is the best we could surmise.

📲 Virtually all of the rumors and schematics pertaining to Apple’s next iPhone center on its ultra-thin design and two Display sizes: 4.7″ and 5.5″ or larger as bezel dimensions reduce.

📲 Recall none of the figures, dialogs, and proforma-images, come from Apple officially, but from “snitches” in its supply-line. Of course its no surprise that Apple totally ignores, and is aggravated by all the “news” reports and rumors.

📲 Other than leaked supply-line secrets, punishable by aggressive prosecution by Apple, everything displayed and discussed is conjecture. Since there are such a vast number of enterprises, engineers, and factory workers involved with the fabrication and assembly of the new iPhones, whispers arriving from several directions that have a common-thread, could lead an observer to deductions, which are assembled in this article.

Apple’s iPhone Compared to a Burroughs $250,000 Enterprise Computer. Jim Wilson in 1975 is reviewing a COBOL program printout generated by the Burroughs B2700 Computer system.

Burroughs B2700 Computer Specifications are as follows
➖ Burroughs B2700 Computer System $125,000
➖ System Memory configured for 128 MegaBytes upgrade $40,000
➖ System Removable Dual Drives, 2.2 MegaByte Disks $30,000
➖ System Card-Reader and Card-Punch $8,000
➖ System 132 Character high-speed Line-Printer $22,000
➖ System Weight/Size 1720 pounds, Fills a 10’x12′ Room
➖ System Power Requirements, 240v 50 Amp stabilized, $2,500
➖ System Climate Control Required, Force Air System 65ºF to 75ºF

iPhone 6 Plus Specifications are as follows
➖ iPhone 6 Plus base System, $550
➖ System Memory configured for 128 GigaBytes upgrade, $200
➖ 600 Channel ultra-high frequency Cellular Transceiver, Included
➖ High Definition 8 MegaPixel digital Camera, Included
➖ High Definition 1080p digital HDTV Video Camera, Included
➖ System Weight/Size 172 Grams, Fills Hand, 6.2″x3″x0.28″
➖ System Power Requirements, Builtin LiON Battery, Included
➖ System Climate Control Not Required, 45ºF to 95ºF

Pleased you’re reading, with over 88,000 readership world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 26,000,000 visits today: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

Apple 12.9″ iPad-Pro 🍎 Ready to Challenge 13″ and 14″ PC & LapTops 🍎 True PC Replacement 🍎🍎🍎🍎🍎

1433525214.jpg

🍎 Apple iPad-Pro ~ a 12.9″ iPad Pro is now Ready for Prime Time to Challenge 13″ and 14″ PCs, LapTops, the Enterprise & Education Markets. The big questions are not if, but When?

🍎 Apple iPad-Pro designed as a 12.9″ iPad “Retina” high-resolution display, (recall the traditional iPad 5 with its 9.7″ retina-display, and iPad-mini retina display with its 7.9″ screen) both using Apple’s iOS system, which is a high-power compact-coded operating system.

🍎 The Magic behind the iPhone and iPad is the “Power” and “Stability” these iDevices possess due to the iOS9 operating system. Couple iOS9 with the Apple’s huge array of Apps, these devices are transformed into efficient communications and productivity tools.

🍎 Apple iPad-Pro, the larger sized 12.9″ iPad is reported to have true Multi-Tasking capabilities with the iOS9 release. This means with the iPad Pro, one can have Two separate Apps operating side-by-side simultaneously on one iPad, a feature particularly important to Enterprise users and for Education.

🍎 When Writing a Paper or an Article on the Left-Side, for example, while simultaneously using Google Search and the Internet on the Right-Side, side-by-sde, or when writing an Academic Paper that requires mathematical calculations with Pages App on the Left-Side and simultaneously having the RLM’s 19BII Calculator App (operates and looks exactly like a hand-held HP-19B-II calculator) on the Right-Side to make the calculations… With Apple having their huge array of productivity Apps, being able to run Two APPS simultaneously will truly challenge one choosing traditional PC computers.

🍎 Apple iPad-Pro, the larger 12.9″ display is perfect for Academics and to store digital-Textbooks used in Schools and Universities. Apparently, the iPad Pro is a legitimate product in development (although not confirmed by Apple) as many unrelated supply-line sources are touting Apple’s New Product, the iPad Pro.

🍎 Apple delivering larger 12.9″ display is a perfect size to compete with the tasks generally performed on 13″, 14″, 15″ laptops and many desktop computers, yet maintain the minimalistic footprint. Combine this iPad with a LOGITECH UltraThin bluetooth Keyboard Cover, transforms the iPad into an UltraThin, lightweight, touch-screen laptop.

🍎 LOGITECH UltraThin Bluetooth Keyboard. Presently I have the iPad Air 2 coupled to Logitech UltraThin Keyboard Cover, creates a perfect PC replacement, plus the added benefit of Touch-Screen which is a real plus for document editing… just touch the place on the document to edit, rather than “lousing” around with a mouse, a simple Tap onto a word for “spell-checking” and replacement.

🍎 iPad’s Touch Screen, there is no comparison during Internet Browsing with touch-screen capability, tap onto a link, and the display travels to the new web-site. When I use my 13″ Macbook Pro Laptop, I feel like my hands are tied, having to use the mouse-like touch-pad navigation below the key-board. IMHO, the Macbook will eventually incorporate touch-screens, or else MacBooks will eventually cease to grow sales.

🍎 Think about it, a large display iPad with an amazingly fast full featured iOS8, relatively inexpensive touch-screen design, coupled with a voluminous inventory of Application Software Apps, all optimized for Apple’s dynamic display that is Touch-Screen. Apple’s history has delivered Laptops in various sizes to meet the “Portability vs Utility Equation” requirements of their users of the 11″, 13″, 15″ and 17″ MacBooks. So it makes common sense that iPads will come in three flavors: 7.9″, 9.7″ and 12.9″ iPads.

Admittedly, as part of the rumor-mill; however, I must say that yours truly wrote about this topic several years ago. My writing then, was not a product-rumor, the article was written about my “Jimmy-Wishlist” an iPad product that I want/need for my work-flow. Folks that know me are aware that I do 98.6 degrees of everything I do on my iPad Air2. However, if Apple delivers a super-charged 12.9″ iPad retina, I’ll be with it and in great shape to do my research and video-editing.

🍎 APPLE Please take Note: A few things that I miss migrating to the World of iOS8 is the lack of a MAC styled file-system, where one can find, search, retrieve a particular FILE or Image by name, date, type, or location. Presently in looking for a File or Document in the iOS World, I have to recall which APP was used to create or edit that file, then I have to go to that particular APP and open it to find the File or Image. The other missing file element, is the File Name. There is no apparent method to name a Picture-file and later search for the Image by name.

🍎 More Industry sources close to the production line and familiar with Apple’s product roadmap say that a 12.9″ display is in the works for a product that may be called the iPad Pro. Apple is reportedly already talking to potential supply-line manufacturers to create this humungous display which is set to be released perhaps October, 2014.

🍎 Apple is reportedly is planning to launch a much larger iPad with a higher resolution screen this year, 2015. Sources familiar with the matter told Chinese website “Pad News” that Apple and its Chinese partner Foxconn Technology Co., Ltd are testing 5 different prototypes of 12.9″ iPads. These larger sized iPads may feature 2K and 4K resolutions.

🍎 New iPads may sport double the resolution of iPad Air. Reliable sources say Apple may Announce or Launch the larger-screen iPad Pro in June of 2015. An iPad Pro may launch with a 4K resolution 12.9″ display to hit the market in July, 2015 when the Cupertino-based company updates its product cycle. The current iPad Air with 9.7″ display has 2,048-by-1,536 pixel, or 264 dpi resolution. This display resolution already falls in the 2K category. By definition the Long-Side horizontal resolution of 2000 pixels is referred to 2K, for 2 thousand.

🍎 Chinese Sources said that an iPad may be built with a 4K resolution would likely have a resolution of 4096 x 3072, exactly double the horizontal resolution of iPad Air which is 2,048 pixels. In order to maintain the same “aspect-ratio” of the iPad Air, then the Vertical dimension would also have to be doubled to 3072 pixels. If this occurred, then the new iPad Pro would have 400% more pixels spread within the 12.9″ display. The new iPad Pro is also rumored to sport 397dpi pixel density, compared to the iPad Air’s 264dpi.

🍎 Apple will likely actively target 13” PC ultrabooks and notebooks, with the iPad Pro, or whatever Apple chooses to name it, by providing the device with better portability, better battery life, and comparable screen real estate for productivity applications.

🍎 Another target for the 12.9” iPad, is the educational market, enabling a beautifully display of digital-textbooks. This bigger display is better suited to replace traditional textbooks, just from a size stand point, and Apple with its supply-line partners, are also developing a new display technologies with less weight and less glare, more suited for use in classrooms.

🍎 Many are now speaking of a 12.9″ iPad, with or without an Apple ClamShell. Being full of suggestions, so whats next in the pipeline… Lets create a iPad-Maxi which would have the appearance similar to the MAC Book Air, but that is where the similarly ends.

🍎 This new iPad Pro, is a portable or desktop computing “game changer” as it employs the Apple iOS amazingly efficient operating system; that’s right… NOT an OSX laptop, but an iOS9 operating system platform, housed in a “super-charged” iPad-pro with a huge 12.9″ maxi-display.

🍎 Using an exterior similar to the iPad Air’s foot-print scaled up to a 12.9″ display, the iPad Pro would be “supercharged iPad” with:

🍎 Touch-Screen Retina-Display, designed to challenge the Post PC traditional 13″ and 14″ LapTop computers

🍎 Apple 12.9″; iPad optionally housed within the clam-shell lid, by the After Market.

🍎 Apple will leave the ClamShell feature to the AfterMarketeers like LOGITECH and CLAMCASE.

🍎 The iPad Pro will redefine the PC Laptop-transition, just as the Apple iPad redefined the Tablet

🍎 In my humble opinion, Apple gets the message that Computing these days is more to do with Communications than Calculations, knowing the present-day PC laptop sales are eroding by about 15%/year, with tablet and phablet sales. Folks love iPad’s Communications capabilities, its Visuals, Web Browsing, Pictures & Video Viewing, combined with a highly compact, all-day powered, light weight design.

🍎 As the transition from the PC to the iPad becomes more profound, and assuming the iPad Pro is a super-charged robust iPad, many more Windows PC’ers would migrate to Apple; Conversly, If you want a more compact device, the iPad Air footprint is perfect, as I presently have with the Logitech UltraThin Keyboard Cover, discussed in another Article. If you want more horsepower, then the iPad-Pro described herein would satisfy this need; want even more power then the new 12″ retina MAC Book is it… Want even more Power, then the MAC Book Pro answers this need…

🍎 Apple’s Macbook laptops are designed with 3 Display sizes: 12″, 13″ and 15″. It is surely reasonable to have the iPad in 3 Display sizes, to serve eveyone’s needs. Apple in April, 2010 Apple released the initial iPad with what Apple believed to be the “Optimal 9.7” Display; Within 24 months the iPad grew to sales of about 50 million iPads/year, which is the iPad’s current sales rate.

🍎 November, 2012 Apple met the demand for a more-compact iPad Display, when it released the iPad mini; The iPad-mini’s is having incredible success; The iPad Air and the iPad-mini combined sales are about 65 million iPads/year.

🍎 Apple in 2015 is offering the opportunity of a One-Size-Up to a 12.9″ Display from the original iPad’s 9.7″ Display. After all, once the design of the iPad’s “Internal Electronic Package” is a complete package; however, an evolving package, configuring 3-iPad footprints is a “relatively easy” task: 3-Enclosures, 3-Displays, 3-LiON Batteries, all housing the relatively consistent “Internal Electronic Package” although the iPad Pro may have a more robust electronics package. Leave it to the “After Market” enterprises to fill in the balance of Covers, Cases, Keyboard Cases…

🍎 Not sure which size iPad or alternative to get for yourself, here is a simple decision-tree to help you along the way.


Lets have a “Super-Charged” iPad…. the iPad-Pro:

🔷 more Hardware Connectivity, Lightning plus a Standard SD Picture Card slot

🔷 more Memory say 4GB,

🔷 more Storage say 128GB base the storage, 128GB add $100, 256GB add $200. Memory is inexpensive, so give the folks a good chunk of it.

🔷 more Connectivity say LTEx, LTE, 4G and 3G Cellular, optional $130 radio package to the WiFi a/b/g/n/ac bands

🔷 faster Processor say 2GHz, coupled to

🔷 more Real Estate: 12.9″ Touch-Screen Retina Display.

🔷 Larger Footprint with an Optonal 360° Hinged ClamShell provided by the After Market, where the iPad-Pro snaps into the top-shell, similar to the ClamCase design for the iPad-Air.

🔷 Improved Mathematics & Calculating capacity and VIDEO processing engine to the traditional iPad.

🔷 Pricing for the Base model $599 which includes 64GB storage, 2GB RAM, A8 Processor at 3GHz, and priced up to $999 for the fully loaded 128GB, LTE/Cellular version.

🔷 I will be saving my dollars for the $999 iPad Pro for sure.

🔷 My plan, may be selling my iPad Air2 Retina, with 128GB to Gazelle, to help defray the cost of the iPad Pro. OR, I may retain my iPad Air to have the portable iPad retina, and the much larger iPad Pro for those more intense Desk -Top Image Editing, Video jobs, Spreadsheets, or simply a table-top iPad Pro, adding a bluetooth keyboard.


🔷 http://www.slashgear.com/iphone-5s-retina-2-and-ipad-maxi-the-latest-apple-rumor-grist-28283897/#disqus_thread


🔷 http://www.etnews.com/news/device/device/2774001_1479.html#ystfuv



Pleased you’re reading, as our readers 📚 thousands world-wide, gives motivation 📢 new topics published every day. Spread the Word 📬 to your friends, family, and associates; simply forward 📮 the link below, post it on your Facebook and Twitter Pages for their review,, anyone may subscribe, its secure, confidential, as every time 📅 I publish a story 📝 the WordPress system {not I} sends 📬 a reminder to you with a link to my new Article: https://fau4u2.wordpress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse readership of over 88,000 and growing by 2500/month, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 24 million visits as of Dec/2013, in recent years: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named “Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing” as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a “Health Nut” for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release mid-year 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Mini, I will be changing to it soon with 128GB of Storage and Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover; however, the WiFi only model. My thought is there are so many WiFi zones available these days, investing in the $130 LTE Cellular chipset upgrade is mitigated by my iPhone 5S with its “HOT SPOT” capability. Therefore, if I have migrated into non-WiFi area, or I desire a more Secure Internet Connection, its very easy to Activate my iPhone’s Hot Spot, which serves as a mini-router, accepting up to 5 WiFi enabled devices, for internet connectivity.

 

🚖 Palm Beach County Forcing UBER OUT with Oppressive Regulations & Political Cronyism 🚖 RIDERS are MAD 🚕🚖🚕

1439824117.jpg

🚖 UBER Says “For the past 5 months, {March through August, 2015} there had been a very sensible Temporary Operating Agreement (TOA) in place to regulate Uber System in Palm Beach County. Under the TOA, public safety is a definite priority and where local UBER drivers are able to seamlessly make a living and provide you {Palm Beach County residents} with safe, reliable and competitive ride fares. Interviews that I have personally conducted with 80 Uber riders, indicate that Uber ride-fares are better than 30% less expensive than the TAXI rides they have experienced, and Uber Driver’s are significantly more reliable for their pick-up and travel routes.

🚖 Rather than turning this strong, effective TOA into a permanent law, TODAY (August 18th) the Palm Beach County Commission is taking is final vote on a set of new and very burdensome rules that if passed, would Force Uber OUT of Palm Beach County. We {UBER} needs your help to prevent this from happening.

🚖 Please Go to the Meeting and Speak at the Public Hearing, Tuesday, August 18, 2015, 9:30 am, County Commission Chambers, 301 N. Olive Ave, 6th Floor, West Palm Beach, 33401

🚖 Message to Steven L Abrams, posted today on his FACEBOOK Page: “You should not buckle to the TAXI lobbyists. UBER has provided millions of Safe Rides in South Florida. The CITIZENS, and your CONSTITUENTS want UBER; therefore STOP useless bureaucracy. The current Temporary Operating Agreement is working, where UBER drivers are generally Safer than the driving-public at large, where about 50% of UBER drivers have college degrees, and are subject to stringent Driver Record Checks and Criminal Background Checks.” Posted by the author {@FAU4U} Boca Raton, FL.

🚖 County Commissioners Remember We are Your Constituents. There have been millions of Safe Uber rides provided to Uber Riders by Uber Drivers in the one year it has been operating in south Florida. Millions. May I remind the County Commissioners, you work for us.

🚖 Chauffeur Licensing, Fingerprinting, and Driver Commercial Insurance are absurd requirements
🚖 Fingerprinting is duplicitous, as UBER is performing stringent background checks, Uber driving is not a Crime scene
🚖 Personal Uber Driver commercial insurance is duplicitous as UBER is already providing $Million Commercial insurance for all UBER Drivers
🚖 Chauffeur Licensing is absurd as Uber Drivers are driving their personal passenger vehicles of no more than 7 seats in a traditional SUV. Uber Drivers are not driving Stretch Limousines or 20 passenger Airport Shuttle Buses
🚖 If Palm Beach County Law does not permit UBER to function, change the Oppressive Laws.

🚖 Competition can be painful to those that are providing inferior services and higher prices. Have any of you {Commissioners} actually taken a few TAXI rides recently? Have any of you {Commissioners} actually taken a few UBER rides recently?

🚖 By many experiences reported by my Rider interviews, you’d be lucky if a hailed TAXI arrives; and as they arrive, its likely 15 to 30 minutes late. With Uber Drivers, they arrive with 95% confidence, within two minutes of the promised time; and where the UBER Riders may actually visualize the hailed Uber Vehicle’s progress via GPS on the Uber MAP that the Riders see on their UBER App, as the Driver approaches the pick up location.

🚖 UBER Drivers are directed by GPS to give the best-route to the Rider’s destination, helping to prevent the driver from giving an expensive “Joy Ride” using an inefficient, longer route. In the unlikely event of an Uber Driver’s intentionally using a longer-route, the Uber Rider can contact Uber directly to receive a direct monetary credit to the Uber Rider’s credit card.

🚖 Palm Beach County Commission as well as the Broward County Commission: the Commissions collision with UBER centers around the level of the”Background Checks.” There are Two defined Levels of Background Checks. The Florida Department of Law Enforcement (“FDLE”) defines a background check as “a criminal history record check to determine if a person has been arrested and/or convicted of a crime.” If you were to request such a check, FDLE would search the following databases
🚖 The Florida Computerized Criminal History Central Repository for Florida arrests (FL State check)
🚖 The FBI’s national criminal history database for federal arrests as well as arrests from other states (National check)
🚖 The Florida Crime Information Center for warrants and domestic violence injunctions (hot files check)
🚖 Level 1 background check in Florida refers to a check based upon your name and employment history. UBER also requires its Driver’s to provide their Social Security number so that National Background checks, will search National Records outside of Florida Records Databases are possible
🚖 Level 2 background check, on the other hand, refers to a FL State and National records checks based upon the Driver’s fingerprints and consideration of disqualifying offenses. A national background check is based only on your fingerprints, while a FL State check is based upon your name (and other identifying characteristics) or your fingerprints. This Level-2 background check is more comprehensive and applies to those individuals who are designated by Florida Law as holding positions of responsibility or trust, like Lawyer Licensees, Real Estate Broker Licensees, Mortgage Broker Licensees.

🚖 Some History. In the early 1900’s the Hoarse & Buggy manufacturers lobbied local governments against the new FORD Automobiles, as they were displacing a 100+ year industry. Its a good thing that those politicians and their constituents were wise enough to visualize progress was upon them.

🚖 One of the driving forces in American history is the concept of personal or individual freedom. It is no accident that the best-remembered line in the Declaration of Independence is the one about God-given rights to “life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness.” One manifestation of these rights is unfettered freedom to travel, to move wherever the urge and economic opportunity lead. This, in turn, has produced an American fascination with personal vehicles.

🚖 UBER may be thought of as the 21st Century Invention for Hailing a Ride, transforming a 100+ year history of obtaining a safe Ride in a quality Car.

🚖 County Commissioners, We want Uber, the automobiles are newer and safer, they are inspected by third-party ASE Certified Mechanics, the Drivers are thoroughly investigated with third-party independent Criminal Background checkers, Driver’s driving record checks, Insurance verifications, a $Million Commercial Insurance Umbrella and Automobile {TAG} Registration checks.

🚖 County Commissioners, remember you are elected representatives. If you buckle to the specials interests, the TAXI industry, YOUR County Commission may come to an END at the NEXT ELECTION, as there are hundreds of thousands of very pleased UBER riders among your constituency that are MAD that UBER may be Forced OUT of Palm Beach County.

🚖 Prior to the 19th century, personal vehicles usually meant horse-drawn carriages, but during the 19th century, cheaper, lighter vehicles were developed. Designed to be pulled by a single horse, they were less expensive to maintain than a coach.Though based on European designs, the light two-wheeled chaise evolved into the American shay. New England builders developed the four-wheeled pleasure wagon before 1825. It could carry light freight and be used for passengers. The pleasure wagon presaged the appearance of one of the characteristic American horse- drawn vehicles, the buggy.The one-horse buggy — light, strong and designed to bounce over bad rural American roads — was also cheap.

🚖 Henry Ford was not the first to realize the mass potential of the automobile. Ransom Olds, with his $650, one-cylinder,“curved- dash” Oldsmobile, became the country’s largest automaker. But the Oldsmobile was a fragile horseless carriage. A vehicle was needed that combined the low cost of the Olds car with the reliability and capability of larger, more expensive cars.

🚖 Ford’s Model T was the car that was reliable with a confortable seating capacity, at its introduction in 1908, it sold for $850, but by the time Ford’s engineers developed the assembly line in 1913, the price was already down to $600. Ford sold over 15 million Model Ts between 1908 and 1927. Once the buying public could purchase a relatively competent, cheap car it wanted more: more power, more comfort and more style.

🚖 UBER “Forced” to Turn OFF their system in BROWARD County. As of July 31, 2015 UBER had little choice but to "Turn-Off" its System for all of Broward County, to the dismay of hundreds of thousands of UBER Riders. WHY a reasoned person would ask???

🚖 ANSWER – Huge Political Contributions by TAXI tycoon Jesse Gaddis to several Broward County County Commissioners, including Mayor Tim Ryan. Why else would Broward County give special treatment and Dispatcher privileges to the Fort Lauderdale International Airport for over 700 Gaddis owned & operated TAXI, LIMOUSINE, and SHUTTLES, to the dismay of other smaller TAXI competitors. UBER is not the first to be on the Wrong Side of this Corruption on the County Commission.

🚖 Broward County Commission Disrupted the UBER System because of Political Cronyism & Oppressive Regulation, forcing UBER to pull the plug on their highly desired system. It has been said that a number of County Commissioners are in the "Pocket" for the TAXI and Limousine drivers and Companies owned by Jesse Gaddis. From everything we’ve heard, and what has been reported by the media, UBER Cars and Drivers are Superior to the Gaddis’s TAXI, Limousines, and most of the Drivers in most respects.

🚖 MONEY, POLITICAL CONTRIBUTIONS to COUNTY COMMISSION Political CAMPAIGNS. Jesse Gaddis, TAXI tycoon now 83 years old, owns a huge Yellow Cab system, leasing and dispatching most of Broward’s Cabs, over 550 Cars. Gaddis also owns Go Airport Service that spans 150 limos and shuttles, plus Gaddis’s B&L Services Group has the Exclusive contract to Dispatch all cabs, limos and shuttles at the airport, a thorn in the side of many smaller cab companies that also service the airport. How does this happen one would ask?

🚖 Friendliness of the UBER Drivers, On-Time Arrival of the Drivers, Clean Modern of the UBER Cars, and Competitive ride-cost are the frequent complements given the UBER system, as compared to Broward County TAXI services.

🚖 South Florida Business Journal published an article in today’s Journal, mentioning that from Friday 7am July 31 through Midnight Sunday August 2nd, about 40,000 UBER Riders found the System Turned OFF, preventing UBER Riders from being able to hail any UBER Drivers.

🚖 UBER, the Riders and Drivers, the $13 Million/Year Quagmire. Lets talk about the Dollars at stake with the Politicians, the Public and UBER. Media sources say that UBER has Delivered over 1 million Safe Rides in the 11 months Uber has been active in Broward County. As an experienced Uber Driver and a Uber Rider the average Uber Ride {for 77 recent rides} in my case as a Driver is $13.75/Ride. Other industry sources say the average ride is $10 or so, lets use $12/Ride for this analysis.

🚖 Uber Average Ride = $12/Ride for 1,090,900 Rides/Year. One million rides in 11 months equates to roughly 90,900 Rides/Month, or 1,090,900 Uber Rides/Year. If the average ride is $12/ride, then 1,090,900 rides equates to $13,090,800 in Annual revenues paid by Uber Riders through the Uber system. Its well known that Uber/Driver revenue-split is 20%/80%, where Uber is retaining 20% of the Rider’s Fare.

🚖 UBER Company Gross Revenues equals $2,618,000/Year for Broward County Uber traffic; Uber Drivers are receiving $10,472,000 in Uber Rider Fares. {Math: UBER Gross Income = 1,090,900x$12×20% = $2,618,000/Year.}

🚖 UBER, whose APPLE iPhone App allows passengers to Arrange for a Uber Ride, plus pay for the trip with the Rider’s iPhone using their pre-registered Credit Card registered within the UBER’s secure system. UBER still operates in Palm Beach and Miami-Dade counties, where new regulations are in the works.

🚖 Palm Beach County agreed to “TRIAL” compromise arrangements with UBER, established in March 2015 for a 6 month period. Therefore in September the Palm Beach County Commission will reexamine the trial period to see if everything is “working properly” and according to the trial period agreements and conditions.

🚖 UBER passengers can be dropped off in Broward County if the UBER Ride is originated outside Broward; however, folks located anywhere in Broward County cannot use the UBER system to originate a Ride anywhere inside Broward County or to anywhere outside Broward County.

🚖 According to UBER sources they say “Broward’s new law is too onerous” the company said Monday, {Aug 10th}. The Broward County rules are oppressive and require each driver to obtain a county chauffeur registration {which is absurd for a standard passenger car}. The County is requiring UBER Drivers to have a Car permit {even though Uber Drivers dive properly registered and ASE Inspected Vehicle.

🚖 Broward requires “county-run” background check {even though UBER conducts thorough Criminal Background check and Driving Records checks using reputable third-party investigation firms} plus Uber Drivers must carry state-required commercial insurance {even though UBER provides blanket $1million commercial insurance for all its Drivers}.

🚖 UBER has met most of the Background-Check requirements all over the country. However the Broward’s requirements are excessive and onerous according to UBER officials.

🚖 Uber: “Broward County Officials implemented one of the most onerous regulatory frameworks for ridesharing in the nation, in a written statement to the media. UBER had no choice but to suspend operations on July 31. UBER hopes the Board of County Commissioners will revisit the issue when they return from break and work with UBER to bring the UBER System back to Broward. UBER has been valued by some investment bankers at somewhere around $50 billion.

🚖 Broward Mayor Tim Ryan said he thought the county and Uber were working toward compromise, and he found the news “surprising and disappointing.” “To me it’s clear that Uber provides a very good service that people want,” said Ryan, who is asked about UBER everywhere he goes. “The regulations Broward County imposed are very reasonable. The county only asked that Uber have safe drivers, safe vehicles and insurance.”

🚖 Dan Lindblade, president of the Greater Fort Lauderdale Chamber of Commerce, said the county went too far in requiring individual licensure for drivers of Uber or other “transportation network companies.” “There regulations are bad for the citizens, bad for our tourism industry, bad for our economy,” he said. “The County is just over-regulating. They could have done something else than just hammer it all the way to the wall. They went too far.”

🚖 UBER’s popularity hinged on the disdain for traditional cabs and Fare cost. At public hearings and in emails that poured into county commissioners’ in-boxes over the past year, customers said they favored Uber’s lower fares, cleaner cars and friendlier drivers.

🚖 Retiree Steve Machoian, an occasional visitor to Fort Lauderdale who said he is planning a move to South Florida from Maryland, said he would never get in a traditional cab here. “Not only are they rude, the Cars A/C rarely works, they take you for long rides, most claim not to speak English, the cars are filthy, and most cases old and broken down,” he said when he learned of UBER decision. “If I can’t get a UBER ride in Broward, I’m going to take my second choice and move to Delray Beach.”

🚖 Gaddis and his TAXI interests have contributed BIG money to County Commission campaigns and have hired a bevy of lobbyists, including Bernie Friedman, George Platt and Judy Stern, to push for the new regulations that have UBER threatening to leave. Ryan, however, said Gaddis and his companies, which also have to follow the fingerprinting provision, had no special influence on the April vote {Its hard to swallow that statement}.

🚖 Mayor Ryan says Gaddis’ campaign contributions he’s personally received from Gaddis-related taxi industry and their lobbyists had no effect on his vote…. {Really, do you all believe that large campaign contributions from UBER’s competition with Gaddis’s TAXI business had no effect on the Mayor’s decision.}

🚖 Commissioner Chip LaMarca, a pro-UBER County Commissioner, said the new background checks are unnecessary, since UBER is already providing third-Party Background Criminal Checks and Driving Records Checks. “The County setting up this whole new level of regulation in Broward County, to me is a complete waste of taxpayers’ money,” he said. LaMarca said UBER background checks, which track criminal records and other data, are sufficient. “I can’t understand why a progressive commission wouldn’t see this ride-sharing shared economy, what’s going on in this country, really in the world, as a benefit to open competition,” LaMarca said.

🚖 Ryan said the commission will take up the Uber issue when it returns from summer break in August after Uber has promised to stop conducting pickups in the county. Ryan said he wants to negotiate with the company, but he doesn’t understand why it is so dead set against the fingerprint requirement when Uber continues to provide service in three cities that have the same requirement: Columbus, Ohio, Houston and New York City.

🚖 Broward County is New Requiring UBER Drivers
• FBI background checks. Uber already requires their drivers to submit to rigorous, nationally recognized background-check process used by hotels, hospitals and other industries. Forcing drivers to undergo another level of review, one that includes fingerprints, only adds bureaucracy and cost, with little evidence for the need… lets face it fingerprints are used in Crime Scenes. Criminals have their records already in the data-base, no prints are needed.
• Chauffeur licenses for every driver. While most cab drivers work full-time, most Uber drivers only work part-time. In Broward, this means several thousand Uber drivers must dig into their pockets to pay over $80 for a two-year license. Uber fears that if their drivers’ names become public, competitors will alert insurance carriers and put the Uber drivers’ personal coverage premiums at risk for driving for the services, even though Uber provides a $1 million commercial umbrella coverage
• Around-the-clock 24/7 Commercial Car Insurance for every driver. Again, while cabs may be on the road 24 hours a day, Uber drivers most-times use their personal cars for only a few hours per day. Every time Uber Drivers pick up a Uber passenger, the Uber-Ride is covered by the company’s $1 million commercial insurance policy, which is 4-times what taxis are required to have in Florida. Yet Broward wants part-time drivers to carry personal insurance that matches what’s required of cab and limo drivers.

🚖 {Absurd, an obvious conflict of interest comes to bear on any County Commissioners that have taken contributions from the TAXI Cab owners including Gaddis}.

🚖 UBER Rider App and the UBER Driver App, Sounds Simple, however, the UBER systems that support these Apps are extremely sophisticated and revolutionary. The Apps were created by Uber Technologies, a/k/a UBER.

🚖 UBER Rider App. The Uber App may be downloaded from Apple’s App Store free for everyone. When the UBER App is launched you’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver that the Uber System has determined to be closest to you. GPS pinpoints you ad the Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Displayed on the Uber Rider’s iPhone is the Uber Driver’s Car, Color, TAG number, the Driver’s picture. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

UBER App has a companion Watch App, which permits the Uber Rider to request a Driver directly from one’s Watch. Marilyn and I decided to go out to the Waterstone Resort Hotel for Happy Hour which is about a 2 mile trip from our Royal Palm apartment. So instead of driving our own Car, we summoned a Uber Driver using my Watch Uber App. The ride is about $4 each way; however, we save the $8 Valet and Tip cost, and the aggravation of getting our Car from the Garage. The Uber Drivers are terrific with modern, late-model, clean Cars.

UBER Local Statistics. Uber launched their system in south Florida June, 2014, and August for Broward and Palm Beach Counties. Over the represented 11 to 12 month period, Uber has logged over 1,000,000 safe Rides in Broward County. Miami-Dade county Drivers have delivered over 1,300,000 safe Rides and Palm Beach county has delivered 900,000 safe Rides. For the three south Florida Counties, the total safe rides equates to roughly (by data extrapolation) 3.3 Million Safe Rides in slightly less than 12 months, or 300,000 Rides per Month, or 10,000 Safe Rides every Day.

UBER Driver App is downloadable only to Approved Uber Drivers’ iPhones or Android device. Once the Uber Driver downloads the App, Drivers open the App, the UBER Driver-Partner system, for your first time use, directs you to Verify your Account, by providing the Driver’s ID and Password, the first time only, thereafter the Login is automated, when the App is launched.

Uber Partner App is specially designed only for UBER DRIVERS, not Uber Riders. The Uber Partner App is available by “Invitation Only” from the UBER’s Corporate site upon “approval.” This App is not available on Apple’s App store. This article is written from the perspective of the UBER Partner Driver.

UBER Driver Applicant passed: Screening, Background Checks, Auto Insurance verification, Clear Driving Record, Review of the Auto Registration, Uber’s approval of the Driver’s Vehicle ASE certification… When Uber verifies and approves the documentation, UBER issues a TEXT message directly to the Uber Driver’s iPhone, providing a Link to download the UBER PATNER App directly from UBER’s Corporate offices in California.

Uber Partner App. Once the UBER PARTNER Driver opens the App, UBER’s system requests the Driver to GO ONLINE. By a simple TAP on the blue GO ONLINE bar, the UBER System locates the Uber Driver, and the Uber Driver is displayed as an Available Car that UBER Riders will be able to visualize on their UBER App, within a several mile circle around the Uber Rider looking for a Ride. If the Uber Driver is within several minutes of arrival to the Requesting Rider, the Closest Uber Driver is Notified of the rider’s hail.

Uber Driver App and Uber Rider App. The Uber Driver is hailed on his Driver App, the system makes a Request for the Driver to Accept the Rider’s request. If the Driver does not accept the rider’s hail in 60 seconds, the system looks for the next closest Uber Driver. Once a Driver accepts the rider’s request, the Rider can Visually see the Uber Driver’s map location, and tracks the driver’s route to the Rider using the iPhone’s GPS capability. As the Uber Driver arrives at the Rider’s location, the Uber Driver Taps the ARRIVED button on his App.

A notification is sent to the Rider, stating that the Driver has Arrived. Once the Uber Rider is identified by name and confirmed, the Uber Driver Taps a Button “Commence Ride to Destination.” Typically the Rider initially inputs the destination for the Ride. The Uber Driver’s App gives the Driver turn-by-turn directions to locate the Rider; Once the Ride begins, the Driver App gives turn-by-turn directions to the Driver, to the Rider’s Destination.

Uber Technologies Inc. is an American international transportation network company headquartered in San Francisco, California. It develops, markets and operates the Uber mobile app, which allows consumers with smartphones to submit a Ride request which is then routed to carefully screened and background checked Uber Drivers who use their own Cars that are annually Safety Inspected, with proper Insurance coverage. As of May 28, 2015, the service was available in 58 countries and 300 cities worldwide.

Safety is a top priority at Uber, which is why every driver-partner in Florida must undergo stringent local, state and federal background checks and every single trip is covered by a $1M commercial insurance policy, four times what taxis are required to have in the state of Florida

UberX Driver’s Gross Compensation Average $1.55/mile, however, net about $1.25/mile, as Uber’s share is 20% of the Driver’s gross. On average for short Rides of 4 to 10 miles the Rider is charged about $2/mile for the Ride. The Uber Driver receives 80% of $2/mile or $1.60/mile driven. For longer destinations of 25 to 50 miles the Rider pays roughly $1.20/mile. UberXL Drivers earn roughly twice that of UberX. See Fee Charts for details.

UberX Driver’s Net-Net $1.00/mile including Fuel Cost, but no maintenance costs are accounted for. Detailing my particular scenario, my Honda Crosstour consumes roughly 15¢/mile for Fuel only. Since we already own the Car in Warranty, Insurance, Licenses, and giving no deductions for Tires, Wear and Tear, if I net from Uber $1.25/mile and my fuel cost is 15¢/mile, then we’re receiving about $1.10/mile net of Fuel cost; lets round down another 10¢/mile for down-time, to $1.00/mile. Simple, Drive 125 miles/Day (assume 5-hour Driving Day) and earn supplemental income of $125/Day, not accounting for Auto Maintenance or Tires.

Personal Opinion. If you already own a late model UberX qualified car, and want to earn some supplemental income, using your spare time to be a Uber Driver to earn some extra Cash, UBER may be something to consider. However, to buy or lease a vehicle, obtain insurance, maintenance, license tags, etc, Earning $1.00/mile makes no sense whatsoever, IMHO.

UBER Partner App. If you want to GO ONLINE as a Uber Driver AVAILABLE to be Hailed by a requesting Rider, DRIVERS simply open the App, TAP onto the blue GO ONLINE Bar, then the System confirms your Location, and the Driver is Live and OnLine for all potential Uber App Riders to “see.” The beautiful part of the Uber System is the requesting Rider waits only several minutes for an available Uber Driver.

Uber Busy times are from 7am to 11am, and 4pm to 7pm in the evening, plus 9pm to 11:30pm on weekends.

UberX is an inexpensive Ride. The cost of the Ride is automated by the UBER System, and is determined by the type of CAR, the Miles Driven, and the Time of the Trip, and Tolls if any. Everything about the RIDE transaction is Automated, including your Payment when you Arrive at your destination. No Cash needed, except if you want to TIP the Driver, which is not necessary, however appreciated.

Uber, upon arrival at your destination your UBER Private Driver, with his iPhone Uber Partner App, slides the ARRIVAL button to the Right, indicating the trip is complete, the FARE is Computed and displayed the RIDER’s iPhone. The Uber Rider confirms the Charge, selects Five Stars ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️ {hopefully} and the Rider, is Good to exit the Car, collecting their possessions, luggage, etc. The Driver should make sure all the Rider’s possessions are collected before departing.

Uber Experiences. The Uber Ride is really surprisingly nice. The Uber Partner’s Cars are super clean, odor free, late-model fully inspected vehicles, plus the Uber Drivers are motivated to give great service, as there is a ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️, 5-Star rating offered by the Passengers when they Pay; and similarly a 5-Star rating by the Uber-Driver is awarded to the Passenger.

Personally, I was surprised with the quality of the Uber Passengers, FAU students, Private School Students, Folks traveling to Italy needing a Ride to the Airport, Apartment dwellers in the City of Boca Raton, riding to Publix to grocery shop, a Housewife whose Car is at Service needing a Ride home because of a 2-Day repair, a Restaurant manager Riding home for a mid-day nap between shifts, a disabled businessman needing a ride to a Client’s office…

Uber Rides are roughly 25% to 30% less expensive than a typical TAXI Commercial services, plus the Uber RIDE arrives for the pickup within 2 to 5 minutes, where a TAXI may arrive in 20 to 25 minutes, or not arrive at all. These estimates were offered by my Uber Riders when I “interviewed” each for this article.

UBER’s system is a very efficient and provides an easy method to connect to Your own Personal Driver, hailing a Ride, and payment in a CASH-less environment with your Credit Card. Tipping is not required, however, Uber Drivers may accept cash tips.

UBER cities. There are hundreds of Uber Cities that provides this service. If you’re looking for, and need a private driver, you can find one with the UBER App. The Uber App will locate and request a Uber Driver as well as let the Uber Driver know exactly where you are located to pick you up.

Uber Riders. You’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

Uber Riders will be emailed a detailed receipts, plus Riders and Drivers will each be able to view their history in their respective Apps.

Uber Riders. When it comes to requesting a Uber RIDE you may choose from three Cars: uberX (standard 4-door sedan), uberXL (6-seat SUV), and uber SELECT (high value Cars such as Mercedes, BMW or LEXUS). You’ll be able to view a Fare-Estimate, and if you received a “Promotion” Code, you may enter it. Uber Drivers register their Car[s], and based on the Vehicle ID Number, UBER determines whether your is uberX, uberXL or uberSELECT.

Uber App. We’ve found UBER system to be very simple and easy-to-navigate App. The App gives you all the details you need about hailing for the Ride, actually seeing your Uber Driver as he/she travels to your Location, and walks you through the entire process keeping you in the loop until you Arrive and 5-Star your Driver.

UBER Driver Background Checks. Every UBER Driver in the USA is thoroughly screened and background investigated with a multi-step process that includes County, State, Federal, and multi-State Criminal Background checks, that reach back in date, as far as the Driver’s State Law allows, plus ongoing review of the Uber Drivers’ motor vehicle records throughout the UBER Driver’s time driving as a “Uber Partner.” In south Florida, Palm Beach County for example, requires that UBER Driver’s automobiles are Checked annually with a comprehensive 33-point inspection performed by an ASE Certified Technician.

UBER Driver. In effort to verify the facts in this article, I became a Uber Driver, submitted my personal information for UBER’s thorough background investigations that required about three weeks to complete. I also submitted my HONDA automobile inspected by a Certified ASE automotive mechanic, required annually, evidence of Automobile Insurance, a copy of the Vehicle’s Registration.

Riders should be impressed and comforted with the thoroughness of UBER’s investigative process for their Drivers. Uber Driver candidates may check a BOX that on the Investigative Reporting forms, such that the candidate receives all the investigative reporting results, that is discovered in the Public Records and the Criminal Background Checks. Roughly weekly for three weeks, I received email updates on UBER’s investigative process.

As a UBER Driver, giving a number of rides in south Florida, I had many conversations with the Riders, asking them if they liked the UBER experience, the time required for the Uber Driver to arrive, did they like the Drivers, did they like the Cars, the Price of the Ride, etc. In sum, all those that I’ve “interviewed” were thoroughly pleased with the entire UBER Experience, and were impressed with the Clean Cars, and the excellent Uber Drivers. BTW, the Washington Post conducted an extensive survey recently and determined that nearly 50% of the UBER Drivers have College Degrees.

UBER. Make good money driving as a Uber Partner, you may love it like the other 200,000 Uber Drivers world-wide. Get details with this link: https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue When you click onto this link, the image below is a copy of the Uber Form to begin your Enrollment process.

UBER Riders should be comforted with the extensive effort UBER employs to screen all their UBER Driver Partners initially and on an ongoing basis.

UBER has 162,037 Active Drivers in the US. The Washington Post completed an analysis that revealed in January, 2015 that the size of Uber’s Driver pool in the United States and the rapid rate at which it’s expanding, accounted for 162,037 Active Drivers that completed at least four or more trips for the service as of December, 2014. The number of new Uber drivers signing up has doubled every six months for the past two years.

Uber has grown into a tech giant valued by investors at more than $40 billion, and has become something of an economic Rorschach test. Some see in it the hopeful future of work in a digital age, where almost anyone with a car with a clear-background check, (or a home, or a service to offer) can be his own boss, choosing hours and determining income with a flexibility that makes other pursuits — like raising children or going back to school — more feasible.

Make great money driving with Uber, you may love it too. Get details with this link:

https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue

UBER App is compatible: iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, iPhone 4S, iPhone 5, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPod touch (3rd generation and above), all iPads using iOS 5.0 through iOS 8.4



Pleased you’re reading, with about 88,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

⌚️🍎⌚️ Fantastical Calendar Integrates to Watch • Best Calendar Period ⌚️⌚️🍎⌚️⌚️

1433377354.jpg

Fantastical’s developer Flexibits has been teasing everyone about the arrival of an Apple Watch application for its highly popular Fantastical 2 Calendar App (a better alternate to Apple’s calendar) for all iOS and Mac OS X users. That App update has Now Arrived.

Coming soon to a Wrist Near You. In a new Web page that the application developers posted up on last Friday, Flexibits, the APP Developer, says that Fantastical 2 is “coming soon to a wrist near you” and allows you to sign up with your e-mail when the application is ready and hit the public Today.

Fantastical 2 screenshots for the Apple Watch looks great. It takes what you would normally see on your iPhone and packs it down into a beautifully compact Apple Watch view without any clutter or extraneous information.

Download Fantastical 2 from the App Store right now for the Apple Watch release; you can head over to this App Store link to download it for $4.99. It will be a free upgrade if you already own the Fantastical 2 application for iOS. IMHO, its worth every penny of this modest price. As an Apple Watch user, the Fantastical display is quite Fantastic.

Fantastical is the Best Calendar App for Booking Appointments, Reminders, Day Ticker. We have this App on our iPhones, because it is very simple to use, and more intuitive when needing to book an appointment or a reminder quickly. However, fear not, this is a Full Featured App, with all the “Bells and Whistles.” I particularly like this App as it is User Friendly and the Display Design and the White Lettering on a Black Background.

Fantastical is the fastest and friendliest calendar App, Period! Just type in “Lunch with John in Cupertino on Friday” and Fantastical will schedule it.

Your iPhone 4, 5, or 6 supports dictation ✔️ you can also “speak the details” for your event and Fantastical will handle the rest. Best of all, the beautiful interface makes using your calendar really easy.

🍎Watch has Pulse Oximetry • Blood Oxygen Saturation • Plethysmographic Monitoring 🍎⌚️🍎⌚️🍎

Watch monitors the calories you burn and measures your heart rate readings obtained from the Watch sensors located in the ceramic underside of the Watch.

Watch is Capable of Monitoring your Blood Oxygen Saturation Levels, and Pulse Strength using Plethysmography, Pulse Oximerty.

Plethysmography is a technology clinicians use to provide accurate estimates of your heart rate. More precise measurements about your body’s physiology, may come soon as Apple enables existing Watch hardware sensors and software algorithms, capable of measuring the 3 factors in real-time.

Presently, Watch provides accurate measurement of your Pulse Rate in real-time. Once the FDA permits Apple to use its technology 2 additional circulatory system measurements may be taken by your Watch.

(A) Pulse Rate measured in Beats per Minute
(B) Blood-Oxygen Saturation percent {SpO2} of arterial blood flow, and
(C) Perfusion Index {PI} indicates arterial pulse strength.

We have identified that Watch presently contains all the onboard, internal sensors capable of detecting your heart-rate and your blood-oxygen saturation, plus your arterial pulse strength. Apple’s heart rate monitor actually employs a plethysmographic technique, which functions as a pulse oximeter. However, presently Watch (although capable of measuring SpO2, blood oxygen saturation level and PI, Perfusion Index which indicates arterial pulse strength) are not delivering this information, as Apple awaits FDA approval for this added capability.

Watch was launched on April 24. Apparently the FDA had not yet approved Blood-Oxygen Saturation measurement and Perfusion Index indicates arterial pulse strength capability. FDA reviews “medical devices” where Apple has made application some time ago. It is expected that the FDA should provide its approval in a relatively short time frame, because Apple is claiming that its Watch is not a medical device. That’s government-speak for “no one really knows when FDA approval may arrive.”

Assuming that FDA approval is eminent, these additional capabilities will provide Watch users a higher degree of measuring one’s biometric physiology, recording this data when the user is exercising, when out and about during one’s day, or when at rest. These added capabilities would be unique for any personal, everyday wearable smartwatch.

Imagine the usefulness of these expanded capabilities, delivering information to individuals wearing the Watch that are involved with jogging, track and field events, soccer, exercising in the gymnasium, marathon events and training. However, having continuous real-time blood oxygen saturation and arterial pulse strength monitoring would be very helpful also for individuals that, for example, are Cardiac or Surgery out-patients.

The last time you, a family member, or a friend were in a Hospital Emergency room due to an accident or medical condition, a nurse clipped a device called a pulse oximeter onto one of the patient’s fingers. This small wired electronic device detects both your pulse and blood-oxygen saturation level. This finger mounted device houses a pair of LEDs and photo-sensors; this information (and other biometrics are displayed on a Color LCD display used by the medical staff to monitor these factors.

Theory of the pulse oximeter. Pulse Oximetrics rely on the principle that hemoglobin (in your blood) absorbs Green and Infrared light differently, based on your blood oxygenation level and the flow of blood in your capillaries. By energizing the Green and Infrared light emitting diodes, the LEDs, onto one’s finger, the reflected Light is measured by the photo-sensors, making it possible to determine a person’s blood oxygen level and pulse rate using software algorithms to transform this data digitally in percent form.

Apple is mindful of the value of measuring and monitoring your Heart Rate and Blood-Oxygen Saturation, all the required sensors and software algorithms are already built into every Watch. Since the FDA has approved the pulse-rate capability the Watch OS software delivers this information to Watch users. However, as of the writing the FDA has not yet approved Blood-Oxygen monitor capability.

Until FDA approval is granted Apple has used a “software switch” to block the delivery of blood-oxygen monitoring. If and When the FDA provides its approval, then Apple can simply publish a Version Update of its Watch OS software, and viola, the Watch provides this added capability, with your existing Watch, and you don’t have to wait nor have to pay for a new Watch.

Blood Oxygen Saturation monitoring capability would be revolutionary for the Watch and for that matter the entire smartwatch industry. Only Apple would be so forward thinking, to have these hardware components and sensors already built into Watch’s initial release.

Apple is avidly interested in personal health and the use of Watch biometrics. Accordingly, Apple hired Michael O’Reilly, M.D. Dr. O’Reilly left his position in July 2013 to take on a significant role at Apple, apparently for its development of the Watch biometric monitoring.

Dr. O’Reilly was formerly the Chief Medical Officer and EVP of Medical Affairs at Masimo Corp. (www.masimo.com) Dr. O’Reilly and his team was responsible the company’s development of several pulse oximetry devices for the medical community. Dr. O’Reilly and his ream developed the iSpO2 Pulse Oximeter which device connects to the iPhone with a companion App. In addition to O’Reilly, Apple has hired a number of other professionals with expertise in pulse oximetry, vasculature visualization, vein location, non-invasive glucose monitoring, blood chemistry monitoring, heart rate and breath rate monitoring.

Watch needs to be paired, as most know with your Apple iPhone 5, 5S, 5C, 6 or 6 Plus, the compatible iPhones, currently over 400 million users of these models, and growing by over 20 million a month. Also don’t forget to update your iPhone’s iOS to 8.3 which installs the Apple Watch Configuration App onto your iPhone.

Watch has a built-in “Glance” that tells you about the state of charge of your Watch. Several of the built-in Watch Faces have a convenient icon that you can Tap which will show your heart-rate through Watch “Glances.”

Blood Oxygen Saturation and Pulse Rate provide important critical information regarding one’s circulatory system. Fingertip pulse oximeters are increasingly being purchased for personal use. This technology is available with Measure-through Motion and Low Perfusion pulse oximetry, the same technology used on over 100 million patients a year in leading hospitals worldwide.

Watch’s pulse oximeter is providing accurate measurements that out-patients can rely on this technology; However, the Watch does not claim to be a “Medical Device” according to FDA standards. The information is collected from one’s wrist in a similar way finger clip-on sensors measure pulse oximetry. Fingertip pulse oximetry provides accurate blood oxygen saturation and pulse rate measurements as will the Watch, soon to display three data-streams, providing (1) oxygen saturation (SpO2), (2) pulse rate (PR) measured in beats per minute, and (3) perfusion index (PI) which measures the arterial pulse intensity.

7

Paradox with this App is the Watch already has a Battery Glance installed on your Watch by default. To visualize the state-of-charge of your Watch, simply “swipe up” on your Watch-face and your first Glance appears on the watch face. If you’ve looked at a Glance perviously, when swiping up, the Watch will display the last Glance you viewed of the 20 available glances. To view another Glance simply swipe left or right to see another Glance. So what does this App do… it displays the state-of-charge of your paired iPhone.

Watch, once out and about, lets say you generally keep your iPhone in your pocket, purse, briefcase, on your credenza or desk at the office. The Watch is taking advantage of all of the unique capabilities of your iPhone’s processing power, GPS, Gyroscope, its sensors and the M8 motion chip. Accordingly, you may lose track of how long you have until the LiON battery in your iPhone runs Low, assuming its not plugged in.

Watch Battery Monitor is a unique App that will provide to you a remote look at the remaining battery-life of your iPhone, by looking at a new “Glance” displayed on your Watch. The App will show the iPhone’s state-of-charge, and if it is actually charging, or not. The Watch already has a Battery Glance which is pre-loaded into your new Watch which displays the battery level of the Watch. This App loads another Battery Monitor Glance, that displays the battery level of your paired iPhone.

 Battery Monitor is a new App for the Apple Watch created by Tom Etminan, who is a finance professional with experience trading and risk managing a broad range of derivatives products in an Investment Bank and Hedge Fund environment. This App is Tom’s first App Store available App, a really nice App for someone’s first App.

 Battery Monitor App will display your iPhone’s battery-life, once this Battery Monitor is enabled in the Watch Glances menu. To set this up, Firstly, install the Battery Monitor App onto your iPhone; then go to the Apple Watch App on your iPhone using the Apple Watch App, tap onto My Watch > Glances > add Battery Monitor, then, look down to the bottom part of the list of all the GREEN Glances, and you will find the “Battery Monitor” Glance.

 Remember, only 20 glances are permitted for display on your Watch; so if you already have chosen 20 Glances, the RED Glances at the top of the list, move one of the RED Glances by tapping onto the RED negative sign, choosing a Glance you do not use often. When you delete one of the RED Glances it auto-moves this Glance to the lower GREEN List of Glances for future use. Then Move {slide up} the Battery Monitor Glance UP into the top portion of the RED Glances. All of the RED Glances are those Glances that you will be able to visualize on your Watch. I placed this “Battery Monitor” Glance next to the existing Battery Glance, so they are close together. I made a screen-image of my iPhone showing how I have arranged some of my Glances.

 When we first got the Watch we were looking at the remaining battery life of the Watch frequently at first as Apple said the Watch will last 18 hours or so. After a few days you’ll not be so paranoid about battery-life. In my case, with fairly significant usage of the Watch notifications and other features of the Watch, I have yet to have any Watch battery-life concerns.

 Personally, I get up in the morning at 6am and put on my Watch by 6:30am, and am done with my day by about 11:30pm or so. Then I place the Watch onto my TwelveSouth charging stand, which is displayed below. When doing so, the Watch shows its state-of-charge and provides the Watch Green Ring showing generally about 30% remaining-battery-life plus a green lightning-bolt icon, confirming that the Watch is properly seated on the magnetic-disk, and is in fact Charging.

 For my 18+ hour day, I am using on average roughly 70% of the Watch’s battery; sometimes I’ll have a higher level of remaining battery-life, perhaps 40%. Therefore, when Apple stated that its Watch has sufficient battery-life for a full-days’s activities, I have confirmed this by my usage for the last 3 weeks of actual Watch usage. As an avid product-reviewer, I am taking full advantage of most of the Watch functions, its notification capabilities, exercising monitoring, etc.

 In sum, Marilyn and I are totally satisfied with our Watches, and its convenience for what’s going on communications-wise, and of course knowing the time of day… after all the Watch is a “watch” too.

 My guess, the Watch will be a huge success for Apple and for many iPhone users, likely many more iPhone users than the critics currently predict. I have discussed Apple iPhone 6 and Watch sales with Apple retail associates. They tell me that there are a large number of Switchers” from Android, so they can use the Watch. So these folks are buying a new iPhone 6 and an Watch. Tim Cook, Apple’s CEO predicted this months ago. Recall, the Critics said that Apple had no chance of success for the iPhone in 2007, nor the iPad in 2010, years later Apple has sold over 700,000,000 iPhones and iPads, with a Satisfaction Ratings of +99%, unheard of in the Consumer Technology-Products category. Once more with the Watch, Apple again has “re-invented” the traditional “Watch” which has been around since the 16th Century.

 Battery Monitor App. This App will display to you the State-of-Charge of your iPhone’s battery and provides an easy to read display of the iPhone’s Battery-Life {Percent} Remaining. The Battery Monitor will also display to you when the Battery is 100% charged, or other real-time battery-life-remaining percentage, and if the iPhone is Charging.

 The animated-ring display-style employed by this App uses different colors depending on how much battery-life remains, giving you the information you need with a quick “Glance,” that’s precisely why Apple chose to name these nifty tid-bits of information GLANCES.

 Presently, the Battery Monitor App is a free download from Apple’s App Store. However, the developer mentions in the App description that he will be adding new features to this App in the near future, which may be accompanied by price hike for the App.

 This iPhone BATTERY MONITOR App is an example of the creativity of Apple’s independent developer network, demonstrating their ability of Designing and Delivering unique Apps for all Watch users.

 Apple reports that there are currently {May, 2015} over 4,500 Watch Apps. Personally I think this iPhone “Battery Monitor” is a terrific utility, since the Watch and my iPhone are “paired” for every-day use.

Watch, Easy Set-Up Guide and Helpful Use Tips for Watch. As Apple is currently delivering the Watch globally, this article will give new and potential Watch owners and early adopters our First Impressions, helpful use tips for its set-up and pairing with your iPhone, configuration settings.

Speaking from experience, Marilyn and I ordered Watches, on-line using the Apple Store App. Marilyn chose the 38mm Stainless Steel Watch paired with the Milanese band. I chose the 38mm Stainless Steel Watch with the Link Bracelet. Apple designed the Watch so that regular folks are able to remove and change Watch bands, without any tools or special talents.


Watch was Engineered to facilitate users buying several watch-band colors and types to suit a particular occasion, season, activity, or mood, effortlessly. No miniature tools, screwdrivers, and no special talent needed. Marilyn received her Watch on April 28th, my Watch arrived May 15th, shipping on the date promised on the pre-order. Our pre-order was placed on-line 5am on April 10.

Watch Background. Given the Apple brand has an unmatched consumer base, we think Apple’s wearables category is their “silver bullet” product, that will start to move consumers toward this new avenue of technology growth, and drive adoption of the Watch. Management indicated recently that current demand is exceeding supply, and Apple is ramping up to meet demand. We think Apple has a massive opportunity with this new technology, that will open up many doors for enterprises looking to create applications, services, and solutions around the Watch market with Apple commanding a very strong lead in this niche market, currently niche, soon to be main-stream. When in the Apple Store, I interviewed some of the sales associates who indicated that customers were switching to the iPhone 6, so that they could buy the Watch and pair them.

Watch Impressions – Packaging. Apple learned long ago that “Packaging” is critical in creating a “First Impression.” The Watch packaging takes this notion to an even higher level. Firstly, the Shipping Carton and the two shock-resistant separators are carefully engineered to house the Watch product Box. I interviewed the UPS driver who was delivering thousands of Watch boxes last week who said there were many enthusiastic Watch buyers awaiting their delivery, self included.

Watch Impressions – The Watch Case. The carton and its two inserts precisely protect the product box. The product Box is pure white, and built with a heavy-weight polished cardboard, thicker and more sturdy than any other Apple product box I’ve seen to date. Lift Out the product box, at 5.5″ top and bottom, by 3.75″ tall. Inside this box is a beautifully crafted 4mm thick-walled, pure-white poly-carbonate Watch-Case with 1/4″ rounded edges and corners, with a relief Apple Logo impressed on its lid.

The Watch Product Box and the Watch-Case Box are machined to such tolerances, a vacuum is created when lifting the lids. Remove another layer of cellophane, lift up the heavy gauge synthetic lid, and the Watch simply rests in its middle, worn on “C” shaped insert. Underneath this impressive Watch-Case, the bottom of the product box contains an induction-charging cable, charger, and brief pictorial instruction pamphlet. Everything about the packaging has been engineered with precision. Its so impressive I had to spent a few moments telling you about the Boxes.

When meeting People for the first time, or when presented a new Product…

You Never get a Second Chance at making a First Impression, and Apple knows it.

Watch Impressions – The Watch. Marilyn and I visited our local Apple retail store for their “Try-On Reservations” that we booked for noon Sunday on April 12. The Apple staff was well trained and very helpful, as they placed each Watch and Band that we were interested in, in our case: The Stainless Watch with the Black Sports Band, the Stainless Milanese Band, the Modern Leather Buckle, and the Stainless Link Bracelet.

Watch Try-On at the Apple Store was about a 20 minute adventure. These try-ons were used to confirm the selections we made on-line, actually 2 Days before on April 10th. We then moved over to the stand-up counters on the store’s perimeter, where we played with the Watch models, to get used to the digital-crown, the side button, the settings, watch-face selections, and the ease to personalize the watch-faces with content and colors for the numerals, second hand, etc. A valuable experience.

Watch Impressions – Our Watches. Admittedly, after unpacking each Watch at home, “in the flesh” the Watch is even more impressive than we imagined at the Apple Store. Both watches arrived with their battery 90% charged, so we moved directly to the Set-up procedure, which is another Watch miracle.

The pairing process is simple and almost entirely automated. Simply start the Watch, after a few Q&A’s then a circular display shows on the Watch-face, you then awaken your iPhone 5, 5C, 5S, 6 or 6 Plus, and use the iPhone Camera to focus onto the illuminated Watch-face (an automated caption signals you to image the Watch-face) and within a few seconds the devices are paired for bluetooth and your home WiFi. Then the Watch set-up enters an automated synchronization of your compatible iPhone-Watch Apps that you’d like on your Watch, you can choose which Apps you’d like. Don’t select all, be selective. The entire process takes about 10 minutes.

Watch – One more Set-Up thing. Once the automated setup is completed, return to your iPhone and launch the App named Apple Watch. At the menu Tap onto Notifications, and examine each line-item, like Activity, Calendar, Mail, Maps, Messages… and make selections that you want to appear on your Watch.

Watch eMail, if you use the iPhone’s VIP eMail, then only your VIP email messages will come to the Watch, rather than every email. I have 12 email accounts on my iPhone 6 Plus, and have carefully indicated which email-contacts are VIP. Of my 3,176 contacts, likely 200 have been chosen to be VIP, where only these very important Contact emails will Notify me on my Watch.

If you are not utilizing Apple’s VIP capability, this is a terrific time to choose your VIP eMail Contacts. this is a simple process and does not change the email arrangements in your iPhone, the VIP method only limits the emails that are transferred to your Watch. Tinker with it, and if you have difficulties, call Apple Help or make a Genius-Bar appointment at your local Apple Store.

Watch – iPhone VIP eMail. With the Watch we only want the important “Notifications” showing on the Watch. Utilizing your iPhone and iPad VIP mail box is the perfect tool so that All your eMail does NOT show up on your Watch, just the VIP email. Notice on the APP screen-images, check “Custom” rather than “Mirror my iPhone.”

Watch Recommendation, Check ✔️mark only the eMail accounts that you desire notification onto your Watch, and ✔️mark the VIP line-item. We have heard from many Watch users, complaining that they receive too many notification on their Watch. eMail and SMS Text Messaging are usually the culprits; therefore, take a few moments to be more specific with your Watch notifications, rather than having all the Notifications “Mirroring your iPhone.”

Watch, with each Article that’s published, I like to include some additional information about the Watch, as this new Apple product is extraordinary. Personally, we fully appreciate the new Watch commercials {clip #1}… the Sounds, the Animation, the Colors, the Beat… having seen these clips a few times… Goose-Bumps for sure, take a look for yourself. If you don’t get at least ONE Goosey watching the first-clip, you may want to consider some therapy. Have a great DAY

A) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/#film-welcome
B) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/?cid=rise&#film-rise
C) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/?cid=up&#film-up
D) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/?cid=us&#film-us
E) https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-siri
F) https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-music
G) https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-welcome
H) https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-phone-calls
J) https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-messages
K) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/?cid=steel&#film-steel
L) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/?cid=aluminum&#film-aluminum
M) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/?cid=gold&#film-gold
N) https://www.apple.com/watch/films/

Watch User Guide. The link below will take you directly to the Watch User Guide housed on Apple.com’s website.

https://manuals.info.apple.com/MANUALS/1000/MA1708/en_US/apple_watch_user_guide.pdf

Watch User Guide. The link above will take you directly to the Watch User Guide housed on Apple.com’s website.

Quick Summary. The entire “Pairing” process takes less than 10 minutes, plus 5 minutes to remind ourselves how easy it is to use and set-up. Visiting our local Apple Store several weeks ago was very helpful, as it prepared both of us for this new wearable device and its controls.

In preparation of this article, I knew that detailed step-by-step dialogs would not be necessary. As we were getting Marilyn’s Watch up and running, the process was actually effortless; therefore this article was easy to deliver to you, and had extra time for some Use Tips and Suggestions, so Relax and Enjoy.

The beauty of the Watch and its Operating System, is its simplicity, and its intuitive operation. Watch is very easy to Set-up, the Syncing is automated, and Customization is intuitive and easy to perform. As a seasoned “gadget guy” there is nothing more annoying than receiving a revolutionary product, that has been released with complicated or untested instructions, or where the instructions are the result of a terrible translation, with critical errors that frustrate the use of a new product.

Watch set up and personalizing the features for you is effortless yet comprehensive. To get things going fast you can use the Watch default settings, then optimize later once you become more comfortable with everything.

It quickly became obvious that Apple’s team designed a flawless, practiced, automated Watch set-up process. Everything about the Watch is top quality. Even the Packaging of the Watch is outstanding, as it rests inside a heavy-weight white polycarbonate Jewelry Box, is impressive too, all of which gives an excellent first impression, as we opened it and removed the contents.

Watch being a technology product, we purchased AppleCare+ which increases the Warranty period to 2 years, and importantly adds Accident Coverage in the event you drop it, break it, you youngster throws it out the window…, any cause that is not covered by the warranty, except loosing it.

Watch is IPX7 Water Resistant. Dropping it into the the dirty dish-water, bath tub, or shower, will not damage the Watch. However, with AppleCare+ you must return the Watch to an Apple Store or Apple Service Center, to receive coverage, repair, or replacement, even if you bring your Watch back to Apple in a zip-lock bag crushed in pieces. Currently AppleCare+ provides 2 Years of coverage, and is priced at a $69 premium.

Watch Order Status: Surprise, the Apple Store changed Marilyn’s Order Status on April 27th from “Processing Items” to “Preparing for Shipment,” several hours later, Marilyn’s credit card was charged $687.94 for the Watch, the band, and FL sales tax. The $69 AppleCare+ premium was charged to her credit card on April 12th.

Watch Preparation #1. In preparation for delivery of the Watch, we updated both our iPhone 6 Plus to iOS 8.3 as this version includes the Watch Pairing APP which links your new Watch to your iPhone. The Watch is compatible and may be paired with iPhone 5, 5S, 5C, 6, and 6 Plus. Earlier versions of iPhone 4S, 4, 3GS, etc are not compatible with the Watch and will not “Pair.”

Watch Preparation #2. While you are updating your iPhone to iOS 8.3 begin unpacking the Watch and the Charging cable, plug it in and Charge the Watch.

Watch Preparation #3. Launch the AppleWatch APP. This App was automatically installed on your iPhone’s Home Screen as part of the iOS 8.3 update.

Watch Side-Button is located on the side of the case next to the Digital-Crown, that serves as the equivalent of the Power on/off button at the top of an iPhone 5, or the right-side of the iPhone 6, opposite the Volume buttons. Watch arrived fully charged and in sleep mode; press and hold the Side Button to wake it up, and you will see the Apple logo for several moments, before the Watch interface starts.

Watch should arrive charged, in our case it was 100% charged. Watch charging works via wireless induction. The charger is a small white circular Disk, a bit larger in size than three 25¢ coins; plug the USB cord it in, and then the charger body into your A/C Power line, then mate the back of the Watch with magnetic-charging Disk.

As the Magnetic Charging-Disk is placed on the back of the Watch an icon appears on the Watch-display that reads “Charging” the message will soon disappear, and a “lightning-bolt” icon remains displayed at the top of the Watch-display, indicating that the Watch is charging; However, our Watch arrived fully charged.

Watch Set Up and Pair with your iPhone. The rest of the setup requires the iPhone you plan to use with the Apple Watch. Start up the Watch App on your iPhone and you’ll be prompted to turn-on Bluetooth if you haven’t already done so.

Next, the Watch App will prompt you to line up the display-screen of the Watch with your iPhone’s Camera as directed. You’ll notice that the Watch automatically detects the presence of your iPhone readying both for pairing; the Watch then displays an attractive circular image, that represents your Watch-codes that the iPhone camera scans, loading proprietary Coding that creates secure-paring sequences, so that you don’t have to enter any digits or coding.

Set Up Options and Preferences. Firstly, you are to follow the Watch App preference requests, as to whether you’re going to wear the Watch on your left or right wrist. Then you’ll be asked to enter your Apple ID password that you also use on your iPhone. The balance of the preferences are shown to you, for your personalized use of the Watch, and the notifications that you desire to be linked with your iPhone.

Watch Telephone Calls. Just for fun, once we completed the initial Watch setup, BTW, she selected the Mickey-Mouse watch-face… Marilyn called my iPhone using her Watch. I dashed into our library, 100 feet away, to answer her telephone call… to my surprise her voice quality was excellent. She did not hold her Watch closer to her mouth for the Call.

If I didn’t know better, I would have believed she called using her iPhone. When Marilyn was listening to me speak, the Watch delivered very clear Audio; however, the Watch’s miniature speaker is effective, but likely an issue in a noisy location. She held the Watch about 14″ away, a comfortable distance as if she was looking at the Watch-face checking the time. Bottom line, if you answer a Telephone Call using your Watch, the caller will receive excellent voice clarity from your Watch.

Watch Initial Observation 1. Marilyn reports from her office that having her iPhone 6+ on her credenza, and “floating around” her Banking Center, her Watch remained continuously synced with her iPhone; however, the iPhone battery may experience additional demand.

Watch Initial Observation 2.In her first day in her office, iPhone battery drain was higher than usual; However, in Day-Two and Day-Three, there was no apparent significant iPhone battery drain. My conclusion, is Marilyn’s iPhone may have had several Apps open on her iPhone in Day-One that was constantly “Refreshing Data” causing battery consumption.

Watch Initial Observation 3. Marilyn’s Watch after Three Days of use is functioning perfectly. Note, Marilyn took off her beautiful Lady-Cartier (that she has been wearing for 30 years) whose watch-case measures 24mm. Now she’s donned her new Watch with a Stainless Steel watch-case of 38mm, with the Milanese band. The Watch is quite a size and style change for Marilyn. She is also looking forward to adding several Colored Sports bands too. I’m delighted that in only 4 days, she has fully adopted the Watch with its subtle connectivity and the TAP… TAP… wrist notifications rather than constantly looking to her iPhone 6. There are several images that show the relative size of her 24mm Cartier watch compared to the 27mm Watch Charger Disk.

Suggestion, attach your iPhone to its Charger to maintain the iPhone’s battery, as you leave your iPhone at your desk or credenza, while you move around your office {or home}. The Watch Battery is functioning fine though; its the iPhone that may consume more power to maintain the Watch-iPhone connectivity. Otherwise, make sure your iPhone does not have too many “Data Refreshing Apps” open. Surely Apple will be optimizing the current iOS 8.3 operating system to address this excessive iPhone battery drain when its “linked” to the Watch.

OH one more thing Watch has earned a “Water Resistance Rating” of IPX7 under IEC Standard 60529 {International Electrotechnical Commission, is a non-profit, non-governmental international standards organization that creates and publishes International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies}.

Watch briefly, in addition to being something you’ll love to wear every day, the Watch is also water resistant, therefore you may wash your hands, take a shower while wearing it, or be out in the rain, and may be submerged in water 3 feet or 1 Meter in depth, as defined by the International Standard classification of IPX7 under IEC standard 60529.

Watch, the fine-print about its IPX7 rating reads: The device is splash and water resistant but not waterproof. This Water Resistance rating means, the Watch is capable of “ …withstanding incidental exposure to water of up to 1 meter in depth, for up to 30 minutes, for Indoor or outdoor use in the presence of rain, snow or brief splashes of water; However, any immersion in water greater than 1 meter in depth, regardless of duration of immersion, or any immersion of more than 30 minutes, regardless of depth of immersion exceeds the IPX7 Standard…” Below is a summary of the Water Resistance IPX7 rating as it relates to the Watch:

(A) Immersion of the Watch in Water deeper than 1 meter or 3 feet, for any length of time may render the Watch inoperable
(B) Immersion of the Watch in Water at 1 meter or 3 feet for more than 30 minutes may render the Watch inoperable
(C) Immersion of the Watch in Water at any depth for more than 30 minutes may render the Watch inoperable.

Watch News and Views. Recent News Reports indicate that the TAPTIC Engine, an internal component of the Watch is supplied by two Suppliers. However, one of Apple’s suppliers {China’s AAC Technologies} of the TAPTIC Engine, is not passing Apple’s stringent quality control standards. The Good news, Apple rarely depends on Only One Supplier for any of its component suppliers. A second Watch TAPTIC Engine supplier {Japan’s NIDEC Corp} is delivering this component complying with Apple’s strict quality standards.

The TAPTIC Engine issue may be a contributing cause for Watch shipping delays. Sources report that Apple has shifted almost all of this component’s production to Japan’s NIDEC Corp for the TAPTIC Engine. WS Journal WSJ.com has a complete report on this topic. The TAPTIC Engine is a electro-magnetic “Motor” component housed inside the Watch, that creates the TAP sensation onto your wrist, when messages and notifications arrive. {The TAP feels like someone tapped several times on your Watch-Face, which is different than the Buzz-Vibration notification one senses when their iPhone ringer is silenced}

Beyoncé has a thing for Exciting Accessories and her New Watch • Apple Delivers 1,244,000 Watches TODAY

Beyoncé is one celebrity who has a thing for Exciting Accessories in this case the Watch, as she was spotted wearing a solid 18 Karat Gold Apple Watch with a matching 18 Karat Gold Linked Bracelet. In case you just returned from a 7 month Vacation on Planet Neptune, the Watch is being Delivered in 9 Countries Today, April 24, 2015.

Apple Delivers 1,244,000 Watches in the US Today, April 24th. Watch deliveries are being received in 9 Countries commencing today.

Beyoncé and Watch recently was seen wearing a Magical Gold Linked Bracelet Watch at Coachella. However, this is not one of the Watch bracelets available currently from the Apple Store. Beyonce, posted a picture of herself wearing a Gold Watch Edition on her own website. Nothing that unusual, but the watch has an 18 Karat Gold Link Bracelet, which currently available to the public.

This Gold Bracelet not unique though, because fashion designer Karl Lagerfeld also has one, something we learned after his bodyguard posted a picture of his Watch on Instagram. The strap appears to be a gold version of the steel Link Bracelet, and is attached to the Yellow Gold Watch Edition.

This Gold Link Bracelet is not standard option with any of the Watch Edition models presently, as the only “Apple” Link Bracelet available today is of polished Stainless Steel or with a Space Black finish. We can not place a price on this exclusive Gold Link Bracelet edition; However, it’s price may be around $20,000 for the Gold Bracelet plus $10,000 for the Gold Watch Edition.

Elderly Draco Malfoy impersonator Karl Lagerfeld also had his Watch, with his wrist photographed clad in this mysterious gold link Apple Watch. These two celebrities, one likely upsettingly expensive Watch.

The caption on Lagerfeld’s wrist glamor shot, posted on Instagram by his ebullient assistant Sebastien Jondeau, the Post reads “1st apple watch specially made for KarL!! Amazing!!!”

Questions: (A) Is Apple fabricating a secret CELEBS ONLY Apple Watch? (B) Is Apple pairing with celebrities to promote the upcoming entry into the super-luxury Watch market? Answer: YES !

Apple is definitely jumping into the luxury fashion market with its high-end-expensive luxury Watch bands. These wearables are supposed to make you feel good. But as The Verge pointed out, it looks like Apple may be withholding some of its highest-end “experimental” designs from the general public presently.

The Apple Store does not currently advertise or sell a gold link bracelet, even if you’re buying the Watch Gold Edition, with a starting price of $10,000. In fact, across all Watch current configurations, Watch Edition can not be presently ordered with any metal bracelets in the box. The “classic” and “modern” leather bands that Apple sells feature clasps and buckles that, like the Edition itself, are crafted from 18-karat gold components.

Jony Ive showed-off some new Watch-Band designs in Milan, none of which looked like this opulent band; However, there were many colors and bands styles not currently in the Watch product lineup.

Watch • Let’s Take a Look Inside the Worlds Best SmartWatch 

BULLETIN: Latest News from APPLE regarding the 3 Million Watch Pre-Orders

“We’re happy to be updating many customer’s “Status” on their Apple-Store accounts today {April 21} with the news that their Watch will arrive sooner than expected,” Apple Officials said: “…Our team is working to fill orders as quickly as possible based on the available supply and the order in which they were received. We know many customers are facing long lead-times and we appreciate their patience…”

Watch • Let’s take a look inside the Worlds Best “SmartWatch” • Our estimate is, Apple sold 3.0 million Watch units on Launch Day, may have actually sold-out Apple’s entire stock of pre-release inventory within the first 3 hours of availability.

3 Million Watch unit sales was abstracted from Slice Intelligence’s report, a survey of 2,000,000-accounts pool of on-line electronic eReceipts. While this 3 million units is equivalent to the first 3-Day weekend sales of iPhone 4, Watch’s pre-sales dwarfs all other smartwatch sales, and represents a new milestone in wearable “smartwatch” sales.

Since Grade School, taking things apart to see how thing work is part of my DNA. These renderings, [rather than a disassembly] take us for a first-look inside the Watch. Post Release, iFixit will likely publish a step-by-step teardown of the Watch. These graphics are not captioned as the components are relatively easy to recognize.

Latest News from APPLE regarding Watch Pre-Orders “We’re happy to be updating many customers today {April 21) with the News that their Watch may arrive sooner than expected,” an Apple official spokesperson said: “Our team is working to fill orders as quickly as possible based on the available supply and the order in which they were received. We know many customers are still facing long lead times and we appreciate their patience.”

Watch, with each Article that is published, I like to include some new information about the Watch, as this new Apple product is extraordinary. Personally, we fully appreciate the new Watch commercials {clip #1}… the Sounds, the Animation, the Colors, the Beat… having seen all these clips many times… Goose-Bumps for sure, take a look for yourself. If you don’t get at least ONE Goosey watching the first-clip, you may want to consider some therapy.

Have a great DAY


https://www.apple.com/watch/films/#film-welcome
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-welcome
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-phone-calls
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-messages
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-siri
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-music
https://www.apple.com/watch/films/

Watch Sales are Built to Order • Watch Buyers Delivery Starts Friday April 24th 

Watch Launch is almost two weeks since it went Live on Friday April 10, 2015 at 3:01 AM Eastern. Watch Sales are likely to be Built-to-Order, as there are hundreds of Watch-Band Combinations.

Watch Buyer pre-orders on Friday April 10th, Deliveries commence Friday April 24th. Subsequent pre-sales shipped Daily thereafter as all Watch pre-sales are shipped. We expect that shipment have already commenced to assure Watches arrive at Customer front-doors Friday morning.

We believe the Watch initial production-run sold out quickly; However, we don’t know precisely how many Watch units were sold. A Financial Spreadsheet has been formulated, showing a financial model that suggests the initial production-run of 3.0 million Watch units, yielding Watch revenues of $2.2 billion for the April 10th pre-sale launch.

We estimate 3.0 million Watch finished Cases were in inventory on Launch Day. This figure was abstracted from investigative reporting from China who examined supply-line leaks regarding quantities of Watch displays, Sapphire Crystals, and S1 Electronics Chips. While this figure is equivalent to the first 3-Day weekend sales of iPhone 4, it dwarfs all other smartwatch sales to date and represents a milestone in wearable “smartwatch” sales.

Watch Sport model lead in unit-sales volume, selling 1.8 million units for a total revenue of $693,000,000, while the Watch, the middle-Tier model, lead in revenue, garnering about $851,000,000 versus Watch Sport $693,000,000. The profitability-magic of the Watch three-Tier model line-up, is Apple’s inclusion of the Watch Edition an 18 Karat Gold luxury model. We estimate that 50,000 Gold units were available for the on-line launch and at 70 Apple Stores at Launch generated $675,000,000 in gross sales.

Watch average selling price, the APS achieved a level of $740/unit sold. The total Sales revenues of Watch first day sales earned $2,219,000,000 (that’s $2.219 Billion). Our bet is the Watch Line will (on average) achieve a +60% gross Profit, yielding to Apple’s bottom line $1.33 Billion in profit for each 3 million units sold. If Apple enjoys 30 million Watch sales in its first year of availability, Apple’s bottom-Line profits will gain another $13.3 Billion Annually or $3.325 Billion quarterly. Accordingly, this new Watch product-line may likely increase earnings accretive by +20% to Apple’s quarterly earnings.

We believe the pre-orders of 3 Million Watch sales estimated, may be considerably below the total number of pre-orders for Watch achieved by the April 24th Lunch Day. As Apple is offering 38 different Models & Bands of the Watch, with no previous order-history to consider when projecting model inventory levels, we expect that Pre-Orders will be Assembled-to-Order.

Apple estimating the Model-Mix to build, however, it is believed that Apple pre-manufactured 6 Million Watch S1 electronics Modules and Cases.

Apple may execute Final-Assembly of each Watch pre-Sale on a Build-to-Order, based on the Customers’ choice of the Case-Band actually sold. This approach permits Apple to maintain more efficient levels of Watch Case inventories, while simultaneously shipping promptly to as many Consumers as possible.

1,150,000 (38.33%) Watch units sold Globally
1,800,000 (60.00%) Watch SPORT units sold Globally
0,050,000 (1.67%) Watch EDITION Gold units sold Globally
3,000,000 (100%) Watch Total units sold Globally

News Reports indicate that the first Quarter of Watch sales may reach 6 million units, and assuming our ASPs are close to reality Apple’s Quarterly profits could receive a +$3.3 Billion jump due to the Watch.

To learn more how Watch may work for you take a VIEW at these two brief video clips:


Slice Intelligence estimated that 957,000 people in the USA pre-ordered Watch on Friday, April 10, the first day the Watch was available for on-line sale, according to eReceipt Data collected from a sampling-panel of two-million online shoppers.

Each Watch buyer ordered 1.3 Watch units, paying on average $503.83 for each Watch for all models, excluding the Apple Edition Gold Watch, not reported in the data sampled.

Watch Sales = $1.562 Billion Globally with 3,100,000 Watch Units Sold on the First DAY • A Very Exciting Day for Apple and the Early Watch Buyers.

Most, if not all of the reporting agencies that have examined this Slice Intelligence Watch sales data, have mis-reported the eReceipt information. Here’s the Math and our Conclusions regarding the statistical data:

1,150,000 (38.3%) Watch units sold in the USA
1,800,000 (60%) Watch units sold out of the USA
50,000 (1.6%) Watch units sold out of the USA
3,000,000 (100%) Watch units sold World-Wide

Data Extrapolation. The primary data-point show that 957,000 buyers bought (on average) more than one Watch, actually 1.3 Watch units in the USA only. Here is the Math. If 957,000 individuals bought 1.3 Watch units, then 1,244,000 Watch units were purchased.

Apple has reported that 60% of their sales World-Wide occurs outside of the USA, then 40% of Apple product sales occurs in the USA. Accordingly, international Watch units sales amounted to 1,856,000 Watch units. Therefore Global Watch unit sales would total 3,100,000. The eReceipt data indicates that the Average sales invoice for all Watch sales was $503.83/unit, then the gross sales for Global Sales amounted to $1.562 Billion on Day One.

Among those buying an Watch, 72% have purchased an Apple product in the past two years (iPhone, Apple computer or iPad), and 21% of this group pre-ordered an iPhone 6 or iPhone 6 Plus several months ago. Nearly one-third of the group purchased two Apple products and 11% bought all three devices, in addition to their new Watch, according to eReceipt data.

Most Watch buyers, roughly 62% of the total number of buyers, purchased the entry-level Sport Watch. However, many Watch buyers purchased the pricier, Middle-Tier Polished Stainless Steel case, with more than one-third of these buyers paired the Watch with either the Black or White Fluroelastomer Sport band.

Most of the Watch Sport buyers chose the larger 42mm watch-case, with 71% overall selecting this larger watch-case format. Watch buyers were slightly more likely to choose the 38mm watch-case.

The most popular type of Watch-case is the Space Gray aluminum case, with 40% of Apple Watch buyers choosing this option, followed by stainless steel at 34%, silver aluminum at 23% and the Space Black stainless steel Watch was at 3%.

Watch Black Sport Band was the most popular among both Apple Watch and Apple Watch Sport buyers, with 49% overall pre-ordering, followed by the White Sport Band at 16%, and the more expensive Milanese Loop ($149 versus $49 for the black Sport band) rounding out the top three at around 10%.

Slice Intelligence, the supplier of the above information states they are only firm using direct-measurement of all digital commerce activity and customer loyalty. By collecting and cataloging actual shopping behaviors from online shoppers in the wild, Slice Intelligence precisely measures what the others have only been able to approximate, revealing new insights about online shoppers and their behaviors.

Slice Intelligence information comes from a methodology developed at Stanford University that measures and catalogs all online purchases made by consumers who use the popular Slice App to manage their online shopping. This refined data collection method enables impeccable, near real-time data.

It is important to understand where eReceipt data is obtained. Slice Intelligence has a particularly stable, high quality, large database. It provides a service to its eCommerce clients a method of tracking their sales receipts, retaining them for future access. This means that the data it accesses is reliable for its customers. It also gives it a source of 2 million customer pool. Author of the Slice report Jaimee Minney wrote the following points:

Slice Intelligence get permissioned access to email inboxes from users of our apps (Slice and unroll.me) as well as through partners who license Slice Intelligence technology to power their online experiences (i.e. The find, IFTTT, Gone!, etc.)

1⃣ The number of Watch sales, [1.244 million units] is based on Slice Intelligence projections to the online population
2⃣ Slice Intelligence’s panel is of 2 million people, 9,080 of whom bought an Apple Watch
3⃣ Based on Slice Intelligence’s statistical modeling and validation (including partner and client feedback), Slice Intelligence is confident that the numbers are representative
4⃣ Slice Intelligence abstracts these results of its sizable survey of its buyer-population, and projects to the USA population. Slice Intelligence has two major statistical reliability advantages over other methodologies
5⃣ Slice Intelligence uses extremely large sample population (2 million). Ms. Minney notes that the panel size is “an order-of-magnitude [exponentially] larger than panels by Nielsen, comScore, eand others”
6⃣ Slice Intelligence’s sampling is automatic, no human intervention. Since the data is supplied automatically from real e-Receipts, as opposed by any self-reporting, therefore the data has a very high degree of accuracy.

Two Watch Try-On Reservations were booked for Marilyn and I. On Friday morning right after I placed our 5am Pre-Orders on-line, Reservations for Hands-on try-ons were booked.

Our Watch Try-Ons were scheduled-reserved for noon Sunday, April 12. Briefly, this was as a totally enjoyable and fun experience. The sales folks at the Apple Store (Boca Raton, Florida) were excited with the success of the pre-order launch, proving strong demand. The Apple store was literally packed with an excited public and sales associates.

 We each had separate sales associates showing the different models, the 38mm and 42mm Watch, and a broad array of available bands. Most of the bands may be purchased separately.

 Marilyn and I had about 20 minutes to try-on all the different bands, with demonstrations of the Watch, its use, the Apps, changing the actual Watch faces. However, there was no sensation of time-pressure whatsoever. I fact after 15 or 20 minutes you would have tried-on just about everything in sight, which is what I did. In sum, the Watch is an amazing wearable. We can both imagine buying several bands to suit our Day, Evening, and Venue needs.

 We had a great time, and became quite comfortable with this new Watch. As to use, the operating system is very intuitive and everyone should be able to use the Watch right out of the box. Along the perimeter of the Apple Store their are counter-top displays where customers can experiment with the Watch, the digital-crown, the Contacts-Button, using the up, down, left, right swiping, Customizing the Watch-face. All very easy and intuitive. This is the beauty of Apple, use of the Watch is simple and easy, no rocket-scientists needed.

 When iPhone users update their iPhones to the newly released iOS 8.3 operating system (upgrade now whether or not an Watch is in your immediate future) a New Apple App shows on the iPhone home-page, clearly named “Apple Watch.” This App when launched will search for and “pair” automatically with your Watch.

 The Watch Companion App allows you to set up the Watch to your exact desires, color schemes, select from a good number of watch-faces; plus this App will “pair” to your iPhone via bluetooth and synchronize your setup to the Watch.

 Apple has made this process easy and seamless, requiring no technical knowhow. The first-time “pairing” takes about 10 minutes to synchronize your chosen photos, selected music and iPhone Apps that you’d like to be resident on your Watch.

 The Apple Store try-on experience was quite an exciting experience. Hats off to Apple’s team for this new technique for the folks that are interested in this new wearable Watch.

 Marilyn was delighted with the Milanese Loop band, so there was no change with her pre-order. Personally, I was undecided between the Milanese Loop band and the Link Bracelet. After trying on both bands twice, it was clear to me to select the Bright Stainless Steel Link Bracelet. On Friday morning I ordered two Watch units for myself, both with polished 38mm stainless cases, one Watch with Milanese Loop band and the second Watch paired the Bright Stainless Steel Link Bracelet.

 During our hands-on session, we were very pleased with the quality of all the Bands. The $50 colorful FluoroElastomer bands (aka the Watch Sports Bands) are a very high quality feel, they are smooth, soft, comfortable material. The Black Leather Modern Buckle is likely my 2nd Band, perhaps for evenings dining out. However, the Bright Stainless Steel Link band is very thin and elegant, rather than an extra heavy, bulky, chunky band, often seen with other Watch makers such as Rolex. For my taste Rolex Link bands look and feel heavy and chunky. Apple’s SS Link Band is the opposite. Its easy to imagine Apple or the Aftermarket fabricating an 18 karat Gold version of Apple’s SS Link band.

 We both can easily imagine having several bands. In my case a Black Sports band for weekend use, the Watch Stainless Steel Link Bracelet for every-day use, and the Watch Black Leather Modern Buckle, a stunning alternative for more formal evenings out, or just changing bands for the fun of it.

 Sdding and removing any Watch Band is a super-easy process, and needs no tools or special talent whatsoever. The Bright Stainless Link Bracelet is simply stunning, and removing or adding its Links for a perfect fit, is very easy to accomplish, also with no tools or special skills required.

 Following our Watch Hands-on experience, the Apple associates directed us over to the perimeter wall of the Apple Store where Watch units were attached to a wooden base and attached to a stand-up bar arrangement. Folks were spread along the two long walls, playing with 40 to 50 Watch display units. Marilyn and I toyed with the settings, watch-faces, colors, etc. I finished a bit sooner, and mentioned to her to take her time, as I was going to roam around the store, and excused myself.

 My mission was to interview as many Apple sales associates as possible as Marilyn continued to “joyfully tinker” with the Watch settings and menus. Other than making friends first, the next most important issue for me was to pose to all of the store employees the key question:

“…What percentage of the folks that came in for their Reservation for Hands-On trials, actually proceeded to go on-line to order the Watch of their choice…

 Every Apple employee that was in the Hands-On Trial area, stated that almost all of the folks bought Watches on line while in the store using their iPhone. A number of folks bought iPhones for the first time (switching from Androids, mostly Samsung smartphones) so they could use the Watch companion. In pressing the retailers for a percentage most replied “…90% to 95%…” some said that “…every Reservation they greeted bought their chosen Watch…

 Sunday evening, following our successful try-ons at our local Apple Store, getting back to business, I cancelled the extra Watch order paired with the Milanese band. Marilyn was totally pleased with the Milanese Loop band so there was no change to her pre-order; I’m now very happy with the Stainless Link Bracelet. Our hands-on, try-ons were a resounding success, being a very satisfying experience; plus the hands-on try-ons solved my undecided band choice. Now we both look forward to receiving our Watches in about 3 weeks.

According to data from Slice Intelligence, based on data gathered from 9,080 shoppers, about 957,000 U.S. customers purchased an AppleWatch model on Friday, April 10th. The average consumer bought an average of 1.3 watches, spending $503.83 per watch. Comparatively, recent research from Canalys revealed that some 720,000 Android Wear smartwatches have been sold in the entire year of 2014.

The most popular purchase was the Apple Watch Sport, with 62% of consumers getting it on pre-order day, for an average price of $382.83. Comparatively, the average price paid for the Apple Watch is $707.04. BMO Capital Markets came out with similar numbers in a survey performed before pre-orders commenced on Friday, saying that 60% of buyers who wanted to buy one were interested in the AppleWatch Sports model. Meanwhile, 12% were desiring the Apple Watch model, with 4% of the respondents choosing the Apple Watch Gold Edition model. 24% of the respondents were undecided.

When it comes to the AppleWatch Case-sizes, most buyers chose the more expensive 42mm model, a $50 add-on; according to Slice 71% of the buyers chose the 42mm watch-case size. The Space Gray aluminum case was the most popular among all buyers with 40% share, followed by polished stainless steel with a 34% share, and the silver aluminum sports watch case with a 23% share. The Black Sport Band was the most popular among both Apple Watch and Apple Watch Sport buyers at 49%, followed by the White Sport Band (16%) and the Milanese Loop (10%).

PRESS Release: CUPERTINO, California—April 9, 2015—Apple Watch™, Apple’s most personal device yet, will be available for preview and pre-order on Friday, April 10. Customers in Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, the UK and the US can try on and experience Apple Watch at their local Apple Store® or at Galeries Lafayette in Paris, Isetan in Tokyo, Selfridges in London, and select Apple Authorized Resellers in Japan and China. Customers can pre-order their Apple Watch through the Apple Online Store (www.apple.com) beginning April 10 at 12:01 a.m. PDT for delivery beginning April 24.

“We are excited to welcome customers tomorrow and introduce them to Apple Watch, our most personal device yet. Based on the tremendous interest from people visiting our stores, as well as the number of customers who have gone to the Apple Online Store to mark their favorite Apple Watch ahead of availability, we expect that strong customer demand will exceed our supply at launch,” said Angela Ahrendts, Apple’s senior vice president of Retail and Online Stores. “To provide the best experience and selection to as many customers as we can, we will be taking orders for Apple Watch exclusively online during the initial launch period.”

Customers interested in learning more about Apple Watch can visit their local Apple Store for a personalized session with a Specialist to try on, fit and size their band, and explore the amazing features of Apple Watch. Customers who want to try on an Apple Watch are encouraged to make an appointment by going to http://www.apple.com.

Starting Friday, customers can try on Apple Watch, Apple Watch Sport or Apple Watch Edition* to find the model with the size, finish and band to best fit their personal preference and style. Everyone visiting an Apple Store will be able to view all three collections and get hands on with Apple Watch Demo to browse and edit different watch faces, and learn about Apple Watch’s health and fitness features, Digital Touch, Siri®, Apple Pay™**

Pre-orders begin April 10 at 12:01 a.m. PDT through the Apple Online Store, the Apple Store app for iPhone® and iPad®, and select Apple Authorized Resellers in China and Japan. Customers who pre-order their Apple Watch can have it shipped for delivery beginning April 24. All Apple Watch customers will be offered Personal Setup, online or in-store, to pair their Apple Watch with their iPhone. New owners will also learn how to personalize Apple Watch by selecting a watch face, deciding which notifications to receive, setting up the Activity app, and receive an introduction to Apple Pay** and the Apple Watch App Store™.

Beginning April 24, Apple Watch will also be available at boutiques in major cities including colette in Paris, Dover Street Market in London and Tokyo, Maxfield in Los Angeles and The Corner in Berlin, and select Apple Authorized Resellers in China and Japan.

Apple Watch is an incredibly accurate timepiece, an intimate and immediate communication device and a groundbreaking health and fitness companion. Highly customizable for personal expression, Apple Watch also brings an entirely new way to receive information at a glance and interact with the world through third-party app experiences designed specifically for the wrist.

Apple Watch introduces revolutionary technologies including the Digital Crown™, an innovative way to scroll, zoom and navigate fluidly without obstructing the display. The Retina® display with Force Touch on Apple Watch senses the difference between a tap and a press, providing a new way to quickly and easily access relevant controls. The all-new Taptic Engine™ discreetly delivers a gentle tap on your wrist whenever you receive a notification or message.

Pricing & Availability. Apple Watch is available in three collections, Apple Watch Sport, priced at $349 (US) and $399 (US); Apple Watch, available from $549 (US) to $1,099 (US); and Apple Watch Edition, crafted from custom rose or yellow 18-karat gold alloys, with prices starting at $10,000 (US).

Millions of Apple Watches were purchased early Friday morning. All of the $10,000, $12,000, $15,000, $17,000 and $18,500 Gold Edition Watch units Sold Out in One Hour. All of the Watch Sports Watches Sold out in 6 Minutes.

All Watch models sold out in 3 hours, therefore those pre-ordering after 6am Eastern Friday, the delivery dates are pushing back 4-6 Weeks (from May 14 to May 28). As of April 12th, Watch “Ship Dates” are pushing back to June and July, see examples displayed below.

Watch continues to receive high traffic for on-line orders that commenced Friday April 10th. There are Several ways to Buy the Apple Watch; However, not following the traditional new-product-release procedure. In this article are a number of screen-photos of the Watch Models and their anticipated ship dates, as of Monday, April 13, 2015.

The best and easiest method of buying the Watch is using the Apple Store App. It was reported that at the peak of the on-line ordering Friday morning, Apple’s http://www.Apple.com website was stressing with internet delays and URL errors. However, there were no reported issues using the Apple Store App. Friday morning I used the Apple Store App on my iPhone 6 Plus to order Apple Watches for Marilyn and myself.

Notice the Retail Products App is different than Apple’s App Store application. The App Store is used to buy Applications. The Apple Store App is used to buy Products, check on the status of an on-line order, and to make Genius Bar Reservations, and currently to make Watch Try-On Reservations. This is the LINK which will take you directly to the App Store to download the Apple Store App:https://appsto.re/us/uV9xw.i

Watch Sales Projection Chart below displays all Three Tiers of the Apple Watch that was created early March, 2015. Among the many unknowns is the sale-demand for the Gold Edition Apple Watch. The three traunches combined total 6 Million Watch units, representing the initial production-run for the product’s Launch period. The Sports Watch is set at 3.5 million units, the Stainless Steel AppleWatch models at 2.5 million units, and the Gold Edition watches at 500,000 units, representing only 8.34% of the total Apple Watch production-run.

Changes to the product-mix may significantly change the overall gross sales values for the 3-tiers. This statistical model assumes an average Profit Margin for the product-line of 45% for all 3-tiers. Since all these figures are “educated guesses,” I kept the guessing to a minimum by selecting a single-average profit margin. Since Apple’s overall profit margin company-wide is currently reported at 39.5%, the Watch as a “jewelry wearable” earned a higher profit margin of 45% which in reality the profit margin may be significantly higher, perhaps 50% or more.

Reports from the supply-line say that 6 million Apple Watch units were ordered for the initial production-run commenced in January, 2015. If the pre-order sellout is a telling signal, Tim Cook and his production team will be stepping-up the number of production-lines to meet the perceived huge Demand.

What is the Difference with Watch product release and the Apple iPhone 6 product release… Simple outline
(A) With recent iPhone releases, on-line pre-ordering was made available two weeks before the Official Product Release at Apple Retail Stores. (This is the same for the Watch pre-ordering)
(B) With recent iPhone releases, the iPhone was not available to Vier or Hold and not available retail store sales until the official Launch Day. Recall the Apple retail stores covered their store-fronts with Black Drapes, in the evening before Launch-Friday adding to the retail hysteria. (This procedure differs from the Watch release, as Apple Retail Stores received display models for the public to View, Hold and Try-on [commencing 4/10] two weeks before the official Launch Day on Friday 4/24)
(C) Apple gave thought to invite the public’s View and Try-on of the Watch with pre-arranged reservations, so these folks thereafter, may go on-line and purchase the Watch with confidence knowing the model, band and the case-size and case-metal of choice. The theory is Wearable” products require more time to consider, therefore, the two weeks of try-ons will aid Customers in making on-line pre-orders.
(D) Apple on Launch Day, all Watch models will be available to the public; however, the folks need to make reservations for a limited period of time, so that the Retail Stores are not over-whelmed with traffic. For the Apple-FanBoys the hysteria is exciting, for the rest of the Apple Clan, long lines are aggravating
(E) After a few weeks, Apple may remove the pre-Reservation requirements once the Watch Supply-Demand dynamics are stabilized.

1⃣ BUY your favorite AppleWatch and Band combination on-line
2⃣ RESERVE your favorite AppleWatch and Band combination; however, this Reservation & Pick-up method is only available in only about 70 stores world-wide
3⃣ WALK-IN Sales Not Permitted Presently, therefore Do Not waist your time on long Lines to enter the Apple Store for the Apple Watch on Launch-Day, or Launch-Week. Remember Walk-IN traffic was encouraged when you Bought your new iPhone. For this new product release, on-line purchase or Reservations Only for the Apple Watch
4⃣ TRY-ON APPLE WATCH, You can make an appointment to try-on the Apple Watch commencing today. Apple Watches are not available for sale in the Stores; however, you can make an appointment to try-on the Apple Watches of your choice; Thereafter you may go on-line and order the Apple Watch you liked.

The GOOD News – Apple’s On-Line Store opened for Apple Watch purchase at 3:01 AM early Friday [4/10] morning. It has been reported that Apple ordered 6 Million Apple Watches for the initial Launch period, presumed to be a 90-day supply.

The BAD News – Apple’s On-Line Store was SOLD-OUT Globally, for the Sports Watch literally 6 Minutes after Apple’s On-Line Store opened for business at 3:01am early Friday morning. All Apple Watches were sold-out, all Watch Edition models including the $10k to $18.5k Gold models were all Sold Out world-wide in 60 minutes. However, this means you will still receive your Apple Watch, but it will take a few weeks or months later to receive it. The Earlier you Order the Watch, the Quicker you will receive it. If you delay few days, it may add a Month or two delay, before your Watch ships.

All Global Apple On-Line Store are Sold-Out of the initial production-run. Except for the first 3 Million lucky individuals that purchased their Apple Watch before 3:06am today, your shipping date has likely been “Pushed Back” to May 15th or later an undisclosed period in June or July. Above are “screen images” of my three attempts to buy one model for each of the three-Tiers of Apple Watches as of April 13. As these DAYs move forward in time, the Shipping Dates will be “Pushed Back” later into June and July, until Apple adjusts their production and supply lines to meet the huge Demand.

Apple Watch Critics. Another terrible call by the critics. It’s amazing to me that Apple Critics are consistently Negative, and consistently WRONG

The Critics told the World that it was ridiculous for Apple to get into the already crowded Smartphone market in January, 2007. Wrong, Apple has sold 750 million iPhones
The Critics told the World that it was ridiculous for Apple to get into the already crowded Tablet market in April, 2010. Wrong, Apple had sold 240 million iPads
The Critics told the World that it was ridiculous for Apple to get into the mature Wearable Watch marketplace in September, 2014 Wrong, again! Apple sold-out 3 million Apple Watches in several Minutes. Traditionally, Apple produces Millions of units in advance of the Lauch-Day
Apple Watches: 6 millions units have been fabricated for the initial production-run. Roughly 50% of this inventory was available for on-line pre-ordering, the remaining 3 million Apple Watch units will stock retail stores for retail-Reservation sales commencing Friday, April 24. It may be Months before Apple will have significant inventory, for direct walk-in retail sales, without reservations.
Notice to All Critics. Today Apple Watches are All Sold Out due to Incredible Demand. Launch-Day is April 24th. Online Apple Watch pre-ordering and try-on for the Apple Watch Watch started Today
Notice to Investment Bankers. Apple Watch is Sold-Out, Apple Edition Gold Watches are Sold-Out, Apple Sports Watch is Sold-Out. Incredible demand has caused back-order status for all models across the entire line of Apple Watches. Some IB firms downgraded $AAPL because of back-order status. They Are NUTS. No Critic anticipated Millions of Apple Watches selling out in the first two Hours, particularly for a NEW product. The Critics said “no one would want the useless Apple Watch” and “no one would buy it” WRONG
Apple iPhone Launches recall, Apple doubled its iPhone 4 pre-release day inventory to 3 million units and sold out in three days. Apple thereafter, doubled its pre-release inventory to 6 million units for the iPhone 5 and it sold out in three days; Then Apple doubled again its pre-release inventory for the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus to 12 million units and they sold out of all models in three days.

(A) If you know Exactly what you want, case, band, size, metal, order AppleWatch online for delivery directly to your Home on Friday morning, April 24th. Apple’s tradition, if you are not pleased with your on-line purchase when received, you may go to your local Apple Store to make a change or refund, or ship it back to Apple’s On-Line Apple Store Return Center; however, in eather case, save all the packaging.

(B) If you Know what you want, however, you want to try it on, as you may desire to change the Band or the Case size, make your best selection on April 10th and Book a RESERVATION for April 24th, or next available Reservation Date, at your local Apple Store; Reservation Appointments are the only way to get into the Apple Store on the 24th, to fine-tune your selection and pick-up your Apple Watch.

Know the circumference of your Wrist, My wrist measures 170mm (Large), Marilyn wrist is 155mm (Medium); once your wrist is measured you’ll know what AppleWatch defines band-size by: “Small,” “Medium,” or “Large” for Apple band sizes. The Apple Watch site defines S,M,L determined by the circumference of your wrist. The Apple Store Sizing Charts are displayed below.

Know the Watch Model you desire: Sports, Apple Watch or Apple Edition, prices starting from $349, $549, $10,000 respectively. Almost there.. you need to choose the Watch-Case size, as Apple provides two Case sizes: Do you want the 38mm watch-case or the 42mm watch-case. I’m relatively small Wristed, therefore the 38mm Case may be the choice for me.

 Many Millennials and some Elders really enjoy Big Watches, rendering the 42mm desirable. Apple has designed the Apple Watch with many band materials and multiple color choices, for every-day use and fashion in mind. Therefore folks may prefer to satisfy their style needs and use requirements.

Apple Watch On-Line Ordering or Reservation Experience. If you are anxious to own the Apple Watch, perform the steps mentioned before Friday, April 10th.

With my particular Apple Watch choice, I’ve got THREE watches and bands to pick between. Marilyn has not looked on-line as of today, but she will before Friday. Likely she’ll get the Apple Watch, and the band choice is yet to be made.

(A) Apple Watch with 38mm Space Black watch-case with the Black Sports Band, my likely pick, or

(B) Apple Watch with 38mm Space Black watch-case with the Space Black Bracelet Band, or the Milanese Band, quite an elegant combination. Do not forget the AppleCare+ for the Apple Watch, gives you 2 years of Warranty plus Accident Coverage.

Extensive Surveys say that over 200 millions of folks reach for their iPhone on average, 10 Times per Hour, about every 6 munutes. This means Folks are repeatedly having to retrieve their iPhone from their Pocket, Purse, or Briefcase. Not a big deal, and surely more convenient than having to start-up a laptop or PC to visualize SMS Text Messaging, eMails, or Appointment Calendars.

With the Apple Watch, iPhone communications, texts, Facebook posts, Tweets, phone calls, calendar reminders come to your attention through to your Apple Watch, with several Taps on your Wrist with Apple Watch’s internal Taptic Engine, a very subtle way to notice who is “calling” you.

Imaging being in a Conference Room, a Noisy Sports event, in the Movie theater, or on the Train or Subway, The Tap “tells” you what’s going on with minimal distraction. If you are committed in a Conference setting, you’ll know whose “calling” and you can decide if that Contact is worthy of excusing yourself from the venue. If your child’s School is calling, that may motivate you to leave the venue, and answer that “Call.” The “call” is communicated to you without having to find and expose your iPhone, and perhaps distract the folks with you.

Simply put, with the Apple Watch strapped onto your wrist, as a text message comes to your iPhone, the Taptic engine, sends a silent Tap or Two directly to the Apple Watch’s Taptic Engine, which is a silent and subtle, “notification” telling you that a Message has been just sent to you. It would feel like someone Tapping, one or more times onto your Watch-Face, which would be felt on your Wrist.

Presumably, these gentle Taps will motivate you to slight turn (rotate) your wrist a 1/4 turn or so, at which time your Apple Watch display “wakes up” giving you a very subtly opportunity to visually-notice who communicated with you, including an abbreviated display of the Text Message, eMail, Caller ID, an Appointment Reminder, an Timer Alarm, without having to find and “wake up” your iPhone.

WiFi Communicate with your Apple Watch. If you are home or in the office in an active WiFi area, you could have your iPhone charging in the Kitchen, or the iPhone could be in your Office, and your Apple Watch will receive these signals through the WiFi, while you are in the Yard, Family Room or in someone else’s Office or Conference Room.

Apple Watch not in a WiFi zone, no problem, the Apple Watch communicates with your iPhone using Very-Low-Power bluetooth connectivity. The Apple Watch automatically changes connectivity as you move into or away from a trusted WiFi zone.

A Tap onto the Apple Watch’s display, is a very convenient way to act upon an incoming communication, without having to get your iPhone 6 or 6 Plus from your Pocket, Purse or BriefCase.

Force Touch is a New iOS Operating System command that represents a really BIG deal, and it may be classified as the most important development to the mobile user interface since Apple created Multi-Touch, a Key component behind the Touch-Screen commands, “swiping and typing” on the display for messaging, or selecting menu choices. Force Touch and the corresponding Taptic Engine are two New principle features built into Apple’s new Apple Watch.

Force Touch is “activated” by making a gentle more sustained Press onto the Display (as opposed to a brief Tap). When applying a subtle Press onto the Display, the iOS will show Menu Items that are contextual appropriate to what is being Displayed on the Apple Watch, a feature that surely will subsequently be made available on the next iteration of the iPhone, perhaps the iPhone 7.

 Electronically, the Force Touch operation requires a new Display that has a microscopic Electronic-Grid that is imbedded within the Retina-Display, Force Touch is capable of noticing the difference between a simple Tap, Swipe, and a Press onto the display.

Force Touch may also represents a fundamental turning point in the iPhone, as an iOS milestone. Surely Apple will include Force Touch in the new iPhones iterations, along with a Taptic Engine that produces an oscillation (vibrations which the user feels), Most people buying iPhone 6 and 6 Plus will want to upgrade their iPhone in order to have the new feature. It is that big of a deal.

More on What is Force Touch and the Taptic Engine. Another simple example, is to think of the virtual keyboard on your iPhone, and being able to feel a click as you “type” on each letter. Internally, the Pressure of a Tap (or the area of screen that your finger comes in contact with) is registered and translates the Pressure as a Force-Touch gesture.

The Taptic Engine is a feedback method that produces a small vertical-vibration from an electromagnetic “motor” Apple calls this the Taptic Engine. The end result is that when you press down on the screen, it feels like you are pressing down a key on a traditional keyboard.

Force Touch opens an additional user interface layer, bringing much more functionality to the iPhone, including shortcuts, acceleration dependent on pressure (like fast-forwarding video depending on how hard you press on the screen), and new ways of dragging and dropping items. The user is able to feel each click, bump, and drag, instead of just touching a piece of glass.


HEADLINE – Watch Math. For Each 1.0% of iPhone Users (that’s 1% of the 218,180,000 iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 users) that buy Watch, APPLE Earns $1.483 Billion in Annual Gross Profits. Here’s the math and how we get there…

Apple hosted its Important Apple Watch Event March 9th, 2015. Apple Sprang Forward – WATCH Available April 24, PreOrder online April 10th. Apple’s presentation describes their intention of reinventing the Watch once created in the 16th century.

Apple, recall it did not invent the smartphone, they reinvented it with their iPhone in 2007 having delivered 700 million iPhones; Apple did not invent the Tablet, they reinvented it with their iPad in 2010 having delivered 240 million iPads. Now Apple reinvents the Wrist-Watch with its Watch in 2015 projected to sell between 20-to-35 million iWatches in its first year.

Apple Watch is “the beginning of the end of the traditional Wrist-Watch for the “over 30 crowd ” as many switch to the iWatch. For Millennials, Apple Watch may likely be their very First Watch, as most of the 13 to 30 year olds simply don’t wear Watches, they tell time with their iPhones.

Apple Watch is an amazing Companion to Apple’s iPhone (certainly not an iPhone replacement). Apple has now sold and delivered 700 Million iPhones world wide. Not bad considering the Apple critics screamed… Apple has no business entering an already crowded smartphone marketplace in January, 2007.

Apple Watch Sales Projection. We now know the pricing for the Three Tiers of Apple Watch Models and Bands. Accordingly, I’ve dusted off my trusty HP19BII calculator (in truth my calculator is an amazing 19BII business consultant emulation App by RLM Tools, here’s the $4.99 App Review: http://tiny.cc/qbhyvx Alternatively you can buy the HB19BII on Amazon currently priced for $290 New or $80 Used).

 Our projections for the sales of the initial production of 6 million Apple Watches are displayed in a simple spread-sheet format. We’ve projected 3.5 million Apple Sports Watches will be sold plus 2,000,000 mid-tier Apple Watches and 500,000 Apple Edition Watches, as the product sales-mix; of course our figures are not factual whatsoever.

Apple Watch Average Selling Price for the Sports Watch Tier. The largest number of sales will likely occur for the Sports Watch. Factually, Apple states that it will sell the 38mm SportsWatch for $350 and the 42mm SportsWatch will sell for $400. Accordingly we are assuming that the unit-sales will occur evenly between the two Sports Watches models, resulting in an ASP, Average Selling Price of $375.

Apple Watch Average Selling Price for the Apple Watch Tier. The Apple Watch will sell at $550 for the lowest priced Apple Watch, leading to a top price of $1100 for the Stainless Steel Bracelet band, leading us to a Weighted ASP of $750 which is $75 below the simple arithmetic average of $825. Personally, I really like the Sapphire faced, Dark Stainless Bracelet, priced at $1050 for the 38mm watch face, my wrist will not handle a 42mm watch-case.

Apple Watch Average Selling Price for the Edition Watch Tier. The Apple Edition Watch will sell at $10,000 for the lowest priced Apple Edition Watch, leading to a top price of $18,000 for the 18k Gold with the Gold Buckle Band, leading us to a weighted ASP of $12,500. Weighting these top-tier luxury models is the most difficult to project, therefore we chose to be conservative with an Weighted ASP $12,500 estimate.

Apple Watch Weighted Average Selling Price for Three Tiers of Apple Watch unit sales. If these projection have merit, then the Sports Watch will sell to 3,500,000 customers for a total of $1.312 Billion in gross sales. The Apple Watch will sell to 2,000,000 customers for a total of $1.500 Billion in gross sales, and the Apple Edition (Gold) Watch will sell to 500,000 customers for a total of $6,250 Billion in gross sales. The weighted average selling price is skewed upwards, largely because of the 500,000 Gold Edition Watches that may sell for an average selling price of $12,500 each, therefore the overall ASP for all three tiers of AppleWatch models equates to $1,510.

Apple Watch Gross Sales and Profits projected. Using the resulting Gross sales figures above, all three Tiers will generate $9.062 Billion in sales for this new Apple Watch product. If Apple achieves say 45% profit margin, which is likely profit margin for a wearable product, then Apple’s Gross Profit may approach $4.078 Billion per Quarter, or $16.3 Billion Annually, or $1.36 Billion per Month. There are not many S&P 500 Companies that generate this profit level.

Apple Watch Gross Sales projections in Perspective. The 6,000,000 unit Sales of Apple Watch projected, is based on just 2.75% of the 218,181,000 customers (current number of iPhone 5 + iPhone 5S + 5C + iPhone 6 + iPhone 6 Plus users) actually buy the Apple Watch sometime during the next 12 months from launch day, 24 April 2015.

Lets Play some Apple Watch Math Games. If the number of iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 buyers increases by just 1.00%, then the Number of Apple Watch Sales increases by 2,181,800 unit sales, generating an additional Gross Profit of $1.483 Billion Quarterly, or about $5.931 Billion/year for those iPhone 5+ iPhone 6 users.

Apple Watch Math Games Summarized. Therefore for each 1% of iPhone Users that buy Apple Watch, about $6 Billion in annual Gross profit is added to Apple’s Financial Results. Similarly if 5% of iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 users buy Apple Watch, then Apple enjoys about $30 Billion in annual Gross Profits. It will be most interesting to look back at this Article (a year from now) in review of Apple’s actual Apple Watch 2016 annual results.

Apple critics screamed in January of 2007 “Apple is a Computer company and has no business getting into the crowded, experienced mobile-phone arena.” However, Apple methodically reinvented the smartphone, released it June, 2007 fortunately ignoring all their critics. iPhone sales soared to 74.5 million for the 90 day period ending 12/31/2014, and are projected to sell 225 million iPhones for Apple’s fiscal 2015.

Apple again was criticized, similarly in 2010, for entering the crowed, mature Tablet marketplace… good thing Apple ignored that advice, as it again reinvented the Tablet with its iPad, having delivering 225,000,000 units.

Apple iPhone/iPad sales combined total about 925,000,000 iPhones and iPads have been sold into a crowded, competitive, mature marketplace. Apple has also earned a 99% Customer Satisfaction rating, unheard of in this industry. Critics are similarly questioning the wisdom of the Apple Watch.

Apple Watch represents the 2015 moment in time, “likely the beginning of the end of the traditional Watch for the 35 and over crowd” as many Apple iPhone owners switch to the iWatch for regular wear. For the Millennials, the Apple Watch will likely be their First Watch, as these 13-to-30 year olds largely do not wear Watches, noticing the time of day with their iPhones.

Apple Watch’s success is directly related to the percentage of Apple iPhone Users desire the added convenience of the Apple Watch. Keep in mind, Apple product owners have demonstrated, they are willing to pay the Premium Price for Apple’s superior products.

Pre-Orders for the Apple Watch begin April 10 in the United States, Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, United Kingdom. The Apple Watch will be available for preview, and try-on by appointment, at Apple’s retail stores, and available for preorder through the Apple Online Store.

Retail Store Sales for the Apple Watch begin on April 24. The Apple Watch will be available online or by reservation in Apple’s retail stores and select Apple Authorized Resellers in the United States, Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, United Kingdom.

Extensive Apple owner surveys tell us, iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 owners, about 220 million strong, about 10% to 15% are definitely interested in the Apple Watch within 90 days of its release. Those Surveyed as “definitely interested” in buying an Apple Watch in 90 days, translates into an Apple Watch sale, the simple math projects about 22 million to 33 million Apple Watch sales may result in the 12 month period from April 24, 2015.

 This Link takes directly to the Apple Store: http://www.apple.com/watch/

Apple Watch Magic. The AppleWatch pairs with your iPhone, so when messages, calls, texts, emails, tweets, FB posts, and calendar appointment reminders come to you, you will not have to dig in your purse, pocket or briefcase, for your iPhone. With the iWatch you simply rotate your wrist 30 degrees into your view, to glance at who’s attempting to communicating with you.

Apple Watch’s Simple gestures permits you to communicate, or take the phone call, if the call will likely be extended, now you know its worth the effort to get your iPhone in hand, and talk from it, the call being seamlessly captured by your iPhone.

Apple Watch App. The airline industry is delivering your Boarding Pass to your iWatch too. Fumbling for the iPhone or paper boarding passes to get through AirPort Security now becomes obsolete with Apple Watch. Same for Hotels, thousands are changing their room-lock-electronics to accept your iWatch to unlock your Hotel-Room, no more metal keys, the end of swiping plastic-coaded cards. The list goes on and on with Apple Watch.

 To view the Apple Media Event that was broadcasted at 1:00pm Eastern on March 9th, 2015 below is a convenient LINK for this very interesting and informative Apple Products Show.

http://www.apple.com/live/2015-mar-event/

 Notice the slides of the most recent, the 21st Apple retail store in China. Apple will be adding another 19 retail stores in china this year.

Apple opened its first retail store in Beijing China in 2008. The country has quickly become one of Apple’s most important retail markets, thanks to a growing middle class eager to own the company’s high-end iPhone smartphones, iPads and Mac Book computers. Recently reported China represents 20% of Apple retail sales globally, and Apple has earned a 25% market-share in SmartPhone sales.

Apple Orchestrates its worldwide Magazine Publicity debut of the Apple Watch. These efforts continue this week on the Cover of STYLE, a fashion magazine based in the United Kingdom. The cover image of Style’s Big Spring Issue for March, 2015 features model Guinevere Van Seenus wearing an Apple Watch and is accompanied by an additional two full-page spread inside the magazine that provides further details about the wrist-worn Apple Watch, including interesting hints about the pricing of the space gray models. Notice our list below of extensive guesstimates for all three tiers of the Apple Watch.

Apple’s March 9th Media Event may signal that the Apple Watch may be released sooner than later, perhaps earlier in April, say April 3rd, April’s first FRIDAY, perhaps the last portion of Match. You may recall we reported last year that Apple was “a month ahead of schedule in the Apple Watch development timeline“. Apple’s Spring Forward media event may signal that the Apple Watch may be available for on-line purchase, perhaps as early as mid-Match.

iF Announced at its International Forum Awards Gala in Munich, Apple Watch wins the coveted IF Gold Award for 2015. Overall, 1,124 products were granted an iF entry Label, only a few win the gold award for excellence in several categories.

 The Apple Watch competed with over 3,200 other designs in the Product discipline, the largest iF award segment that covers a number of commercial industries, including vehicles, medical devices, smartphones, computers, tableware, kitchen equipment, furniture, bathroom products.

 The IF Award Jury noted: “The idea of combining classic materials such as leather and metal with state-of-the-art technology to create a very individual fashion accessory has resulted in a delightful product offering a holistic user experience. The Apple Watch scores highly for each design detail and is an altogether extraordinary piece of design. For us, it is already an icon.”

 While Apple has discussed Apple Watch design and keystone features at length, the company has not yet presented the full hardware specifications and pricing details, likely to be heard at Apple’s March 9 Media Event. In a recent report, analyst Gene Munster estimated mid-tier Apple Watch models will retail for $499 to $599, depending on customization options, while the high-end Apple Watch Edition could sell for $4,999.

Apple Watch Tier Graphic. Notice the graphic below where we have estimated the average spelling prices, APS, for the Apple Watch. Most of those reporting on this topic are in general agreement on the ASP price range for the Sports Watch ($350 to $400) and the Apple Watch, the middle tier’s ASP ($500 to $900) depending on the band.

Among Reporters, there is little consensus for the pricing on the Apple Watch Edition, the 18k Gold Apple Watch. The ASP estimates range from $2500 to $10,000. Of course these figures vary largely based on the assumed amount of Gold that is incorporated in the Apple Watch gold case. Our estimate is, there may be 37.5gm of 24k Gold, then combined with 12.5gm of other elements to formulate 50gm of 18k Yellow or Rose colored Gold.

24k Gold Bars trading today at $1200 per troy ounce, lets compute the ASP, average selling price, of the Apple Watch Edition
⌚️ GOLD $1450 of gold metal in the watch case; add to this
⌚️ S1 Watch Chip $200 Apple’s S1 electronics-watch-chip and battery
⌚️ Watch Bands $550 for watch bands and bracelets,
⌚️ $2,200 Total Cost direct costs for the Edition Watch
⌚️ $1,800 Operating expense Corporate expense allocation per unit
⌚️ $3,000 Profit component per unit assume reasonable margin
⌚️ $7,000 Average Selling Price yielding about a 43% profit margin, relatively Low-Level Margin for a premium Jewelry product.
⌚️ $6,500 Average Selling Price Note, if there is only One Troy ounce of Gold, rather than the 37.5gm of Gold, then the Edition Watch Gold may sell for $6,500.

Apple Watch S1 Computer Module. Apple’s ability to surround their (New) products, like the Apple Watch, with connectivity and its ecosystem, this Article provides some insight on the S1’s operation, plus several X-Ray views of the “Heart” of the iWatch.

Apple Watch’s brains and heart is located in its S1 Module, a “Computer Package” housed within a unique sealed Module. The S1 represents a new level of micro-miniaturization, packaging literally Billions of electronic components and sensors into a single semiconductor module, hermitically sealed in resin.

Apple S1 System in Package, SiP, processor, memory, wireless connectivity transceivers, sensors packaged into a single, resin-sealed package. The S1 package contains an Apple customized application processor that together with memory, storage and support processors for wireless connectivity, sensors and I/O comprise a complete computer in a single package.

Apple Watch S1 Package is filled and sealed with resin to prevent any moisture intrusion and for structural durability. Very little is known about the S1, however, Chipworks (an enterprise specializing in patent and technology reverse engineering and support) believes that it has identified the Processors, the WiFi, and Bluetooth transmitters-receivers, the medium sized processor in the center at the top of the images.

 Since wristwatches were invented in the 19th century, people have been glancing at them to check the time. With Apple Watch, this simple, reflexive act allows you to learn so much more. We optimized your favorite apps for the wrist by developing Glances — scannable summaries of the information you seek out most frequently. To see them, you simply swipe up from your watch face. In an instant, you can glimpse the weather forecast, check out what’s next on your calendar, or find your current location on a map. You can quickly swipe through different Glances, or tap on one to go directly to its corresponding app for more details.

 S1 Chip. Massive constraints have a way of inspiring interesting, creative solutions. A prime example is the custom-designed chip at the heart of Apple Watch. No traditional computer architecture could fit within such a confined space. So we found a way to integrate many subsystems into one remarkably compact module, which is then completely encapsulated in resin to protect the electronics from the elements, impact, and wear. Configuring an entire computer system on a single chip is an industry first and represents a singular feat of engineering and miniaturization

 Because it’s connected to your iPhone, Apple Watch can present time in a more personal way. One that’s based around your life and schedule. You’ll receive real-time notifications for incoming mail, messages, and calls. So you can answer or dismiss them instantly. And since Apple Watch sits on your wrist, your alerts aren’t just immediate. They’re intimate. With a gentle tap, notifications subtly let you know when and where your next meeting starts, what current traffic conditions are like, even when to leave so you’ll arrive on time. At any point, you can simply swipe down to Notification Center to view what you may have missed.

 Apple Watch Notifications. It’s called the Taptic Engine, a linear actuator inside Apple Watch that produces haptic feedback. In less technical terms, it taps you on the wrist. Whenever you receive an alert or notification, or perform a function like turning the Digital Crown or pressing down on the display, you feel a tactile sensation that’s recognizably different for each kind of interaction. Combined with subtle audio cues from the specially engineered speaker driver, the Taptic Engine creates a discreet, sophisticated, and nuanced experience by engaging more of your senses. It also enables some entirely new, intimate ways for you to communicate with other Apple Watch wearers. You can get someone’s attention with a gentle tap. Or even send something as personal as your heartbeat.

 The wrist is a convenient area for collecting data about your physical activity, a task Apple Watch is designed to perform throughout the day. On the back of the case, a ceramic cover with sapphire lenses1 protects a specially designed sensor that uses infrared and visible-light LEDs and photodiodes to detect your heart rate. Apple Watch uses this sensor, along with an accelerometer and the GPS and Wi‑Fi in your iPhone, to measure all kinds of physical movement, from simply standing up to actively working out. This allows Apple Watch to provide a comprehensive picture of your daily activity, suggest customized goals, and reward you for reaching personal fitness milestones.

 As familiar as wearing a watch is, charging one is something new. So we decided to make it utterly effortless. In fact, our goal was to make Apple Watch easy to charge in the dark. Without looking. While being only partially awake. We arrived at a solution that combines our MagSafe technology with inductive charging. It’s a completely sealed system free of exposed contacts. And it’s very forgiving, requiring no precise alignment. You simply hold the connector near the back of the watch, where magnets cause it to snap into place automatically.

Apple’s March 9th Media Event will describe how to use this new Wearable Companion product, the iWatch. Apple’s team will describe the iWatch Configuration App, housed in your iPhone via the release of iOS 8.3. The App delivers a unique Pathway App, to transfer your iWatch configuration seamlessly into your iWatch.

Apple is the Master of Marketing, the Company has proven this repeatedly dating back to January, 2007 with its introduction of the original iPhone. Besides, the event being named “Spring Forward” the event is the very next day when we all advanced our “Watches one hour Forward” for the beginning of Daylight Savings Time in North America.

Apple’s Spring Forward theme was recited in Apple’s formal invitation was sent Thursday morning, February 26, 2015 to the global Media community. Apple will present many details about how the iWatch will benefit its users. The presentation will likely show Apple’s new Companion Apple Configuration App, that makes it super-simple to set up the your Apple Watch, directly from your iPhone, plus topics were not fully covered at its initial announcement 5 months ago, following its mid-September Announcement of the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus.

Apple’s Spring Forward Preparation. If you’d like a “warm up exercise” in preparation of the Apple Watch media event, the link directly below this graphic, is a Video Clip of the Apple Announcement of the iWatch last September.

Apple first introduced the Apple Watch September, 2014, Apple delivered to us a “high-level” comprehensive overview at what the product will be able to do to improve our lives. We remain uninformed about many other specifics like battery life, pricing for the high-end and the other two-tiers of models.

 This link will take you directly to Apple’s iWatch presentation that was delivered around the world September, 2014… it is definitely worth it to take a look:

⌚️ http://youtu.be/bdyVH5LqneU

Apple’s March 9th Media Event may also Announce other New Products, for example the iPad Pro, a large display 12.9″ iPad with enhanced specifications, Speed, RAM, etc., that has been rumored for several years. Perhaps Apple may announce a new version of its Apple TV, which is years overdue for revision. My understanding, there are over 20 million Apple TV boxes in circulation.

Apple’s March 9th Media Event will undoubtedly describe how we will be able to use this new Wearable Companion product, the iWatch. Plus Apple will describe the iWatch Configuration App, loaded into your iPhone via the release of iOS 8.3, that delivers a unique Pathway App {transferring information and configurations from your iPhone directly to your iWatch} utilizing a menu-driven system to Transfer all your Watch Settings and Notifications seamlessly into your iWatch.

Apples March 9th Media Event will provide Live-Streaming Video Broadcast World Wide to all Apple folks or anyone that has a Safari browser on their PC computer systems, plus all iPhones and iPads, the simple hardware-software criteria that Apple has used for us to qualify for the Live-Streaming Broadcasts. Having watched a number of Apple’s Live Streamed broadcasts, they are very professionally produced and scripted. In My Humble Opinion, Apple will open its Live-Streaming Media Event to hundreds of millions of iPhone, iPad, MAC and PC users, many of which are iWatch interested.

Apple’s Live Streaming : Spring Forward Media Event. The Link below will be activated about 30 minutes before the Live-Streaming Presentation is broadcasted everywhere at 1:00pm Eastern, Monday March 9, 2015. Note, If you click onto the Link before March 9th, it will likely not have been activated until “Game Day.”.

http://Apple.com/live

iWatch’s Introduction and Demo. Apple announced September 9, 2014 the highly anticipated iPhone 6 at its Major press conference at the Flint Center, Cupertino, California. The Video Link below takes you directly to the iWatch segment of the Program, which announced the iWatch and gives a demonstration of its use and settings. The video is inspirational, as it shows how Apple, the Nation’s Largest Company develops and announces this new innovative and reinvention of the Watch, a device that has been with civilization since the year 1530 AD.

▶️ http://youtu.be/bdyVH5LqneU.

Apple weeks ago commenced production of 6 Million Apple Watch Units representing its Initial Quarterly Order.

 Apple projects internally sales of 24 million iWatches in the first fiscal-year of sales beginning April, 2015, as stated in news reports, which Apple has not confirmed. Several other analysts project 36 million Apple Watches and more, in the first fiscal-year of sales.

Apple in my opinion, is likely not in a hurry for an early April release date, as Apple surely wants to “iron out all the wrinkles” associated with a new-product release; however, maintain an “April Release” as published. Also when considering the Apple Watch release date, towards the end of April, Apple holds its Quarterly Financial report at 5pm following the 4pm public filing of Apple’s 2015 Q2.

Apple Watch is the only NEW product-release, since the unveiling of the iPad at a Press-Event held January 27, 2010 and subsequently released on April 30, 2010 with built-in Cellular+WiFi connectivity, two weeks earlier the WiFi iPad was available to the public.

CEO, Tim Cook surely desires to hold the Apple Watch high in the air, with all of the software, hardware, App, and iOS system issues rendered as glitch-free as possible. If Apple needs a week or more to polish the edges, the Apple Watch may be released to the Public towards the end of April, like on Friday 24th.

Apple Watch early adopters, the Apple Loyalists, must be Impressed with this unique Wearable iWatch, its Easy set-up, Ease of use, Battery life, Connectivity to everything iPhone/iPad. If accomplished, the major issues the media-critics have been whining about, mostly focused on its battery life, should be silenced early on.

Emergence of early issues may severely hamper accelerated adoption by the folks; Except, yours truly as I’ll be literally on line early morning, at Apple’s Retail Store at the Boca Raton Town Center Mall. Presently I’m focusing on the Apple Watch mid-tier model, the Dark Stainless Steel Bracelet or the Milanese Loop

Unless you’ve just returned from a extended vacation on planet SATURN, you may know the Apple Watch is coming very soon. iWatch is scheduled to be released in April, 2015. April 3rd, is the earliest Friday in April, only 36 days from today, February 26th. Many have asked us, will there be a Pre-Release Media event, (say Tuesday March 24th) 9 days before THE Release of iWatch Inventory to Apple’s retail stores? News reports have been accelerating as the release date becomes closer to realty. The Wall Street Journal, USA Today, Bloomfield and other journalists, have been discussed the new Apple Watch line-up.

Uncommon with a NEW Apple product release are the hoards of media-critics, claiming the uselessness of this new product. The Apple Watch is a unique New Product, as compared to a new Iteration of an existing product, like iPhone 5 to iPhone 6.

Historically, the Original iPhone was announced at Apple’s Maxworld Expo held January 9, 2007 annual event the media soon after slammed Apple for getting into a venue (cellular phones) it knew absolutely nothing about, considering there was already a very crowded field of experienced Mobile Phones makers.

 The Same choir of critics reported that Apple’s NEW iPad was “nothing new and if Apple’s lucky, maybe 6 million units would be sold” in its first year. Since the initial iPhone in 2007 there have been over a Billion iOS devices sold and in circulation, half of which are iPhones, Apple selling into a very crowded field of smartphone makers.

Recent articles discussing Apple’s iWatch endeavor has given me motivation to take harder look towards generating some reasonable expectations that we formulated for the three-tiered AppleWatch lineup; We’re assuming Apple will fabricate and sell 24 million iWatches for the initial 12 month sales period, plus Apple’s disclosure of the $350 Sports Watch entry-price point.

All the statistics have been projected by us internally, with no knowledge of what Apple has actually projected. Several facts have been released to the public that we’ve used in our presentation: (1) there will be a 3-tiered iWatch model lineup, (2) the Sports Watch will retail for $350, and (3) all else is our conjecture.

Apple Watch Economic Model. The statistical-chart below displays what we believe are “realistic” sales goals, perhaps conservatively, with price-traunches for the three tiered line-up, Sports, Apple Watch, Apple Edition, metaled Aluminum Alloy, Stainless Steel, and 18k Gold respectively.

iWatch [Gold] Edition is the top-tier version of the AppleWatch. Its been estimated that the Edition Apple Watch may retail for an estimated $4500. Sounds like a lot of money. Although Apple chose to leave the word “Gold” out of the Top Tier Title, Apple Edition, gold is in fact the watch-body metal; Note, presently Gold’s raw-material cost is hovering around $1200 per troy ounce, gold watches are “pricey” regardless of who designs and makes them, irrespective of the internal electronics package or electro-mechanical movement.

Apply is now Buying massive quantities of 24k Gold bullion, but that’s just the beginning. Roughly 14.46 Million troy ounces of 24k Gold bullion that are purchased by Apple per year (assuming our guesstimates are close) must be Certified by Apple Metallurgists when delivered, for elemental AU Purity and Weight. These two steps are very complex and require significant Oversight by agents of the bullion-supplier and Apple. Dealing with the payments and receipts of $18 Billion as Apple pays for the gold bullion is quite complex.

Post Certification of Millions of Pounds of Gold Bullion, it passes to the secure Fabrication Plant, carefully measured batches of the Bullion are heated to 2,000ºF in special Gold Furnaces, then Apple Metallurgists mix the molten gold with other specially purified metal ingredients resulting in several unique specialty 18k Gold formulations, then poured into Apple Watch cast-forms, cooled, then the iWatch Gold-Blanks are removed from the forms and inspected, those that pass through quality control are machined and polished, for further assembly. The gold-blanks that are rejected, and foundry castings are not 100%, go back to the Furnaces to be repoured.

This scenario is highly simplified, but gives you a notion of the complexity of the process. As about $18 Billion of gold bullion is involved, significant added costs are incurred for Plant Security, armed security guards, “security watching the valuables and each other, throughout all these processes.

Apple is processing this gold presently in effort for their April 2015 release to their retail stores for sale. Apple is also presently installing into the Common Carriers, Apple Distribution Centers, and Apple Retail Stores, specially designed VAULTS and ALARM Systems to protect the Apple Watch Boxed Inventory.

Apple Watch Edition, Lets take the iWatch apart piece-by-piece, financially speaking. Let’s assume that the Edition Watch may contain 37.5gm of 24k Gold and the Apple Watch electronics module is the same module used universally with all three of the AppleWatch tiers.

Apple Watch Financial Array. The bullet-points below display the cost analysis for the Apple Watch [gold] Edition, all Edition iWatches are gold cased watches.

Current Spot-Gold price. Assuming the iWatch pure-gold content is 37.5gm of gold watch-case (our guesstimate) when formulated to 18k gold metal-alloy. If Apple’s Gold Alloy procedure starts with 37.5gm of 24k Gold, as 24k gold metal is fabricated into 18k Gold by adding presumably precise amounts of Silver, Copper and Zinc, therefore watch-case (without internals) would then weigh 50gm, due to the additional 12.5gm of Apple’s unique mix of metals, blended in its Alloy-Furnaces. FYI, currently (as of 2/27/2015) spot-gold is hovering between $1204 to $1219 per troy ounce. Recall the under-side of the iWatch is stainless-steel which seals the watch-cased Computer module, Lithium Polymer battery, and houses 4 biometric sensor components.

Apple with its team of the best Metallurgists on the planet, have developed several unique 18k Gold formulations that delivers 18k Gold Alloys with custom Colors offering greater Gold hardness and durability unique to Apple. Typically 18k Gold is “softer” making it more prone to scratching and scuffing, showing greater signs of wear, than with traditional 14k Gold alloy formulations.

The Most Common 18k Gold Colors and Formulations are Displayed in this article with graphics and charts showing. The common alloys of elemental Gold, Silver, Copper, and Zinc in various levels of concentrations. Notice in the 12 Gold Colors Chart, Yellow Gold contains Gold, Silver, Copper, and Zinc with Gold representing 75% of the Alloy. To produce Rose colored Gold, the formulation contains only three elements: Gold, Silver, and Copper, removing Zinc. It will be very interesting to know the precise Formulation of Elements Apple’s team of metallurgists have chosen to create its unique Colors and Hardness, never seen before in the Gold Industry.

Apple is Reinventing the Watch. One should not be surprised that when Apple committed to a Watch-Wearable product, again Apple is REINVENTING the business of Gold Wearable Watches. From the images that Apple has displayed, and as presented in this article, Apple has created several striking 18k Gold Colors never seen in the industry. My bet is the brilliance of the gold colors is not simply a photoshop magic act, their unique Gold colors will be even more striking up close and personal, when the buying public visualized the Apple Watch in their Retail Stores.

As a reference, a typical ROLEX watch and bracelet uses 150gm of Gold; however, the gold is contained in the base Watch plus its hefty Bracelet. The Rolex bracelet accounts for a significant portion of the total gold metal package.

Apple Watch Computer module $200, the same module in all Apple Watches
Apple Watch Edition’s gold uses 37.5gm 24k Gold valued at $1500 for an 18k Gold formulation, presently spot-gold is $1205/gm [math: (37.5/31.1) x $1205 = $1500 the cost of the gold component]
Apple Watch Form, Jewlers add “Form” value to the price of its jewelry creations, say $2300
Apple Edition Band, say $500
Apple Watch Edition retail price = $4500 (math: $200 + $1500 + $150 + $2300 + $500)

Specifically, people in the supply-line familiar with this topic claim Apple has commenced production of about 6 million Apple Watches many weeks ago, for the iWatch’s first quarterly production-run; just over half of the production is earmarked for the Sport model, with a third of the production-run allocated for the middle-segment stainless-steel Apple Watch, with the balance is the Top-Tier Edition production, about 10% for the Apple Watch [Gold] Edition models.

Apple Watch Edition impact on Global Gold Supply. One more thing, lets have some fun in determining what Apple Watch Edition sales may have on the World’s supply for gold. Here are some givens to consider
 Apple Watch facts and conversion factors: there are 31.1gm in 1.00 Troy Ounce, there are 32,150.75 Troy ounces in one Metric Ton, Global production of Gold is 2500 Metric Tons annually, spot-gold price currently hovering around $1205 per troy ounce
 Apple is currently produce 500,000 gold Edition Apple Watch units as its initial quarterly production-run
 Apple Watch Edition ramps up production to 1 million Apple Watch units monthly [or more] as demand dictates
 Apple Watch Edition requires 37.5gm of pure 24k Gold for each iWatch, guesstimated
 Apple Watch Edition utilized 1.2058 Troy ounces of Gold per Apple Watch Edition, extrapolation of a guesstimate
 Apple Watch Edition will consume 14,469,453 troy ounces of Gold in its First fiscal Year of production, equating to 450 Metric Tons of 24k Gold/Yr, which equates to over 5x Rolex’s current Gold consumption
 Apple will Buy $18.086 Billion per Year for 24k Gold Bullion to built its Gold Edition Watches, base on current assumptions and spot-gold prices
 Apple Edition Watch Gold will place a New Demand for 20% of the total annual global Gold production
 Reference #1. Rolex sells $4.7 billion in gold watches yearly, from an estimated 600,000 Rolex watch sales. Rolex watches average 150gm or 4.82 troy ounces of Gold per watch, equating to 2.894 million troy ounces, or 90 Metric Tons Gold/annually
 Reference #2. Federal Reserve Bank of New York stores on average 7,000 metric tons of Gold Bullion in its Manhattan vault.

 By Mid-April, 2015, we are expecting over 50,000 Apple Watch Apps on the AppStore. Currently, for an average iPhone user there are 65 Apps per iPhone. We currently have 418 Apps on my iPhone 6 Plus and 300 Apps on Marilyn’s iPhone 6 Plus. We are estimating that an average Apple Watch may have 75 Apps per Apple Watch. There may likely be no single killer app for Apple Watch when the iWatch is released (other than the iWatch Configuration App) as each user will have their “own set of Killer Apps.” One way to look at this new “Wearable” is that the consumer is getting 75 different devices housed in one Apple Watch. Several Analysts are projecting that Apple may sell over 40 million Apple Watches in 1st the year, which is a very high estimate but not totally out of line with other estimates we’ve heard.

Many of the Apple Watch details are still unconfirmed, typical for Apple product releases, most notably the three-tired segment pricing, Apple Watch may be the revenue growth driver Apple needs for this April-Quarter, typically a relatively modest earnings period.

Apple’s Sports Watch is configured with an satin Aluminum case with a variety of elastomer sports water resistant bands. The Apple Watch is housed in highly polished hardened Stainless Steel with two colors, with a number of elegant bracelets. For the fashion minded, the Apple Watch Edition is encased in a highly polished and hardened Gold case accompanied with appealing bracelets. If our guesstimates are correct, this new Wearable product-line may have significant implications for year-over-year revenue growth at the company.

If the last eight quarterly financial reports are an indication, Apple may benefit handsomely with this mid-year revenue accelerator. The first fiscal-quarter (Apple’s fourth calendar quarter) is where Apple has really outperformed, growing revenue nearly 30% year-over-year.

Led by the newest iterations of its iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, most notably Apple smashed all expectations and accordingly propelled the $AAPL stock to all-time highs, with no end in sight. Not to mention that many of the largest Investment Banking firms’ analysts increasing the Target Pricing to $150/share and seemingly other analysts concurring with increased share target pricing.

Apple’s mid-year quarterly performance are generally less impressive then Apple’s first quarter results. And while it is important to note that 5% to 6% year-over-year growth is still amazing for a huge company pushing nearly $200 billion in revenues, with an Apple Watch earnings injection during the seasonally slower quarters should be an additional catalyst for Apple’s stock trading prices.

As you may know, one of the Apple “low” growth quarters is the third fiscal quarter, that typically starts April 1st. With an iWatch April release date expected, the Apple Watch may be most felt during this quarter. Assuming forecasts are close to reality, Apple generally errs on the conservative side with their projections. The Apple Watch may add roughly 16.8% growth to the quarter year-over-year, considering all other product sales factors constant. However, being rather bullish on the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, these “slower” seasonal quarters may be “not so slow” as usually expected by the “talking heads.”

The Big Question: Which Watch is for You? With the start of the New Year the specialty Watch Makers like Montblanc, Longines, Baume & Mercier, and others announce and display their new creations to the public.

Watches – Which is Best for You Comparing a robust “mans” chronograph with a modern gold iWatch with a red-band is eye catching, the primary purpose. However, when one acquires Mechanical-Chronographs with Complications in its Face, other than the watch-band, your use and visuals are Fixed. With iWatch other than your choice of the Gold, Stainless, or Aluminum alloy case, all else may be changed including the bands.

With the iWatch, Fixed only applies to your choice of how tall the watch body is, either 38mm or 42mm, and your choice of metal, Gold, Stainless, or Aluminum… all else you may change. The Watch Face may look anyway you desire, with Complications or not, thousands of possibilities, that you may change anytime. Directly under iWatch’s highly polished scratch-proof Sapphire Crystal, is a brilliant OLEM retina touch-display.

iWatch Face may display whatever information you desire, Day, Date, Graphics, Animations, iMessages, eMail, Weather, your next Calendar event, an incoming Call or Text, the position of Planet Earth in its solar system, your Heart rate, your Friend’s Heart Rate, anything or everything you desire, including the local Time. Want the Second-Hand on an analog face, turn it on or off. Want Digital or Analog time display, Want the Day/Date, turn these on or off, as you desire. Bands and Materials may be easily changed, choose from Leather bands, Stainless, Links, Sports elastomer Bands, however your use and venue dictates. Have a sports band for daily use, and have a elegant band for evening wear. You may easily change the iWatch Band, with no tools whatsoever.

iWatch Graphics. These two graphics shows the 42mm and 38mm iWatch faces and an overlay. The 38mm iWatch face graphic has an Overlay (the blue left and bottom edges) highlighting the 42mm iWatch face to show the size comparisons.

iWatch’s Introduction and Demo. Apple announced September 9, 2014 the highly anticipated iPhone 6 at its Major press conference at the Flint Center, Cupertino, California. After completing the iPhone 6 announcement, Apple’s CEO, Tim Cook mentioned just “One more thing…” a famous Steve Jobs saying, and went on to Announce the Apple Watch. This Video Link takes you directly to the iWatch segment of the Program, which announces the iWatch and gives a demonstration of its use and settings. The video is inspirational, as it shows how Apple, the Nation’s Largest Company develops and announces a new innovative reinvention of the Watch, a device that has been with civilization since the year 1530 AD.

▶️ http://youtu.be/bdyVH5LqneU.

Apple Watch certainly is not intended for everyone, neither is the Montblanc, a more limited audience for sure. Lets face it, “old fashioned electro-mechanical” wrist watches have an appeal to more mature affluent audiences, while possess “retro attraction” to the yuppie millennials. However, these classic mechanicals may be 42mm in diameter by 12mm, fragile, relatively expensive, and many amazingly keep terrible time. The iWatch has a 42mm face that rests 12mm on your wrist, and a second iWatch model of 38mm.

Apple Watch embodies many interesting aspects, as under its highly polished Sapphire Crystal is a brilliant OLED very high resolution “retina” touch-screen, that may Display hundreds of possible iWatch Faces. I’m imagining that the iWatch face is a rounded-rectangular shape so that the four-corners may house miniature Informative-Icons, or other Graphic Signals, or not.

Apple Watch’s Display is Strategic, meaning that with careful software graphics capabilities, one may design a “Perpetual Calendar Chronograph” digital iWatch face with unlimited complications, being mindful not to make it too confusing. On the other hand, one may choose an uncluttered iWatch face, or something in between, all user selectable.

🍎⌚️ Apple Engineers Completing iWatch Software. Apple has ceded the 4th beta of its iOS8.2 software today, largely dealing with the iWatch interface and its connectivity with iPhones. Apple is finishing up work on the Apple Watch’s complex iOS operating system software.

🍎⌚️ Sources familiar with iWatch development say the Apple Watch is currently ahead of schedule and on track to ship in the United States in March according to 9to5MAC, who has a very good track record and sources, in predicting product releases. Apple previously stated that the wearable product will ship in “early 2015” certainly not a very precise phrase.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch engineers have been “polishing up” the iWatch iOS operating system and putting the device’s Battery through very extensive testing. Apple engineers have also been “working overtime to improve the inductive charging system necessary for “contact-less” charging-up the device’s internal Lithium Polymer, LiON battery each night.” Tim Cook stated during an October 2014 press event that: “We think you’re going to end up charging the Apple Watch daily. Overnight, that’s what we think.”

iWatch Show-Floor DemoThis link shows an on-floor Apple-Show 5 minute raw employee-demo of the use and settings of the iWatch: http://youtu.be/rwv-3wZocK4.

🍎⌚️ iWatch Survey. Notice the Graph above drawn from the statistics from a recent extensive survey (conducted by finance company Credit Suisse) of current iPhone owners approximately
⌚️ 18% of iPhone Owners will Definitely Buy iWatch
⌚️ 10% of iPhone Owners will Probably Buy iWatch
⌚️ 27% of iPhone Owners will May Buy iWatch
⌚️ 27% of iPhone Owners will Probably Not Buy iWatch
⌚️ 18% of iPhone Owners will Definitely Not Buy iWatch
⌚️ 100% of iPhone Owners that are Considering the Purchase of the iWatch

🍎⌚️ iWatch Survey Extrapolation Assumptions . Lets extrapolate these statistics further. For the 10% of those stating they will Probably Buy, what portion of this group will actually buy, lets estimate that if 1000 people in the Apple Store stated they Probably will buy, lets say 500 of the 1000, about 1/2 of this group, will actually buy the iWatch; Similarly, For the 27% of those stating they will May Buy, what portion of this group will actually buy; lets estimate that if 2700 people in the Apple Store stated they are Maybe Buyers, lets say 700 of the 2700, about 1/4th of this group will actually buy the iWatch.

🍎⌚️ iWatch Survey Extrapolation. Using the logic and assumptions above, lets restate three of the above groups of Likely Buyers, Probable Buyers, and Maybe Buyers, into a Single grouping of what we’ll call “Very Likely” Buyers
⌚️ 18% of iPhone Owners that stated they’d Definitely Buy, will actually Buy iWatch
⌚️ 5% of iPhone Owners that stated they’d Probably Buy, will actually Buy iWatch
⌚️ 7% of iPhone Owners that stated they May Buy, will actually Buy iWatch
⌚️ 30% of iPhone Owners therefore are “Very Likely” Buyers of the iWatch

🍎⌚️ Your Wait for Apple Watch may be over… sooner than you may have thought. According to news reports, Apple Watch iOS version software has been finalized. Apple is preparing a massive training session for Apple Store employees. The Apple Watch wearable device is on track for a March 2015 release timeframe, although no specific date is available. These news reports trim the previous timeline quite a bit. Fairly soon you may see long lines forming outside at an Apple Store in your neighborhood. I witnessed the unruly lines at 2am outside Apple’s Boca Raton store for the iPhone 6 Friday morning release, September 19, 2014.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch wearable device is on track for March, 2015 release, although no more detail on a specific release date is currently known. These news reports trim the timeline, and provide more precision on the iWatch release, then you’ll see the long lines forming at an Apple Store in your neighborhood. Prior to this News, Apple stated an imprecise phrase “Early 2015” as the iWatch release schedule. Another Senior Corporate spokesperson was even more vague stating a “Spring 2015” iWatch release schedule. Take a moment to view these beautifully produced Apple Watch videos.

▶️ http://www.apple.com/watch/films/

▶️ http://www.apple.com/watch/apple-watch-edition/

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Production will begin this month, January, 2015, whereas the iWatch was once scheduled to be rolling off Apple contracted lines in February.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Production Orders. Apple has reportedly ordered 24 million iWatches from their contracted supplier, Quanta. In response to this relatively strong initial production order, Quanta has increased its workforce five-fold, increasing it from 2,000 workers to 10,000 workers. It’s expected that Quanta will then double again its workforce to 20,000 as the Apple Watch develops its sales momentum as 2015 progresses.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch 24 million unit Initial Production Order. One may consider a 24 million initial order seemingly aggressive; However, if recent polling is correct, 24 million iWatches may be on the mark or somewhat conservative. Current polling indicates that about 10% of iPhone users are actually “Very Likely” to buy the Apple Watch; Combine this 10% in the “Very Likely” Group, with an even larger group of iWatch iFolks, that say they are “Somewhat Likely” may increase the total “Likely Buyers Group” by another 5%. If predictive of actual demand, this trend will stress the supply-line for the 24 million iWatch initial production order.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Time will Tell, this high level of predictive demand may give the impression of production constraints, although, having the effect of keeping iWatch stocks flowing out of Apple retail stores, as fast as inventory arrives. Our guess, for the initial 12 months that iWatch is available, there may be some 30 million to 38 million iWatches sold.

🍎⌚️ Think about it. IMHO, Apple “pre Announced” the Apple Watch in September last year for multiple purposes
(🍎) Apple Defines this new product’s concepts early, rather than the rumor-mills and leaks
(🍎🍎) Provides sufficient time for the market-place, the iPhone folks to digest this entirely new product concepts
(🍎🍎🍎) Six months of assimilation, the iWatch pre-announcement to its formal release, gives everyone time to imagine having this unique Wearable, a marketing marvel by Apple.

🍎⌚️ History of 2007 iPhone. Recall Eight years ago, on Jan. 9, 2007, Steve Jobs on stage during Apple’s annual Macworld conference, announced Apple’s very first iPhone. Starting off with the words “We’re gonna make some history today” Apple’s cofounder Steve Jobs tricked the audience by claiming he was going to introduce three new products: an iPod with touch controls, a mobile phone and an Internet communications device, knowing that all three components were built into Apple’s newly Announced iPhone.

🍎⌚️ First iPhone Announcement. Similarly, when the Original iPhone was Announced January 9, 2007, 6 months later its was Release on June 29, 2007. This 6 months duration gave the World, the Market, the Apple Analysts, and Clients an “assimilation” period to digest The New iPhone Concept.

🎬 http://tiny.cc/qe68rx The iWatch presentation given September, 2014 is presently being “assimilated” just as the iPhone was exactly 8 years Ago, January 9, 2007 at its announcement. Presently, Apple has sold more than 530,000,000 iPhones, and is expected to sell some 220,000,000 iPhones this year.

🎬 http://tiny.cc/cd48rx The First iPhone, 8 years ago (21m:15s into the Macworld Keynote speech delivered by Steve Jobs the iPhone is Reinvented).

🎬 http://tiny.cc/zx48rx. The First iPad was Reinvented on April 3, 2010. In sum there are over 750,000,000 iPhones and iPads in circulation, by year-end 1,000,000,000 iDevices enhancing peoples lives.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch 24 million Production Schedule. The News Reports do not specifically outline the reasons for Apple moving iWatch production up; However, there were vague references that “production yield issues” have been resolved. This could be referring to either the LiON Battery, Sapphire Crystal, the Touch Display, or a mix of the three. If the iWatch is as popular as we think it will be, Apple will need as much of a production head-start as they can.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Display. The centerpiece of the Apple Watch is an bright AMOLED display (newly designed for Apple) that is estimated to be more costly than traditional LCD screens Apple uses in its iPhones and iPads, which are not AMOLED displays. According to Taiwan’s Apple Daily, the alleged terms of the Quanta deal limit Quanta from partnering with any competing device makers building wearable electronics. This News Report aligns with earlier rumors suggesting that Quanta had secured “exclusive manufacturing rights” for the Apple Watch, although some reporters are suggesting that Foxconn and Inventec may “muscle their way” into the iWatches’ supply chain.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Associate Training. iWatch training courses will commence February 9th through February 16th. The core training will take place at Apple’s Cupertino headquarters and a satellite office in Austin, Texas. Direct training will be given to one or two representatives from each of the 263 USA Apple Stores. At the completion of the iWatch Training, the Store Associates are then tasked to return to their Apple store, to train the Store sales staff. Apple has currently 444 retail stores operating in 16 countries, including 263 in the USA, plus an online store available in 39 countries.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Training is said to commence in early February; however, the Apple Watch release date is set for March. According to news reports, those who completed Direct Corporate Headquarters training will thereafter be training their Home-Based Apple store staff. This follow-up training will occur in the days just before the Apple Watch release Event. Apparently since Apple’s CEO, Tim Cook, told the pre-release iWatch story at the announcement of the iPhone 6 in September, 2014, Apple is not concerned with pre-release leaks from its 30,000 retail store associates.

🍎⌚️ iWatch, Apple Watch is the most personal iDevice ever. Apple’s goal has always been to make powerful technology more accessible, more relevant and ultimately more personal.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch represents a new chapter in the relationship people have with technology. It’s the most personal product Apple has ever made, because it’s the first Apple product to be worn.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch. Apple took a very unusual step in pre-announcing an entirely new Product Category BEFORE it was ready for release. Granted, Apple announces its iPhones, iPads, MacBooks before actual product release; however, for these MAC and iDevices, there was a 7 to 11 day period one waited for delivery of the New product released. In contrast Apple “Announced” the AppleWatch in late September, 2014 concurrently with its iPhone 6 announcement; however, Apple indicated then, that the iWatch would be Available in “early 2015.”

🍎⌚️ Apple will release iWatch in Early 2015. I can imagine Five vocabulary words for defining “when” in 2015 other than mentioning a chosen Calendar Quarter or a particular Month. Apple could have used these Four phrases: Beginning, Early, Middle, Late 2015. Late 2015 could mean November-December 2015, Middle could indicate May-June-July 2015.

🍎⌚️ What does “Early 2015” tell us? Since Apple chose not to use a particular Month like January 2015, January likely not what Apple had in mind. However, “Early, 2015” could mean either February, March, or April. Lets Add one more factor. Apple’s reports its financial results on a fiscal basis, where its 1st fiscal Quarter is defined as December 1st through February 28. Since the iPhone 6 is selling strongly, perhaps Apple desires the AppleWatch to make its Sales-Splash beginning in March of 2015 the start of Apple’s 2nd fiscal quarter.

🍎⌚️ Apple – One thing I have learned about Apple… “Apple does everything on purpose, with all aspects thoroughly thought out.”

🍎⌚️ Apple is Driven culturally to deliver. Apple is proud and patient with all product releases by “getting it right” technology-wise, market-wise, and timing-wise, getting most of the bugs out before the public see it, and before its critics see it. Apple may also desire to give its stable of independent developers, some time for iWatch Application (App) Development. Apple may desire the “kick off” the iWatch in its 2nd fiscal quarter of 2015.

🍎⌚️ Apple prefers to release new products on Friday for a Three-Day, Friday-Saturday-Sunday “weekend” sales splash. Looking at our Calendar, February 27, 28, March 1st, is the first weekend containing a March date; however, March 6, 7 and 8 is the first all March Weekend.

🍎⌚️ Apple Factoid to Consider. Apple is somewhat constrained in the fabrication of the Sapphire Crystals used on the WATCH and its WATCH EDITION product lines (the Sports models have hardened glass crystals not sapphire), Apple may be scheduling the Apple Watch in March giving sufficient time to build up a reasonable inventory of all the iWatch models. Its illogical for Apple to create huge anticipation, and not have a reasonable inventory of iWatch models to satisfy its Loyal Following.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Release Date: March 6, 7, 8, 2015, total conjecture though, as we have NO internal sources whatsoever.

🍎⌚️ Mobile Phones. The iPhone is mentioned in this article, as the adoption of the iWatch may follow the adoption-history of the iPhone. Apple reinvented the mobile phone with their first iPhone in 2007, 30 years after Motorola literally “invented” their very popular, however, expensive Star•TAC 8500XL. I bought this Motorola “Brick” 30 years ago for $4200 in 1985, weighing in at 28oz. I retained it as a souvenir of the times, then the most portable cellular phone.

🍎⌚️ 30 Million to 38 Million iWatch customers may be “voting” with their Wallets in its first 12 months of availability. Lets see how we get to these numbers. Looking at Apple’s iPhone sales history, it showed an adoption rate of 11 million iPhones in its 1st fiscal year (21 million in the 2nd fiscal year, 39 million in year 3, 72 million in year 4, 125 million units sold in the 5th year of the iPhone). Our guess is the adoption rate of the AppleWatch may follow the growth rate history of the iPhone, as both devices (iPhone and iWatch) were totally new Apple products.

🍎⌚️ iPhones are currently selling at 72 million units per quarter, capturing 51.3% of all global smartphone activations, 3 Times that of Samsung’s. With about 469 million iPhones currently in circulation, if 6.5% iPhone users adopt the iWatch, this may yield about 30 million iWatch 1st year sales, then say 60 million 2nd year sales, 120 million 3rd year sales… this are our guesstimates.

🍎⌚️ AppleWatch Likely Buyers. A recent survey by Quartz (QZ.com) shows that about 14% of iPhone Owners who indicated that they are either Very Likely, Likely and Somewhat Likely to buy the new iWatch this year; however, some 86% are not interested in adopting for the iWatch in 2015. The Quartz Survey chart is displayed for your review. Lets use this 14% extrapolation.

🍎⌚️ Apple’s recent Annual Report, iPhone Sales represents about $101.9 Billion in iPhone Sales, for 169.2 Million iPhone unit sales, amounts to an average iPhone sales price of $602.72/unit. If in fact for the first 12 months of iWatch sales, 14% of iPhone owners buy the AppleWatch, then about 23 million iWatches may be purchased.

🍎⌚️ 469,000 iPhones reportedly are in Circulation, remove the 169 million iPhones sold last year, lets consider the remaining 300 million iPhone owners that purchased iPhones in years before 2014. Lets assume just 5% of those remaining iPhone owners buy the iWatch, this would add 15 million of possible iWatch buyers. Combine these two assumptions 23 million + 15 million = 38 million iWatch sales may occur in the first 12 months of AppleWatch sales.

🍎⌚️ Apple’s creation of the iPhone seven years ago, Apple literally reinvented the mobile cellular phone, into a very crowded market; However Apple literally changed the Mobile Phone into a “SmartPhone” weighing in at 6oz and sized at 0.46″x2.4″x4.5″ that continues to be improved and enhanced, today with their iPhone 6 sized at 0.27″x2.6″x5.4″ and 6 Plus sized at 0.28″x3.1″x6.2″.

🍎 Today, January 9th is the 8th Anniversary for the First iPhone. This was a great Day for Apple and an incredible Proud Day for Steve Jobs!

🍎 See the First Look at the iPhone, 8 years ago: <u http://tiny.cc/jsl7rx (21m:50s into the Keynote speech delivered by Steve Jobs as the very First iPhone is Announced).

🍎 iWatch 🍎 Apple Watch – Apple’s Entry into Electronic Wearables

🍎⌚️ Mobile Phones. 22 years after the Motorola 8500XL known as “the Brick”, Apple reinvented the mobile phone with their first iPhone in 2007, which was so much more than a mobile phone, literally a “smartphone” weighing in at 6oz and about 1/4″ thin, 2.5″x0.26″x4.0″ that Apple continues to enhanced with the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus.

🍎⌚️ Apple’s critics reported that Apple has no business getting into the mature field of experienced mobile phone makers.

🍎⌚️ In 7 years Apple has delivered 500,000,000 premium priced iPhones, and are now selling iPhone 6 and 6+ at a pace well over 200,000,000 yearly. Not a typo, Apple is currently selling premium iPhones at a pace of 72 million units reportedly per calendar quarter with a profit margin over 30%. Its been also been reported that, based on actual cellular activations, iPhone 6 models were 51.3% of all global smartphone sales in December, 2014, outselling Samsung 3-to-1. Marilyn and I each own the iPhone 6 Plus and love them.

🍎⌚️ Tablets. Similarly, tablets were available several years before Apple reinvented it with the iPad in 2010. Apple carefully examined how Apple could develop such a device that folks would really want and use. Apple’s critics again reported that Apple was waisting their energies on tablets into such a mature tablet-marketplace, where Apple would be lucky of it could sell 5 million units in a good year.

🍎⌚️ The market place “voted” with their Wallets as iPads are selling at a clip 60 million units yearly with over 250 million in use today. Marilyn has the iPad mini, fits perfectly in here handbag, and I have the iPad Air 2, fits perfectly into my nifty DECODED black leather case.

🍎⌚️ 30,000,000 iWatch sales may “vote” their Wallets in 2015. Looking at Apple’s iPhone sales history, they show an adoption rate of 11 million units in its 1st fiscal year (21 million 2nd fiscal year, 39 million 3rd year, 72 million 4th year, 125 million 5th year) compared to current iPhone sales of 72 million units per quarter. With about 450 million iPhones currently in circulation, if 6.5% iPhone users adopt the iWatch, this may yield about 30 million iWatch 1st year sales, then 60 million 2nd year sales, 120 million 3rd year sales, your guess thereafter…

🍎⌚️ Watch. Some Watch history. The watch which was developed in the 16th century (circa 1530) was a mechanical device, powered by winding a mainspring which turned gears which moved the hands, and kept time with a rotating balance wheel. Most of the subsequent 500 year history of watches was devoted to refining the mechanical watch.

🍎⌚️ The Quartz Watch in the 1960s, which ran on electricity and kept time with a vibrating quartz crystal, proved a radical departure for the industry. During the 1980s quartz watches took over the market from mechanical watches, an event referred to as the “quartz crisis”. Although mechanical watches still sell at the high end of the market, the vast majority of watches now have quartz movements.

🍎⌚️ The origin of the word “Watch” is that it came from the Old English word woecce which meant “watchman”, because it was used by town watchmen to keep track of their shifts. Another says that the term came from 17th century sailors, who used the new mechanisms to time the length of their shipboard watches (duty shifts).

🍎⌚️ First watches were strictly mechanical, driven by spring-powered clockwork. As technology progressed, mechanical devices, used to control the speed of the watch, were largely superseded by vibrating quartz crystals, producing accurately timed electronic pulses. Some watches use radio-clock-technology to regularly correct the time. The first digital electronic watch was developed in 1970, the Pulsar LED.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch. Apple again, is reinventing the Watch, certainly entering a very mature field, dating back to the 16th century, 500 years ago and the “electronic” watch of 1970’s, some 50 years in the making. Apple’s entry into the “Watch” arena may be similar to its entry into Mobile Phones, when it made cell phones literally “Smart.” With the iWatch, Apple will be making the timekeeping wearable very “Smart” too.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch. Apple has created three venues for their Wearable: Apple Watch, Sports, and the Edition, each containing many designs, metals, and bands, generating thousands of possibilities to reach a huge audience, with no compromise with its core capability. Presently I am wearing a RADO for the past 10 years, loving it. However, with the release of the Apple Watch, I’m highly motivated towards the Apple Watch.

Pleased you’re reading, with over 77,000 readers world-wide, growing by 2000/month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Story: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

25,290,651

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,000,000 visits as of December, 2014: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

Beyoncé has a thing for Exciting Accessories and her New Watch • Apple Delivers Millions of Watches TODAY

1429793388.jpg

Beyoncé is one celebrity who has a thing for Exciting Accessories in this case the Watch, as she was spotted wearing a solid 18 Karat Gold Apple Watch with a matching 18 Karat Gold Linked Bracelet. In case you just returned from a 7 month Vacation on Planet Neptune, the Watch is being Delivered in 9 Countries Today, April 24, 2015.

Apple Delivers Millions of Watches in the US Today, April 24th. Watch deliveries are being received in 9 Countries commencing today.

Beyoncé and Watch recently was seen wearing a Magical Gold Linked Bracelet Watch at Coachella. However, this is not one of the Watch bracelets available currently from the Apple Store. Beyonce, posted a picture of herself wearing a Gold Watch Edition on her own website. Nothing that unusual, but the watch has an 18 Karat Gold Link Bracelet, which currently available to the public.

This Gold Bracelet not unique though, because fashion designer Karl Lagerfeld also has one, something we learned after his bodyguard posted a picture of his Watch on Instagram. The strap appears to be a gold version of the steel Link Bracelet, and is attached to the Yellow Gold Watch Edition.

This Gold Link Bracelet is not standard option with any of the Watch Edition models presently, as the only “Apple” Link Bracelet available today is of polished Stainless Steel or with a Space Black finish. We can not place a price on this exclusive Gold Link Bracelet edition; However, it’s price may be around $20,000 for the Gold Bracelet plus $10,000 for the Gold Watch Edition.

Elderly Draco Malfoy impersonator Karl Lagerfeld also had his Watch, with his wrist photographed clad in this mysterious gold link Apple Watch. These two celebrities, one likely upsettingly expensive Watch.

The caption on Lagerfeld’s wrist glamor shot, posted on Instagram by his ebullient assistant Sebastien Jondeau, the Post reads “1st apple watch specially made for KarL!! Amazing!!!”

Questions: (A) Is Apple fabricating a secret CELEBS ONLY Apple Watch? (B) Is Apple pairing with celebrities to promote the upcoming entry into the super-luxury Watch market? Answer: YES !

Apple is definitely jumping into the luxury fashion market with its high-end-expensive luxury Watch bands. These wearables are supposed to make you feel good. But as The Verge pointed out, it looks like Apple may be withholding some of its highest-end “experimental” designs from the general public presently.

The Apple Store does not currently advertise or sell a gold link bracelet, even if you’re buying the Watch Gold Edition, with a starting price of $10,000. In fact, across all Watch current configurations, Watch Edition can not be presently ordered with any metal bracelets in the box. The “classic” and “modern” leather bands that Apple sells feature clasps and buckles that, like the Edition itself, are crafted from 18-karat gold components.

Jony Ive showed-off some new Watch-Band designs in Milan, none of which looked like this opulent band; However, there were many colors and bands styles not currently in the Watch product lineup.

Watch • Let’s Take a Look Inside the Worlds Best SmartWatch 

BULLETIN: Latest News from APPLE regarding the 3 Million Watch Pre-Orders

“We’re happy to be updating many customer’s “Status” on their Apple-Store accounts today {April 21} with the news that their Watch will arrive sooner than expected,” Apple Officials said: “…Our team is working to fill orders as quickly as possible based on the available supply and the order in which they were received. We know many customers are facing long lead-times and we appreciate their patience…”

Watch • Let’s take a look inside the Worlds Best “SmartWatch” • Our estimate is, Apple sold 3.0 million Watch units on Launch Day, may have actually sold-out Apple’s entire stock of pre-release inventory within the first 3 hours of availability.

3 Million Watch unit sales was abstracted from Slice Intelligence’s report, a survey of 2,000,000-accounts pool of on-line electronic eReceipts. While this 3 million units is equivalent to the first 3-Day weekend sales of iPhone 4, Watch’s pre-sales dwarfs all other smartwatch sales, and represents a new milestone in wearable “smartwatch” sales.

Since Grade School, taking things apart to see how thing work is part of my DNA. These renderings, [rather than a disassembly] take us for a first-look inside the Watch. Post Release, iFixit will likely publish a step-by-step teardown of the Watch. These graphics are not captioned as the components are relatively easy to recognize.

Latest News from APPLE regarding Watch Pre-Orders “We’re happy to be updating many customers today {April 21) with the News that their Watch may arrive sooner than expected,” an Apple official spokesperson said: “Our team is working to fill orders as quickly as possible based on the available supply and the order in which they were received. We know many customers are still facing long lead times and we appreciate their patience.”

Watch, with each Article that is published, I like to include some new information about the Watch, as this new Apple product is extraordinary. Personally, we fully appreciate the new Watch commercials {clip #1}… the Sounds, the Animation, the Colors, the Beat… having seen all these clips many times… Goose-Bumps for sure, take a look for yourself. If you don’t get at least ONE Goosey watching the first-clip, you may want to consider some therapy.

Have a great DAY


https://www.apple.com/watch/films/#film-welcome
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-welcome
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-phone-calls
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-messages
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-siri
https://www.apple.com/watch/guided-tours/#film-music
https://www.apple.com/watch/films/

Watch Sales are Built to Order • Watch Buyers Delivery Starts Friday April 24th 

Watch Launch is almost two weeks since it went Live on Friday April 10, 2015 at 3:01 AM Eastern. Watch Sales are likely to be Built-to-Order, as there are hundreds of Watch-Band Combinations.

Watch Buyer pre-orders on Friday April 10th, Deliveries commence Friday April 24th. Subsequent pre-sales shipped Daily thereafter as all Watch pre-sales are shipped. We expect that shipment have already commenced to assure Watches arrive at Customer front-doors Friday morning.

We believe the Watch initial production-run sold out quickly; However, we don’t know precisely how many Watch units were sold. A Financial Spreadsheet has been formulated, showing a financial model that suggests the initial production-run of 3.0 million Watch units, yielding Watch revenues of $2.2 billion for the April 10th pre-sale launch.

We estimate 3.0 million Watch finished Cases were in inventory on Launch Day. This figure was abstracted from investigative reporting from China who examined supply-line leaks regarding quantities of Watch displays, Sapphire Crystals, and S1 Electronics Chips. While this figure is equivalent to the first 3-Day weekend sales of iPhone 4, it dwarfs all other smartwatch sales to date and represents a milestone in wearable “smartwatch” sales.

Watch Sport model lead in unit-sales volume, selling 1.8 million units for a total revenue of $693,000,000, while the Watch, the middle-Tier model, lead in revenue, garnering about $851,000,000 versus Watch Sport $693,000,000. The profitability-magic of the Watch three-Tier model line-up, is Apple’s inclusion of the Watch Edition an 18 Karat Gold luxury model. We estimate that 50,000 Gold units were available for the on-line launch and at 70 Apple Stores at Launch generated $675,000,000 in gross sales.

Watch average selling price, the APS achieved a level of $740/unit sold. The total Sales revenues of Watch first day sales earned $2,219,000,000 (that’s $2.219 Billion). Our bet is the Watch Line will (on average) achieve a +60% gross Profit, yielding to Apple’s bottom line $1.33 Billion in profit for each 3 million units sold. If Apple enjoys 30 million Watch sales in its first year of availability, Apple’s bottom-Line profits will gain another $13.3 Billion Annually or $3.325 Billion quarterly. Accordingly, this new Watch product-line may likely increase earnings accretive by +20% to Apple’s quarterly earnings.

We believe the pre-orders of 3 Million Watch sales estimated, may be considerably below the total number of pre-orders for Watch achieved by the April 24th Lunch Day. As Apple is offering 38 different Models & Bands of the Watch, with no previous order-history to consider when projecting model inventory levels, we expect that Pre-Orders will be Assembled-to-Order.

Apple estimating the Model-Mix to build, however, it is believed that Apple pre-manufactured 6 Million Watch S1 electronics Modules and Cases.

Apple may execute Final-Assembly of each Watch pre-Sale on a Build-to-Order, based on the Customers’ choice of the Case-Band actually sold. This approach permits Apple to maintain more efficient levels of Watch Case inventories, while simultaneously shipping promptly to as many Consumers as possible.

1,150,000 (38.33%) Watch units sold Globally
1,800,000 (60.00%) Watch SPORT units sold Globally
0,050,000 (1.67%) Watch EDITION Gold units sold Globally
3,000,000 (100%) Watch Total units sold Globally

News Reports indicate that the first Quarter of Watch sales may reach 6 million units, and assuming our ASPs are close to reality Apple’s Quarterly profits could receive a +$3.3 Billion jump due to the Watch.

To learn more how Watch may work for you take a VIEW at these two brief video clips:


Slice Intelligence estimated that 957,000 people in the USA pre-ordered Watch on Friday, April 10, the first day the Watch was available for on-line sale, according to eReceipt Data collected from a sampling-panel of two-million online shoppers.

Each Watch buyer ordered 1.3 Watch units, paying on average $503.83 for each Watch for all models, excluding the Apple Edition Gold Watch, not reported in the data sampled.

Watch Sales = $1.562 Billion Globally with 3,100,000 Watch Units Sold on the First DAY • A Very Exciting Day for Apple and the Early Watch Buyers.

Most, if not all of the reporting agencies that have examined this Slice Intelligence Watch sales data, have mis-reported the eReceipt information. Here’s the Math and our Conclusions regarding the statistical data:

1,150,000 (38.3%) Watch units sold in the USA
1,800,000 (60%) Watch units sold out of the USA
50,000 (1.6%) Watch units sold out of the USA
3,000,000 (100%) Watch units sold World-Wide

Data Extrapolation. The primary data-point show that 957,000 buyers bought (on average) more than one Watch, actually 1.3 Watch units in the USA only. Here is the Math. If 957,000 individuals bought 1.3 Watch units, then 1,244,000 Watch units were purchased.

Apple has reported that 60% of their sales World-Wide occurs outside of the USA, then 40% of Apple product sales occurs in the USA. Accordingly, international Watch units sales amounted to 1,856,000 Watch units. Therefore Global Watch unit sales would total 3,100,000. The eReceipt data indicates that the Average sales invoice for all Watch sales was $503.83/unit, then the gross sales for Global Sales amounted to $1.562 Billion on Day One.

Among those buying an Watch, 72% have purchased an Apple product in the past two years (iPhone, Apple computer or iPad), and 21% of this group pre-ordered an iPhone 6 or iPhone 6 Plus several months ago. Nearly one-third of the group purchased two Apple products and 11% bought all three devices, in addition to their new Watch, according to eReceipt data.

Most Watch buyers, roughly 62% of the total number of buyers, purchased the entry-level Sport Watch. However, many Watch buyers purchased the pricier, Middle-Tier Polished Stainless Steel case, with more than one-third of these buyers paired the Watch with either the Black or White Fluroelastomer Sport band.

Most of the Watch Sport buyers chose the larger 42mm watch-case, with 71% overall selecting this larger watch-case format. Watch buyers were slightly more likely to choose the 38mm watch-case.

The most popular type of Watch-case is the Space Gray aluminum case, with 40% of Apple Watch buyers choosing this option, followed by stainless steel at 34%, silver aluminum at 23% and the Space Black stainless steel Watch was at 3%.

Watch Black Sport Band was the most popular among both Apple Watch and Apple Watch Sport buyers, with 49% overall pre-ordering, followed by the White Sport Band at 16%, and the more expensive Milanese Loop ($149 versus $49 for the black Sport band) rounding out the top three at around 10%.

Slice Intelligence, the supplier of the above information states they are only firm using direct-measurement of all digital commerce activity and customer loyalty. By collecting and cataloging actual shopping behaviors from online shoppers in the wild, Slice Intelligence precisely measures what the others have only been able to approximate, revealing new insights about online shoppers and their behaviors.

Slice Intelligence information comes from a methodology developed at Stanford University that measures and catalogs all online purchases made by consumers who use the popular Slice App to manage their online shopping. This refined data collection method enables impeccable, near real-time data.

It is important to understand where eReceipt data is obtained. Slice Intelligence has a particularly stable, high quality, large database. It provides a service to its eCommerce clients a method of tracking their sales receipts, retaining them for future access. This means that the data it accesses is reliable for its customers. It also gives it a source of 2 million customer pool. Author of the Slice report Jaimee Minney wrote the following points:

Slice Intelligence get permissioned access to email inboxes from users of our apps (Slice and unroll.me) as well as through partners who license Slice Intelligence technology to power their online experiences (i.e. The find, IFTTT, Gone!, etc.)

1⃣ The number of Watch sales, [1.244 million units] is based on Slice Intelligence projections to the online population
2⃣ Slice Intelligence’s panel is of 2 million people, 9,080 of whom bought an Apple Watch
3⃣ Based on Slice Intelligence’s statistical modeling and validation (including partner and client feedback), Slice Intelligence is confident that the numbers are representative
4⃣ Slice Intelligence abstracts these results of its sizable survey of its buyer-population, and projects to the USA population. Slice Intelligence has two major statistical reliability advantages over other methodologies
5⃣ Slice Intelligence uses extremely large sample population (2 million). Ms. Minney notes that the panel size is “an order-of-magnitude [exponentially] larger than panels by Nielsen, comScore, eand others”
6⃣ Slice Intelligence’s sampling is automatic, no human intervention. Since the data is supplied automatically from real e-Receipts, as opposed by any self-reporting, therefore the data has a very high degree of accuracy.

Two Watch Try-On Reservations were booked for Marilyn and I. On Friday morning right after I placed our 5am Pre-Orders on-line, Reservations for Hands-on try-ons were booked.

Our Watch Try-Ons were scheduled-reserved for noon Sunday, April 12. Briefly, this was as a totally enjoyable and fun experience. The sales folks at the Apple Store (Boca Raton, Florida) were excited with the success of the pre-order launch, proving strong demand. The Apple store was literally packed with an excited public and sales associates.

 We each had separate sales associates showing the different models, the 38mm and 42mm Watch, and a broad array of available bands. Most of the bands may be purchased separately.

 Marilyn and I had about 20 minutes to try-on all the different bands, with demonstrations of the Watch, its use, the Apps, changing the actual Watch faces. However, there was no sensation of time-pressure whatsoever. I fact after 15 or 20 minutes you would have tried-on just about everything in sight, which is what I did. In sum, the Watch is an amazing wearable. We can both imagine buying several bands to suit our Day, Evening, and Venue needs.

 We had a great time, and became quite comfortable with this new Watch. As to use, the operating system is very intuitive and everyone should be able to use the Watch right out of the box. Along the perimeter of the Apple Store their are counter-top displays where customers can experiment with the Watch, the digital-crown, the Contacts-Button, using the up, down, left, right swiping, Customizing the Watch-face. All very easy and intuitive. This is the beauty of Apple, use of the Watch is simple and easy, no rocket-scientists needed.

 When iPhone users update their iPhones to the newly released iOS 8.3 operating system (upgrade now whether or not an Watch is in your immediate future) a New Apple App shows on the iPhone home-page, clearly named “Apple Watch.” This App when launched will search for and “pair” automatically with your Watch.

 The Watch Companion App allows you to set up the Watch to your exact desires, color schemes, select from a good number of watch-faces; plus this App will “pair” to your iPhone via bluetooth and synchronize your setup to the Watch.

 Apple has made this process easy and seamless, requiring no technical knowhow. The first-time “pairing” takes about 10 minutes to synchronize your chosen photos, selected music and iPhone Apps that you’d like to be resident on your Watch.

 The Apple Store try-on experience was quite an exciting experience. Hats off to Apple’s team for this new technique for the folks that are interested in this new wearable Watch.

 Marilyn was delighted with the Milanese Loop band, so there was no change with her pre-order. Personally, I was undecided between the Milanese Loop band and the Link Bracelet. After trying on both bands twice, it was clear to me to select the Bright Stainless Steel Link Bracelet. On Friday morning I ordered two Watch units for myself, both with polished 38mm stainless cases, one Watch with Milanese Loop band and the second Watch paired the Bright Stainless Steel Link Bracelet.

 During our hands-on session, we were very pleased with the quality of all the Bands. The $50 colorful FluoroElastomer bands (aka the Watch Sports Bands) are a very high quality feel, they are smooth, soft, comfortable material. The Black Leather Modern Buckle is likely my 2nd Band, perhaps for evenings dining out. However, the Bright Stainless Steel Link band is very thin and elegant, rather than an extra heavy, bulky, chunky band, often seen with other Watch makers such as Rolex. For my taste Rolex Link bands look and feel heavy and chunky. Apple’s SS Link Band is the opposite. Its easy to imagine Apple or the Aftermarket fabricating an 18 karat Gold version of Apple’s SS Link band.

 We both can easily imagine having several bands. In my case a Black Sports band for weekend use, the Watch Stainless Steel Link Bracelet for every-day use, and the Watch Black Leather Modern Buckle, a stunning alternative for more formal evenings out, or just changing bands for the fun of it.

 Sdding and removing any Watch Band is a super-easy process, and needs no tools or special talent whatsoever. The Bright Stainless Link Bracelet is simply stunning, and removing or adding its Links for a perfect fit, is very easy to accomplish, also with no tools or special skills required.

 Following our Watch Hands-on experience, the Apple associates directed us over to the perimeter wall of the Apple Store where Watch units were attached to a wooden base and attached to a stand-up bar arrangement. Folks were spread along the two long walls, playing with 40 to 50 Watch display units. Marilyn and I toyed with the settings, watch-faces, colors, etc. I finished a bit sooner, and mentioned to her to take her time, as I was going to roam around the store, and excused myself.

 My mission was to interview as many Apple sales associates as possible as Marilyn continued to “joyfully tinker” with the Watch settings and menus. Other than making friends first, the next most important issue for me was to pose to all of the store employees the key question:

“…What percentage of the folks that came in for their Reservation for Hands-On trials, actually proceeded to go on-line to order the Watch of their choice…

 Every Apple employee that was in the Hands-On Trial area, stated that almost all of the folks bought Watches on line while in the store using their iPhone. A number of folks bought iPhones for the first time (switching from Androids, mostly Samsung smartphones) so they could use the Watch companion. In pressing the retailers for a percentage most replied “…90% to 95%…” some said that “…every Reservation they greeted bought their chosen Watch…

 Sunday evening, following our successful try-ons at our local Apple Store, getting back to business, I cancelled the extra Watch order paired with the Milanese band. Marilyn was totally pleased with the Milanese Loop band so there was no change to her pre-order; I’m now very happy with the Stainless Link Bracelet. Our hands-on, try-ons were a resounding success, being a very satisfying experience; plus the hands-on try-ons solved my undecided band choice. Now we both look forward to receiving our Watches in about 3 weeks.

According to data from Slice Intelligence, based on data gathered from 9,080 shoppers, about 957,000 U.S. customers purchased an AppleWatch model on Friday, April 10th. The average consumer bought an average of 1.3 watches, spending $503.83 per watch. Comparatively, recent research from Canalys revealed that some 720,000 Android Wear smartwatches have been sold in the entire year of 2014.

The most popular purchase was the Apple Watch Sport, with 62% of consumers getting it on pre-order day, for an average price of $382.83. Comparatively, the average price paid for the Apple Watch is $707.04. BMO Capital Markets came out with similar numbers in a survey performed before pre-orders commenced on Friday, saying that 60% of buyers who wanted to buy one were interested in the AppleWatch Sports model. Meanwhile, 12% were desiring the Apple Watch model, with 4% of the respondents choosing the Apple Watch Gold Edition model. 24% of the respondents were undecided.

When it comes to the AppleWatch Case-sizes, most buyers chose the more expensive 42mm model, a $50 add-on; according to Slice 71% of the buyers chose the 42mm watch-case size. The Space Gray aluminum case was the most popular among all buyers with 40% share, followed by polished stainless steel with a 34% share, and the silver aluminum sports watch case with a 23% share. The Black Sport Band was the most popular among both Apple Watch and Apple Watch Sport buyers at 49%, followed by the White Sport Band (16%) and the Milanese Loop (10%).

PRESS Release: CUPERTINO, California—April 9, 2015—Apple Watch™, Apple’s most personal device yet, will be available for preview and pre-order on Friday, April 10. Customers in Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, the UK and the US can try on and experience Apple Watch at their local Apple Store® or at Galeries Lafayette in Paris, Isetan in Tokyo, Selfridges in London, and select Apple Authorized Resellers in Japan and China. Customers can pre-order their Apple Watch through the Apple Online Store (www.apple.com) beginning April 10 at 12:01 a.m. PDT for delivery beginning April 24.

“We are excited to welcome customers tomorrow and introduce them to Apple Watch, our most personal device yet. Based on the tremendous interest from people visiting our stores, as well as the number of customers who have gone to the Apple Online Store to mark their favorite Apple Watch ahead of availability, we expect that strong customer demand will exceed our supply at launch,” said Angela Ahrendts, Apple’s senior vice president of Retail and Online Stores. “To provide the best experience and selection to as many customers as we can, we will be taking orders for Apple Watch exclusively online during the initial launch period.”

Customers interested in learning more about Apple Watch can visit their local Apple Store for a personalized session with a Specialist to try on, fit and size their band, and explore the amazing features of Apple Watch. Customers who want to try on an Apple Watch are encouraged to make an appointment by going to http://www.apple.com.

Starting Friday, customers can try on Apple Watch, Apple Watch Sport or Apple Watch Edition* to find the model with the size, finish and band to best fit their personal preference and style. Everyone visiting an Apple Store will be able to view all three collections and get hands on with Apple Watch Demo to browse and edit different watch faces, and learn about Apple Watch’s health and fitness features, Digital Touch, Siri®, Apple Pay™**

Pre-orders begin April 10 at 12:01 a.m. PDT through the Apple Online Store, the Apple Store app for iPhone® and iPad®, and select Apple Authorized Resellers in China and Japan. Customers who pre-order their Apple Watch can have it shipped for delivery beginning April 24. All Apple Watch customers will be offered Personal Setup, online or in-store, to pair their Apple Watch with their iPhone. New owners will also learn how to personalize Apple Watch by selecting a watch face, deciding which notifications to receive, setting up the Activity app, and receive an introduction to Apple Pay** and the Apple Watch App Store™.

Beginning April 24, Apple Watch will also be available at boutiques in major cities including colette in Paris, Dover Street Market in London and Tokyo, Maxfield in Los Angeles and The Corner in Berlin, and select Apple Authorized Resellers in China and Japan.

Apple Watch is an incredibly accurate timepiece, an intimate and immediate communication device and a groundbreaking health and fitness companion. Highly customizable for personal expression, Apple Watch also brings an entirely new way to receive information at a glance and interact with the world through third-party app experiences designed specifically for the wrist.

Apple Watch introduces revolutionary technologies including the Digital Crown™, an innovative way to scroll, zoom and navigate fluidly without obstructing the display. The Retina® display with Force Touch on Apple Watch senses the difference between a tap and a press, providing a new way to quickly and easily access relevant controls. The all-new Taptic Engine™ discreetly delivers a gentle tap on your wrist whenever you receive a notification or message.

Pricing & Availability. Apple Watch is available in three collections, Apple Watch Sport, priced at $349 (US) and $399 (US); Apple Watch, available from $549 (US) to $1,099 (US); and Apple Watch Edition, crafted from custom rose or yellow 18-karat gold alloys, with prices starting at $10,000 (US).

Millions of Apple Watches were purchased early Friday morning. All of the $10,000, $12,000, $15,000, $17,000 and $18,500 Gold Edition Watch units Sold Out in One Hour. All of the Watch Sports Watches Sold out in 6 Minutes.

All Watch models sold out in 3 hours, therefore those pre-ordering after 6am Eastern Friday, the delivery dates are pushing back 4-6 Weeks (from May 14 to May 28). As of April 12th, Watch “Ship Dates” are pushing back to June and July, see examples displayed below.

Watch continues to receive high traffic for on-line orders that commenced Friday April 10th. There are Several ways to Buy the Apple Watch; However, not following the traditional new-product-release procedure. In this article are a number of screen-photos of the Watch Models and their anticipated ship dates, as of Monday, April 13, 2015.

The best and easiest method of buying the Watch is using the Apple Store App. It was reported that at the peak of the on-line ordering Friday morning, Apple’s http://www.Apple.com website was stressing with internet delays and URL errors. However, there were no reported issues using the Apple Store App. Friday morning I used the Apple Store App on my iPhone 6 Plus to order Apple Watches for Marilyn and myself.

Notice the Retail Products App is different than Apple’s App Store application. The App Store is used to buy Applications. The Apple Store App is used to buy Products, check on the status of an on-line order, and to make Genius Bar Reservations, and currently to make Watch Try-On Reservations. This is the LINK which will take you directly to the App Store to download the Apple Store App:https://appsto.re/us/uV9xw.i

Watch Sales Projection Chart below displays all Three Tiers of the Apple Watch that was created early March, 2015. Among the many unknowns is the sale-demand for the Gold Edition Apple Watch. The three traunches combined total 6 Million Watch units, representing the initial production-run for the product’s Launch period. The Sports Watch is set at 3.5 million units, the Stainless Steel AppleWatch models at 2.5 million units, and the Gold Edition watches at 500,000 units, representing only 8.34% of the total Apple Watch production-run.

Changes to the product-mix may significantly change the overall gross sales values for the 3-tiers. This statistical model assumes an average Profit Margin for the product-line of 45% for all 3-tiers. Since all these figures are “educated guesses,” I kept the guessing to a minimum by selecting a single-average profit margin. Since Apple’s overall profit margin company-wide is currently reported at 39.5%, the Watch as a “jewelry wearable” earned a higher profit margin of 45% which in reality the profit margin may be significantly higher, perhaps 50% or more.

Reports from the supply-line say that 6 million Apple Watch units were ordered for the initial production-run commenced in January, 2015. If the pre-order sellout is a telling signal, Tim Cook and his production team will be stepping-up the number of production-lines to meet the perceived huge Demand.

What is the Difference with Watch product release and the Apple iPhone 6 product release… Simple outline
(A) With recent iPhone releases, on-line pre-ordering was made available two weeks before the Official Product Release at Apple Retail Stores. (This is the same for the Watch pre-ordering)
(B) With recent iPhone releases, the iPhone was not available to Vier or Hold and not available retail store sales until the official Launch Day. Recall the Apple retail stores covered their store-fronts with Black Drapes, in the evening before Launch-Friday adding to the retail hysteria. (This procedure differs from the Watch release, as Apple Retail Stores received display models for the public to View, Hold and Try-on [commencing 4/10] two weeks before the official Launch Day on Friday 4/24)
(C) Apple gave thought to invite the public’s View and Try-on of the Watch with pre-arranged reservations, so these folks thereafter, may go on-line and purchase the Watch with confidence knowing the model, band and the case-size and case-metal of choice. The theory is Wearable” products require more time to consider, therefore, the two weeks of try-ons will aid Customers in making on-line pre-orders.
(D) Apple on Launch Day, all Watch models will be available to the public; however, the folks need to make reservations for a limited period of time, so that the Retail Stores are not over-whelmed with traffic. For the Apple-FanBoys the hysteria is exciting, for the rest of the Apple Clan, long lines are aggravating
(E) After a few weeks, Apple may remove the pre-Reservation requirements once the Watch Supply-Demand dynamics are stabilized.

1⃣ BUY your favorite AppleWatch and Band combination on-line
2⃣ RESERVE your favorite AppleWatch and Band combination; however, this Reservation & Pick-up method is only available in only about 70 stores world-wide
3⃣ WALK-IN Sales Not Permitted Presently, therefore Do Not waist your time on long Lines to enter the Apple Store for the Apple Watch on Launch-Day, or Launch-Week. Remember Walk-IN traffic was encouraged when you Bought your new iPhone. For this new product release, on-line purchase or Reservations Only for the Apple Watch
4⃣ TRY-ON APPLE WATCH, You can make an appointment to try-on the Apple Watch commencing today. Apple Watches are not available for sale in the Stores; however, you can make an appointment to try-on the Apple Watches of your choice; Thereafter you may go on-line and order the Apple Watch you liked.

The GOOD News – Apple’s On-Line Store opened for Apple Watch purchase at 3:01 AM early Friday [4/10] morning. It has been reported that Apple ordered 6 Million Apple Watches for the initial Launch period, presumed to be a 90-day supply.

The BAD News – Apple’s On-Line Store was SOLD-OUT Globally, for the Sports Watch literally 6 Minutes after Apple’s On-Line Store opened for business at 3:01am early Friday morning. All Apple Watches were sold-out, all Watch Edition models including the $10k to $18.5k Gold models were all Sold Out world-wide in 60 minutes. However, this means you will still receive your Apple Watch, but it will take a few weeks or months later to receive it. The Earlier you Order the Watch, the Quicker you will receive it. If you delay few days, it may add a Month or two delay, before your Watch ships.

All Global Apple On-Line Store are Sold-Out of the initial production-run. Except for the first 3 Million lucky individuals that purchased their Apple Watch before 3:06am today, your shipping date has likely been “Pushed Back” to May 15th or later an undisclosed period in June or July. Above are “screen images” of my three attempts to buy one model for each of the three-Tiers of Apple Watches as of April 13. As these DAYs move forward in time, the Shipping Dates will be “Pushed Back” later into June and July, until Apple adjusts their production and supply lines to meet the huge Demand.

Apple Watch Critics. Another terrible call by the critics. It’s amazing to me that Apple Critics are consistently Negative, and consistently WRONG

The Critics told the World that it was ridiculous for Apple to get into the already crowded Smartphone market in January, 2007. Wrong, Apple has sold 750 million iPhones
The Critics told the World that it was ridiculous for Apple to get into the already crowded Tablet market in April, 2010. Wrong, Apple had sold 240 million iPads
The Critics told the World that it was ridiculous for Apple to get into the mature Wearable Watch marketplace in September, 2014 Wrong, again! Apple sold-out 3 million Apple Watches in several Minutes. Traditionally, Apple produces Millions of units in advance of the Lauch-Day
Apple Watches: 6 millions units have been fabricated for the initial production-run. Roughly 50% of this inventory was available for on-line pre-ordering, the remaining 3 million Apple Watch units will stock retail stores for retail-Reservation sales commencing Friday, April 24. It may be Months before Apple will have significant inventory, for direct walk-in retail sales, without reservations.
Notice to All Critics. Today Apple Watches are All Sold Out due to Incredible Demand. Launch-Day is April 24th. Online Apple Watch pre-ordering and try-on for the Apple Watch Watch started Today
Notice to Investment Bankers. Apple Watch is Sold-Out, Apple Edition Gold Watches are Sold-Out, Apple Sports Watch is Sold-Out. Incredible demand has caused back-order status for all models across the entire line of Apple Watches. Some IB firms downgraded $AAPL because of back-order status. They Are NUTS. No Critic anticipated Millions of Apple Watches selling out in the first two Hours, particularly for a NEW product. The Critics said “no one would want the useless Apple Watch” and “no one would buy it” WRONG
Apple iPhone Launches recall, Apple doubled its iPhone 4 pre-release day inventory to 3 million units and sold out in three days. Apple thereafter, doubled its pre-release inventory to 6 million units for the iPhone 5 and it sold out in three days; Then Apple doubled again its pre-release inventory for the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus to 12 million units and they sold out of all models in three days.

(A) If you know Exactly what you want, case, band, size, metal, order AppleWatch online for delivery directly to your Home on Friday morning, April 24th. Apple’s tradition, if you are not pleased with your on-line purchase when received, you may go to your local Apple Store to make a change or refund, or ship it back to Apple’s On-Line Apple Store Return Center; however, in eather case, save all the packaging.

(B) If you Know what you want, however, you want to try it on, as you may desire to change the Band or the Case size, make your best selection on April 10th and Book a RESERVATION for April 24th, or next available Reservation Date, at your local Apple Store; Reservation Appointments are the only way to get into the Apple Store on the 24th, to fine-tune your selection and pick-up your Apple Watch.

Know the circumference of your Wrist, My wrist measures 170mm (Large), Marilyn wrist is 155mm (Medium); once your wrist is measured you’ll know what AppleWatch defines band-size by: “Small,” “Medium,” or “Large” for Apple band sizes. The Apple Watch site defines S,M,L determined by the circumference of your wrist. The Apple Store Sizing Charts are displayed below.

Know the Watch Model you desire: Sports, Apple Watch or Apple Edition, prices starting from $349, $549, $10,000 respectively. Almost there.. you need to choose the Watch-Case size, as Apple provides two Case sizes: Do you want the 38mm watch-case or the 42mm watch-case. I’m relatively small Wristed, therefore the 38mm Case may be the choice for me.

 Many Millennials and some Elders really enjoy Big Watches, rendering the 42mm desirable. Apple has designed the Apple Watch with many band materials and multiple color choices, for every-day use and fashion in mind. Therefore folks may prefer to satisfy their style needs and use requirements.

Apple Watch On-Line Ordering or Reservation Experience. If you are anxious to own the Apple Watch, perform the steps mentioned before Friday, April 10th.

With my particular Apple Watch choice, I’ve got THREE watches and bands to pick between. Marilyn has not looked on-line as of today, but she will before Friday. Likely she’ll get the Apple Watch, and the band choice is yet to be made.

(A) Apple Watch with 38mm Space Black watch-case with the Black Sports Band, my likely pick, or

(B) Apple Watch with 38mm Space Black watch-case with the Space Black Bracelet Band, or the Milanese Band, quite an elegant combination. Do not forget the AppleCare+ for the Apple Watch, gives you 2 years of Warranty plus Accident Coverage.

Extensive Surveys say that over 200 millions of folks reach for their iPhone on average, 10 Times per Hour, about every 6 munutes. This means Folks are repeatedly having to retrieve their iPhone from their Pocket, Purse, or Briefcase. Not a big deal, and surely more convenient than having to start-up a laptop or PC to visualize SMS Text Messaging, eMails, or Appointment Calendars.

With the Apple Watch, iPhone communications, texts, Facebook posts, Tweets, phone calls, calendar reminders come to your attention through to your Apple Watch, with several Taps on your Wrist with Apple Watch’s internal Taptic Engine, a very subtle way to notice who is “calling” you.

Imaging being in a Conference Room, a Noisy Sports event, in the Movie theater, or on the Train or Subway, The Tap “tells” you what’s going on with minimal distraction. If you are committed in a Conference setting, you’ll know whose “calling” and you can decide if that Contact is worthy of excusing yourself from the venue. If your child’s School is calling, that may motivate you to leave the venue, and answer that “Call.” The “call” is communicated to you without having to find and expose your iPhone, and perhaps distract the folks with you.

Simply put, with the Apple Watch strapped onto your wrist, as a text message comes to your iPhone, the Taptic engine, sends a silent Tap or Two directly to the Apple Watch’s Taptic Engine, which is a silent and subtle, “notification” telling you that a Message has been just sent to you. It would feel like someone Tapping, one or more times onto your Watch-Face, which would be felt on your Wrist.

Presumably, these gentle Taps will motivate you to slight turn (rotate) your wrist a 1/4 turn or so, at which time your Apple Watch display “wakes up” giving you a very subtly opportunity to visually-notice who communicated with you, including an abbreviated display of the Text Message, eMail, Caller ID, an Appointment Reminder, an Timer Alarm, without having to find and “wake up” your iPhone.

WiFi Communicate with your Apple Watch. If you are home or in the office in an active WiFi area, you could have your iPhone charging in the Kitchen, or the iPhone could be in your Office, and your Apple Watch will receive these signals through the WiFi, while you are in the Yard, Family Room or in someone else’s Office or Conference Room.

Apple Watch not in a WiFi zone, no problem, the Apple Watch communicates with your iPhone using Very-Low-Power bluetooth connectivity. The Apple Watch automatically changes connectivity as you move into or away from a trusted WiFi zone.

A Tap onto the Apple Watch’s display, is a very convenient way to act upon an incoming communication, without having to get your iPhone 6 or 6 Plus from your Pocket, Purse or BriefCase.

Force Touch is a New iOS Operating System command that represents a really BIG deal, and it may be classified as the most important development to the mobile user interface since Apple created Multi-Touch, a Key component behind the Touch-Screen commands, “swiping and typing” on the display for messaging, or selecting menu choices. Force Touch and the corresponding Taptic Engine are two New principle features built into Apple’s new Apple Watch.

Force Touch is “activated” by making a gentle more sustained Press onto the Display (as opposed to a brief Tap). When applying a subtle Press onto the Display, the iOS will show Menu Items that are contextual appropriate to what is being Displayed on the Apple Watch, a feature that surely will subsequently be made available on the next iteration of the iPhone, perhaps the iPhone 7.

 Electronically, the Force Touch operation requires a new Display that has a microscopic Electronic-Grid that is imbedded within the Retina-Display, Force Touch is capable of noticing the difference between a simple Tap, Swipe, and a Press onto the display.

Force Touch may also represents a fundamental turning point in the iPhone, as an iOS milestone. Surely Apple will include Force Touch in the new iPhones iterations, along with a Taptic Engine that produces an oscillation (vibrations which the user feels), Most people buying iPhone 6 and 6 Plus will want to upgrade their iPhone in order to have the new feature. It is that big of a deal.

More on What is Force Touch and the Taptic Engine. Another simple example, is to think of the virtual keyboard on your iPhone, and being able to feel a click as you “type” on each letter. Internally, the Pressure of a Tap (or the area of screen that your finger comes in contact with) is registered and translates the Pressure as a Force-Touch gesture.

The Taptic Engine is a feedback method that produces a small vertical-vibration from an electromagnetic “motor” Apple calls this the Taptic Engine. The end result is that when you press down on the screen, it feels like you are pressing down a key on a traditional keyboard.

Force Touch opens an additional user interface layer, bringing much more functionality to the iPhone, including shortcuts, acceleration dependent on pressure (like fast-forwarding video depending on how hard you press on the screen), and new ways of dragging and dropping items. The user is able to feel each click, bump, and drag, instead of just touching a piece of glass.


HEADLINE – Watch Math. For Each 1.0% of iPhone Users (that’s 1% of the 218,180,000 iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 users) that buy Watch, APPLE Earns $1.483 Billion in Annual Gross Profits. Here’s the math and how we get there…

Apple hosted its Important Apple Watch Event March 9th, 2015. Apple Sprang Forward – WATCH Available April 24, PreOrder online April 10th. Apple’s presentation describes their intention of reinventing the Watch once created in the 16th century.

Apple, recall it did not invent the smartphone, they reinvented it with their iPhone in 2007 having delivered 700 million iPhones; Apple did not invent the Tablet, they reinvented it with their iPad in 2010 having delivered 240 million iPads. Now Apple reinvents the Wrist-Watch with its Watch in 2015 projected to sell between 20-to-35 million iWatches in its first year.

Apple Watch is “the beginning of the end of the traditional Wrist-Watch for the “over 30 crowd ” as many switch to the iWatch. For Millennials, Apple Watch may likely be their very First Watch, as most of the 13 to 30 year olds simply don’t wear Watches, they tell time with their iPhones.

Apple Watch is an amazing Companion to Apple’s iPhone (certainly not an iPhone replacement). Apple has now sold and delivered 700 Million iPhones world wide. Not bad considering the Apple critics screamed… Apple has no business entering an already crowded smartphone marketplace in January, 2007.

Apple Watch Sales Projection. We now know the pricing for the Three Tiers of Apple Watch Models and Bands. Accordingly, I’ve dusted off my trusty HP19BII calculator (in truth my calculator is an amazing 19BII business consultant emulation App by RLM Tools, here’s the $4.99 App Review: http://tiny.cc/qbhyvx Alternatively you can buy the HB19BII on Amazon currently priced for $290 New or $80 Used).

 Our projections for the sales of the initial production of 6 million Apple Watches are displayed in a simple spread-sheet format. We’ve projected 3.5 million Apple Sports Watches will be sold plus 2,000,000 mid-tier Apple Watches and 500,000 Apple Edition Watches, as the product sales-mix; of course our figures are not factual whatsoever.

Apple Watch Average Selling Price for the Sports Watch Tier. The largest number of sales will likely occur for the Sports Watch. Factually, Apple states that it will sell the 38mm SportsWatch for $350 and the 42mm SportsWatch will sell for $400. Accordingly we are assuming that the unit-sales will occur evenly between the two Sports Watches models, resulting in an ASP, Average Selling Price of $375.

Apple Watch Average Selling Price for the Apple Watch Tier. The Apple Watch will sell at $550 for the lowest priced Apple Watch, leading to a top price of $1100 for the Stainless Steel Bracelet band, leading us to a Weighted ASP of $750 which is $75 below the simple arithmetic average of $825. Personally, I really like the Sapphire faced, Dark Stainless Bracelet, priced at $1050 for the 38mm watch face, my wrist will not handle a 42mm watch-case.

Apple Watch Average Selling Price for the Edition Watch Tier. The Apple Edition Watch will sell at $10,000 for the lowest priced Apple Edition Watch, leading to a top price of $18,000 for the 18k Gold with the Gold Buckle Band, leading us to a weighted ASP of $12,500. Weighting these top-tier luxury models is the most difficult to project, therefore we chose to be conservative with an Weighted ASP $12,500 estimate.

Apple Watch Weighted Average Selling Price for Three Tiers of Apple Watch unit sales. If these projection have merit, then the Sports Watch will sell to 3,500,000 customers for a total of $1.312 Billion in gross sales. The Apple Watch will sell to 2,000,000 customers for a total of $1.500 Billion in gross sales, and the Apple Edition (Gold) Watch will sell to 500,000 customers for a total of $6,250 Billion in gross sales. The weighted average selling price is skewed upwards, largely because of the 500,000 Gold Edition Watches that may sell for an average selling price of $12,500 each, therefore the overall ASP for all three tiers of AppleWatch models equates to $1,510.

Apple Watch Gross Sales and Profits projected. Using the resulting Gross sales figures above, all three Tiers will generate $9.062 Billion in sales for this new Apple Watch product. If Apple achieves say 45% profit margin, which is likely profit margin for a wearable product, then Apple’s Gross Profit may approach $4.078 Billion per Quarter, or $16.3 Billion Annually, or $1.36 Billion per Month. There are not many S&P 500 Companies that generate this profit level.

Apple Watch Gross Sales projections in Perspective. The 6,000,000 unit Sales of Apple Watch projected, is based on just 2.75% of the 218,181,000 customers (current number of iPhone 5 + iPhone 5S + 5C + iPhone 6 + iPhone 6 Plus users) actually buy the Apple Watch sometime during the next 12 months from launch day, 24 April 2015.

Lets Play some Apple Watch Math Games. If the number of iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 buyers increases by just 1.00%, then the Number of Apple Watch Sales increases by 2,181,800 unit sales, generating an additional Gross Profit of $1.483 Billion Quarterly, or about $5.931 Billion/year for those iPhone 5+ iPhone 6 users.

Apple Watch Math Games Summarized. Therefore for each 1% of iPhone Users that buy Apple Watch, about $6 Billion in annual Gross profit is added to Apple’s Financial Results. Similarly if 5% of iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 users buy Apple Watch, then Apple enjoys about $30 Billion in annual Gross Profits. It will be most interesting to look back at this Article (a year from now) in review of Apple’s actual Apple Watch 2016 annual results.

Apple critics screamed in January of 2007 “Apple is a Computer company and has no business getting into the crowded, experienced mobile-phone arena.” However, Apple methodically reinvented the smartphone, released it June, 2007 fortunately ignoring all their critics. iPhone sales soared to 74.5 million for the 90 day period ending 12/31/2014, and are projected to sell 225 million iPhones for Apple’s fiscal 2015.

Apple again was criticized, similarly in 2010, for entering the crowed, mature Tablet marketplace… good thing Apple ignored that advice, as it again reinvented the Tablet with its iPad, having delivering 225,000,000 units.

Apple iPhone/iPad sales combined total about 925,000,000 iPhones and iPads have been sold into a crowded, competitive, mature marketplace. Apple has also earned a 99% Customer Satisfaction rating, unheard of in this industry. Critics are similarly questioning the wisdom of the Apple Watch.

Apple Watch represents the 2015 moment in time, “likely the beginning of the end of the traditional Watch for the 35 and over crowd” as many Apple iPhone owners switch to the iWatch for regular wear. For the Millennials, the Apple Watch will likely be their First Watch, as these 13-to-30 year olds largely do not wear Watches, noticing the time of day with their iPhones.

Apple Watch’s success is directly related to the percentage of Apple iPhone Users desire the added convenience of the Apple Watch. Keep in mind, Apple product owners have demonstrated, they are willing to pay the Premium Price for Apple’s superior products.

Pre-Orders for the Apple Watch begin April 10 in the United States, Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, United Kingdom. The Apple Watch will be available for preview, and try-on by appointment, at Apple’s retail stores, and available for preorder through the Apple Online Store.

Retail Store Sales for the Apple Watch begin on April 24. The Apple Watch will be available online or by reservation in Apple’s retail stores and select Apple Authorized Resellers in the United States, Australia, Canada, China, France, Germany, Hong Kong, Japan, United Kingdom.

Extensive Apple owner surveys tell us, iPhone 5 and iPhone 6 owners, about 220 million strong, about 10% to 15% are definitely interested in the Apple Watch within 90 days of its release. Those Surveyed as “definitely interested” in buying an Apple Watch in 90 days, translates into an Apple Watch sale, the simple math projects about 22 million to 33 million Apple Watch sales may result in the 12 month period from April 24, 2015.

 This Link takes directly to the Apple Store: http://www.apple.com/watch/

Apple Watch Magic. The AppleWatch pairs with your iPhone, so when messages, calls, texts, emails, tweets, FB posts, and calendar appointment reminders come to you, you will not have to dig in your purse, pocket or briefcase, for your iPhone. With the iWatch you simply rotate your wrist 30 degrees into your view, to glance at who’s attempting to communicating with you.

Apple Watch’s Simple gestures permits you to communicate, or take the phone call, if the call will likely be extended, now you know its worth the effort to get your iPhone in hand, and talk from it, the call being seamlessly captured by your iPhone.

Apple Watch App. The airline industry is delivering your Boarding Pass to your iWatch too. Fumbling for the iPhone or paper boarding passes to get through AirPort Security now becomes obsolete with Apple Watch. Same for Hotels, thousands are changing their room-lock-electronics to accept your iWatch to unlock your Hotel-Room, no more metal keys, the end of swiping plastic-coaded cards. The list goes on and on with Apple Watch.

 To view the Apple Media Event that was broadcasted at 1:00pm Eastern on March 9th, 2015 below is a convenient LINK for this very interesting and informative Apple Products Show.

http://www.apple.com/live/2015-mar-event/

 Notice the slides of the most recent, the 21st Apple retail store in China. Apple will be adding another 19 retail stores in china this year.

Apple opened its first retail store in Beijing China in 2008. The country has quickly become one of Apple’s most important retail markets, thanks to a growing middle class eager to own the company’s high-end iPhone smartphones, iPads and Mac Book computers. Recently reported China represents 20% of Apple retail sales globally, and Apple has earned a 25% market-share in SmartPhone sales.

Apple Orchestrates its worldwide Magazine Publicity debut of the Apple Watch. These efforts continue this week on the Cover of STYLE, a fashion magazine based in the United Kingdom. The cover image of Style’s Big Spring Issue for March, 2015 features model Guinevere Van Seenus wearing an Apple Watch and is accompanied by an additional two full-page spread inside the magazine that provides further details about the wrist-worn Apple Watch, including interesting hints about the pricing of the space gray models. Notice our list below of extensive guesstimates for all three tiers of the Apple Watch.

Apple’s March 9th Media Event may signal that the Apple Watch may be released sooner than later, perhaps earlier in April, say April 3rd, April’s first FRIDAY, perhaps the last portion of Match. You may recall we reported last year that Apple was “a month ahead of schedule in the Apple Watch development timeline“. Apple’s Spring Forward media event may signal that the Apple Watch may be available for on-line purchase, perhaps as early as mid-Match.

iF Announced at its International Forum Awards Gala in Munich, Apple Watch wins the coveted IF Gold Award for 2015. Overall, 1,124 products were granted an iF entry Label, only a few win the gold award for excellence in several categories.

 The Apple Watch competed with over 3,200 other designs in the Product discipline, the largest iF award segment that covers a number of commercial industries, including vehicles, medical devices, smartphones, computers, tableware, kitchen equipment, furniture, bathroom products.

 The IF Award Jury noted: “The idea of combining classic materials such as leather and metal with state-of-the-art technology to create a very individual fashion accessory has resulted in a delightful product offering a holistic user experience. The Apple Watch scores highly for each design detail and is an altogether extraordinary piece of design. For us, it is already an icon.”

 While Apple has discussed Apple Watch design and keystone features at length, the company has not yet presented the full hardware specifications and pricing details, likely to be heard at Apple’s March 9 Media Event. In a recent report, analyst Gene Munster estimated mid-tier Apple Watch models will retail for $499 to $599, depending on customization options, while the high-end Apple Watch Edition could sell for $4,999.

Apple Watch Tier Graphic. Notice the graphic below where we have estimated the average spelling prices, APS, for the Apple Watch. Most of those reporting on this topic are in general agreement on the ASP price range for the Sports Watch ($350 to $400) and the Apple Watch, the middle tier’s ASP ($500 to $900) depending on the band.

Among Reporters, there is little consensus for the pricing on the Apple Watch Edition, the 18k Gold Apple Watch. The ASP estimates range from $2500 to $10,000. Of course these figures vary largely based on the assumed amount of Gold that is incorporated in the Apple Watch gold case. Our estimate is, there may be 37.5gm of 24k Gold, then combined with 12.5gm of other elements to formulate 50gm of 18k Yellow or Rose colored Gold.

24k Gold Bars trading today at $1200 per troy ounce, lets compute the ASP, average selling price, of the Apple Watch Edition
⌚️ GOLD $1450 of gold metal in the watch case; add to this
⌚️ S1 Watch Chip $200 Apple’s S1 electronics-watch-chip and battery
⌚️ Watch Bands $550 for watch bands and bracelets,
⌚️ $2,200 Total Cost direct costs for the Edition Watch
⌚️ $1,800 Operating expense Corporate expense allocation per unit
⌚️ $3,000 Profit component per unit assume reasonable margin
⌚️ $7,000 Average Selling Price yielding about a 43% profit margin, relatively Low-Level Margin for a premium Jewelry product.
⌚️ $6,500 Average Selling Price Note, if there is only One Troy ounce of Gold, rather than the 37.5gm of Gold, then the Edition Watch Gold may sell for $6,500.

Apple Watch S1 Computer Module. Apple’s ability to surround their (New) products, like the Apple Watch, with connectivity and its ecosystem, this Article provides some insight on the S1’s operation, plus several X-Ray views of the “Heart” of the iWatch.

Apple Watch’s brains and heart is located in its S1 Module, a “Computer Package” housed within a unique sealed Module. The S1 represents a new level of micro-miniaturization, packaging literally Billions of electronic components and sensors into a single semiconductor module, hermitically sealed in resin.

Apple S1 System in Package, SiP, processor, memory, wireless connectivity transceivers, sensors packaged into a single, resin-sealed package. The S1 package contains an Apple customized application processor that together with memory, storage and support processors for wireless connectivity, sensors and I/O comprise a complete computer in a single package.

Apple Watch S1 Package is filled and sealed with resin to prevent any moisture intrusion and for structural durability. Very little is known about the S1, however, Chipworks (an enterprise specializing in patent and technology reverse engineering and support) believes that it has identified the Processors, the WiFi, and Bluetooth transmitters-receivers, the medium sized processor in the center at the top of the images.

 Since wristwatches were invented in the 19th century, people have been glancing at them to check the time. With Apple Watch, this simple, reflexive act allows you to learn so much more. We optimized your favorite apps for the wrist by developing Glances — scannable summaries of the information you seek out most frequently. To see them, you simply swipe up from your watch face. In an instant, you can glimpse the weather forecast, check out what’s next on your calendar, or find your current location on a map. You can quickly swipe through different Glances, or tap on one to go directly to its corresponding app for more details.

 S1 Chip. Massive constraints have a way of inspiring interesting, creative solutions. A prime example is the custom-designed chip at the heart of Apple Watch. No traditional computer architecture could fit within such a confined space. So we found a way to integrate many subsystems into one remarkably compact module, which is then completely encapsulated in resin to protect the electronics from the elements, impact, and wear. Configuring an entire computer system on a single chip is an industry first and represents a singular feat of engineering and miniaturization

 Because it’s connected to your iPhone, Apple Watch can present time in a more personal way. One that’s based around your life and schedule. You’ll receive real-time notifications for incoming mail, messages, and calls. So you can answer or dismiss them instantly. And since Apple Watch sits on your wrist, your alerts aren’t just immediate. They’re intimate. With a gentle tap, notifications subtly let you know when and where your next meeting starts, what current traffic conditions are like, even when to leave so you’ll arrive on time. At any point, you can simply swipe down to Notification Center to view what you may have missed.

 Apple Watch Notifications. It’s called the Taptic Engine, a linear actuator inside Apple Watch that produces haptic feedback. In less technical terms, it taps you on the wrist. Whenever you receive an alert or notification, or perform a function like turning the Digital Crown or pressing down on the display, you feel a tactile sensation that’s recognizably different for each kind of interaction. Combined with subtle audio cues from the specially engineered speaker driver, the Taptic Engine creates a discreet, sophisticated, and nuanced experience by engaging more of your senses. It also enables some entirely new, intimate ways for you to communicate with other Apple Watch wearers. You can get someone’s attention with a gentle tap. Or even send something as personal as your heartbeat.

 The wrist is a convenient area for collecting data about your physical activity, a task Apple Watch is designed to perform throughout the day. On the back of the case, a ceramic cover with sapphire lenses1 protects a specially designed sensor that uses infrared and visible-light LEDs and photodiodes to detect your heart rate. Apple Watch uses this sensor, along with an accelerometer and the GPS and Wi‑Fi in your iPhone, to measure all kinds of physical movement, from simply standing up to actively working out. This allows Apple Watch to provide a comprehensive picture of your daily activity, suggest customized goals, and reward you for reaching personal fitness milestones.

 As familiar as wearing a watch is, charging one is something new. So we decided to make it utterly effortless. In fact, our goal was to make Apple Watch easy to charge in the dark. Without looking. While being only partially awake. We arrived at a solution that combines our MagSafe technology with inductive charging. It’s a completely sealed system free of exposed contacts. And it’s very forgiving, requiring no precise alignment. You simply hold the connector near the back of the watch, where magnets cause it to snap into place automatically.

Apple’s March 9th Media Event will describe how to use this new Wearable Companion product, the iWatch. Apple’s team will describe the iWatch Configuration App, housed in your iPhone via the release of iOS 8.3. The App delivers a unique Pathway App, to transfer your iWatch configuration seamlessly into your iWatch.

Apple is the Master of Marketing, the Company has proven this repeatedly dating back to January, 2007 with its introduction of the original iPhone. Besides, the event being named “Spring Forward” the event is the very next day when we all advanced our “Watches one hour Forward” for the beginning of Daylight Savings Time in North America.

Apple’s Spring Forward theme was recited in Apple’s formal invitation was sent Thursday morning, February 26, 2015 to the global Media community. Apple will present many details about how the iWatch will benefit its users. The presentation will likely show Apple’s new Companion Apple Configuration App, that makes it super-simple to set up the your Apple Watch, directly from your iPhone, plus topics were not fully covered at its initial announcement 5 months ago, following its mid-September Announcement of the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus.

Apple’s Spring Forward Preparation. If you’d like a “warm up exercise” in preparation of the Apple Watch media event, the link directly below this graphic, is a Video Clip of the Apple Announcement of the iWatch last September.

Apple first introduced the Apple Watch September, 2014, Apple delivered to us a “high-level” comprehensive overview at what the product will be able to do to improve our lives. We remain uninformed about many other specifics like battery life, pricing for the high-end and the other two-tiers of models.

 This link will take you directly to Apple’s iWatch presentation that was delivered around the world September, 2014… it is definitely worth it to take a look:

⌚️ http://youtu.be/bdyVH5LqneU

Apple’s March 9th Media Event may also Announce other New Products, for example the iPad Pro, a large display 12.9″ iPad with enhanced specifications, Speed, RAM, etc., that has been rumored for several years. Perhaps Apple may announce a new version of its Apple TV, which is years overdue for revision. My understanding, there are over 20 million Apple TV boxes in circulation.

Apple’s March 9th Media Event will undoubtedly describe how we will be able to use this new Wearable Companion product, the iWatch. Plus Apple will describe the iWatch Configuration App, loaded into your iPhone via the release of iOS 8.3, that delivers a unique Pathway App {transferring information and configurations from your iPhone directly to your iWatch} utilizing a menu-driven system to Transfer all your Watch Settings and Notifications seamlessly into your iWatch.

Apples March 9th Media Event will provide Live-Streaming Video Broadcast World Wide to all Apple folks or anyone that has a Safari browser on their PC computer systems, plus all iPhones and iPads, the simple hardware-software criteria that Apple has used for us to qualify for the Live-Streaming Broadcasts. Having watched a number of Apple’s Live Streamed broadcasts, they are very professionally produced and scripted. In My Humble Opinion, Apple will open its Live-Streaming Media Event to hundreds of millions of iPhone, iPad, MAC and PC users, many of which are iWatch interested.

Apple’s Live Streaming : Spring Forward Media Event. The Link below will be activated about 30 minutes before the Live-Streaming Presentation is broadcasted everywhere at 1:00pm Eastern, Monday March 9, 2015. Note, If you click onto the Link before March 9th, it will likely not have been activated until “Game Day.”.

http://Apple.com/live

iWatch’s Introduction and Demo. Apple announced September 9, 2014 the highly anticipated iPhone 6 at its Major press conference at the Flint Center, Cupertino, California. The Video Link below takes you directly to the iWatch segment of the Program, which announced the iWatch and gives a demonstration of its use and settings. The video is inspirational, as it shows how Apple, the Nation’s Largest Company develops and announces this new innovative and reinvention of the Watch, a device that has been with civilization since the year 1530 AD.

▶️ http://youtu.be/bdyVH5LqneU.

Apple weeks ago commenced production of 6 Million Apple Watch Units representing its Initial Quarterly Order.

 Apple projects internally sales of 24 million iWatches in the first fiscal-year of sales beginning April, 2015, as stated in news reports, which Apple has not confirmed. Several other analysts project 36 million Apple Watches and more, in the first fiscal-year of sales.

Apple in my opinion, is likely not in a hurry for an early April release date, as Apple surely wants to “iron out all the wrinkles” associated with a new-product release; however, maintain an “April Release” as published. Also when considering the Apple Watch release date, towards the end of April, Apple holds its Quarterly Financial report at 5pm following the 4pm public filing of Apple’s 2015 Q2.

Apple Watch is the only NEW product-release, since the unveiling of the iPad at a Press-Event held January 27, 2010 and subsequently released on April 30, 2010 with built-in Cellular+WiFi connectivity, two weeks earlier the WiFi iPad was available to the public.

CEO, Tim Cook surely desires to hold the Apple Watch high in the air, with all of the software, hardware, App, and iOS system issues rendered as glitch-free as possible. If Apple needs a week or more to polish the edges, the Apple Watch may be released to the Public towards the end of April, like on Friday 24th.

Apple Watch early adopters, the Apple Loyalists, must be Impressed with this unique Wearable iWatch, its Easy set-up, Ease of use, Battery life, Connectivity to everything iPhone/iPad. If accomplished, the major issues the media-critics have been whining about, mostly focused on its battery life, should be silenced early on.

Emergence of early issues may severely hamper accelerated adoption by the folks; Except, yours truly as I’ll be literally on line early morning, at Apple’s Retail Store at the Boca Raton Town Center Mall. Presently I’m focusing on the Apple Watch mid-tier model, the Dark Stainless Steel Bracelet or the Milanese Loop

Unless you’ve just returned from a extended vacation on planet SATURN, you may know the Apple Watch is coming very soon. iWatch is scheduled to be released in April, 2015. April 3rd, is the earliest Friday in April, only 36 days from today, February 26th. Many have asked us, will there be a Pre-Release Media event, (say Tuesday March 24th) 9 days before THE Release of iWatch Inventory to Apple’s retail stores? News reports have been accelerating as the release date becomes closer to realty. The Wall Street Journal, USA Today, Bloomfield and other journalists, have been discussed the new Apple Watch line-up.

Uncommon with a NEW Apple product release are the hoards of media-critics, claiming the uselessness of this new product. The Apple Watch is a unique New Product, as compared to a new Iteration of an existing product, like iPhone 5 to iPhone 6.

Historically, the Original iPhone was announced at Apple’s Maxworld Expo held January 9, 2007 annual event the media soon after slammed Apple for getting into a venue (cellular phones) it knew absolutely nothing about, considering there was already a very crowded field of experienced Mobile Phones makers.

 The Same choir of critics reported that Apple’s NEW iPad was “nothing new and if Apple’s lucky, maybe 6 million units would be sold” in its first year. Since the initial iPhone in 2007 there have been over a Billion iOS devices sold and in circulation, half of which are iPhones, Apple selling into a very crowded field of smartphone makers.

Recent articles discussing Apple’s iWatch endeavor has given me motivation to take harder look towards generating some reasonable expectations that we formulated for the three-tiered AppleWatch lineup; We’re assuming Apple will fabricate and sell 24 million iWatches for the initial 12 month sales period, plus Apple’s disclosure of the $350 Sports Watch entry-price point.

All the statistics have been projected by us internally, with no knowledge of what Apple has actually projected. Several facts have been released to the public that we’ve used in our presentation: (1) there will be a 3-tiered iWatch model lineup, (2) the Sports Watch will retail for $350, and (3) all else is our conjecture.

Apple Watch Economic Model. The statistical-chart below displays what we believe are “realistic” sales goals, perhaps conservatively, with price-traunches for the three tiered line-up, Sports, Apple Watch, Apple Edition, metaled Aluminum Alloy, Stainless Steel, and 18k Gold respectively.

iWatch [Gold] Edition is the top-tier version of the AppleWatch. Its been estimated that the Edition Apple Watch may retail for an estimated $4500. Sounds like a lot of money. Although Apple chose to leave the word “Gold” out of the Top Tier Title, Apple Edition, gold is in fact the watch-body metal; Note, presently Gold’s raw-material cost is hovering around $1200 per troy ounce, gold watches are “pricey” regardless of who designs and makes them, irrespective of the internal electronics package or electro-mechanical movement.

Apply is now Buying massive quantities of 24k Gold bullion, but that’s just the beginning. Roughly 14.46 Million troy ounces of 24k Gold bullion that are purchased by Apple per year (assuming our guesstimates are close) must be Certified by Apple Metallurgists when delivered, for elemental AU Purity and Weight. These two steps are very complex and require significant Oversight by agents of the bullion-supplier and Apple. Dealing with the payments and receipts of $18 Billion as Apple pays for the gold bullion is quite complex.

Post Certification of Millions of Pounds of Gold Bullion, it passes to the secure Fabrication Plant, carefully measured batches of the Bullion are heated to 2,000ºF in special Gold Furnaces, then Apple Metallurgists mix the molten gold with other specially purified metal ingredients resulting in several unique specialty 18k Gold formulations, then poured into Apple Watch cast-forms, cooled, then the iWatch Gold-Blanks are removed from the forms and inspected, those that pass through quality control are machined and polished, for further assembly. The gold-blanks that are rejected, and foundry castings are not 100%, go back to the Furnaces to be repoured.

This scenario is highly simplified, but gives you a notion of the complexity of the process. As about $18 Billion of gold bullion is involved, significant added costs are incurred for Plant Security, armed security guards, “security watching the valuables and each other, throughout all these processes.

Apple is processing this gold presently in effort for their April 2015 release to their retail stores for sale. Apple is also presently installing into the Common Carriers, Apple Distribution Centers, and Apple Retail Stores, specially designed VAULTS and ALARM Systems to protect the Apple Watch Boxed Inventory.

Apple Watch Edition, Lets take the iWatch apart piece-by-piece, financially speaking. Let’s assume that the Edition Watch may contain 37.5gm of 24k Gold and the Apple Watch electronics module is the same module used universally with all three of the AppleWatch tiers.

Apple Watch Financial Array. The bullet-points below display the cost analysis for the Apple Watch [gold] Edition, all Edition iWatches are gold cased watches.

Current Spot-Gold price. Assuming the iWatch pure-gold content is 37.5gm of gold watch-case (our guesstimate) when formulated to 18k gold metal-alloy. If Apple’s Gold Alloy procedure starts with 37.5gm of 24k Gold, as 24k gold metal is fabricated into 18k Gold by adding presumably precise amounts of Silver, Copper and Zinc, therefore watch-case (without internals) would then weigh 50gm, due to the additional 12.5gm of Apple’s unique mix of metals, blended in its Alloy-Furnaces. FYI, currently (as of 2/27/2015) spot-gold is hovering between $1204 to $1219 per troy ounce. Recall the under-side of the iWatch is stainless-steel which seals the watch-cased Computer module, Lithium Polymer battery, and houses 4 biometric sensor components.

Apple with its team of the best Metallurgists on the planet, have developed several unique 18k Gold formulations that delivers 18k Gold Alloys with custom Colors offering greater Gold hardness and durability unique to Apple. Typically 18k Gold is “softer” making it more prone to scratching and scuffing, showing greater signs of wear, than with traditional 14k Gold alloy formulations.

The Most Common 18k Gold Colors and Formulations are Displayed in this article with graphics and charts showing. The common alloys of elemental Gold, Silver, Copper, and Zinc in various levels of concentrations. Notice in the 12 Gold Colors Chart, Yellow Gold contains Gold, Silver, Copper, and Zinc with Gold representing 75% of the Alloy. To produce Rose colored Gold, the formulation contains only three elements: Gold, Silver, and Copper, removing Zinc. It will be very interesting to know the precise Formulation of Elements Apple’s team of metallurgists have chosen to create its unique Colors and Hardness, never seen before in the Gold Industry.

Apple is Reinventing the Watch. One should not be surprised that when Apple committed to a Watch-Wearable product, again Apple is REINVENTING the business of Gold Wearable Watches. From the images that Apple has displayed, and as presented in this article, Apple has created several striking 18k Gold Colors never seen in the industry. My bet is the brilliance of the gold colors is not simply a photoshop magic act, their unique Gold colors will be even more striking up close and personal, when the buying public visualized the Apple Watch in their Retail Stores.

As a reference, a typical ROLEX watch and bracelet uses 150gm of Gold; however, the gold is contained in the base Watch plus its hefty Bracelet. The Rolex bracelet accounts for a significant portion of the total gold metal package.

Apple Watch Computer module $200, the same module in all Apple Watches
Apple Watch Edition’s gold uses 37.5gm 24k Gold valued at $1500 for an 18k Gold formulation, presently spot-gold is $1205/gm [math: (37.5/31.1) x $1205 = $1500 the cost of the gold component]
Apple Watch Form, Jewlers add “Form” value to the price of its jewelry creations, say $2300
Apple Edition Band, say $500
Apple Watch Edition retail price = $4500 (math: $200 + $1500 + $150 + $2300 + $500)

Specifically, people in the supply-line familiar with this topic claim Apple has commenced production of about 6 million Apple Watches many weeks ago, for the iWatch’s first quarterly production-run; just over half of the production is earmarked for the Sport model, with a third of the production-run allocated for the middle-segment stainless-steel Apple Watch, with the balance is the Top-Tier Edition production, about 10% for the Apple Watch [Gold] Edition models.

Apple Watch Edition impact on Global Gold Supply. One more thing, lets have some fun in determining what Apple Watch Edition sales may have on the World’s supply for gold. Here are some givens to consider
 Apple Watch facts and conversion factors: there are 31.1gm in 1.00 Troy Ounce, there are 32,150.75 Troy ounces in one Metric Ton, Global production of Gold is 2500 Metric Tons annually, spot-gold price currently hovering around $1205 per troy ounce
 Apple is currently produce 500,000 gold Edition Apple Watch units as its initial quarterly production-run
 Apple Watch Edition ramps up production to 1 million Apple Watch units monthly [or more] as demand dictates
 Apple Watch Edition requires 37.5gm of pure 24k Gold for each iWatch, guesstimated
 Apple Watch Edition utilized 1.2058 Troy ounces of Gold per Apple Watch Edition, extrapolation of a guesstimate
 Apple Watch Edition will consume 14,469,453 troy ounces of Gold in its First fiscal Year of production, equating to 450 Metric Tons of 24k Gold/Yr, which equates to over 5x Rolex’s current Gold consumption
 Apple will Buy $18.086 Billion per Year for 24k Gold Bullion to built its Gold Edition Watches, base on current assumptions and spot-gold prices
 Apple Edition Watch Gold will place a New Demand for 20% of the total annual global Gold production
 Reference #1. Rolex sells $4.7 billion in gold watches yearly, from an estimated 600,000 Rolex watch sales. Rolex watches average 150gm or 4.82 troy ounces of Gold per watch, equating to 2.894 million troy ounces, or 90 Metric Tons Gold/annually
 Reference #2. Federal Reserve Bank of New York stores on average 7,000 metric tons of Gold Bullion in its Manhattan vault.

 By Mid-April, 2015, we are expecting over 50,000 Apple Watch Apps on the AppStore. Currently, for an average iPhone user there are 65 Apps per iPhone. We currently have 418 Apps on my iPhone 6 Plus and 300 Apps on Marilyn’s iPhone 6 Plus. We are estimating that an average Apple Watch may have 75 Apps per Apple Watch. There may likely be no single killer app for Apple Watch when the iWatch is released (other than the iWatch Configuration App) as each user will have their “own set of Killer Apps.” One way to look at this new “Wearable” is that the consumer is getting 75 different devices housed in one Apple Watch. Several Analysts are projecting that Apple may sell over 40 million Apple Watches in 1st the year, which is a very high estimate but not totally out of line with other estimates we’ve heard.

Many of the Apple Watch details are still unconfirmed, typical for Apple product releases, most notably the three-tired segment pricing, Apple Watch may be the revenue growth driver Apple needs for this April-Quarter, typically a relatively modest earnings period.

Apple’s Sports Watch is configured with an satin Aluminum case with a variety of elastomer sports water resistant bands. The Apple Watch is housed in highly polished hardened Stainless Steel with two colors, with a number of elegant bracelets. For the fashion minded, the Apple Watch Edition is encased in a highly polished and hardened Gold case accompanied with appealing bracelets. If our guesstimates are correct, this new Wearable product-line may have significant implications for year-over-year revenue growth at the company.

If the last eight quarterly financial reports are an indication, Apple may benefit handsomely with this mid-year revenue accelerator. The first fiscal-quarter (Apple’s fourth calendar quarter) is where Apple has really outperformed, growing revenue nearly 30% year-over-year.

Led by the newest iterations of its iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, most notably Apple smashed all expectations and accordingly propelled the $AAPL stock to all-time highs, with no end in sight. Not to mention that many of the largest Investment Banking firms’ analysts increasing the Target Pricing to $150/share and seemingly other analysts concurring with increased share target pricing.

Apple’s mid-year quarterly performance are generally less impressive then Apple’s first quarter results. And while it is important to note that 5% to 6% year-over-year growth is still amazing for a huge company pushing nearly $200 billion in revenues, with an Apple Watch earnings injection during the seasonally slower quarters should be an additional catalyst for Apple’s stock trading prices.

As you may know, one of the Apple “low” growth quarters is the third fiscal quarter, that typically starts April 1st. With an iWatch April release date expected, the Apple Watch may be most felt during this quarter. Assuming forecasts are close to reality, Apple generally errs on the conservative side with their projections. The Apple Watch may add roughly 16.8% growth to the quarter year-over-year, considering all other product sales factors constant. However, being rather bullish on the iPhone 6 and iPhone 6 Plus, these “slower” seasonal quarters may be “not so slow” as usually expected by the “talking heads.”

The Big Question: Which Watch is for You? With the start of the New Year the specialty Watch Makers like Montblanc, Longines, Baume & Mercier, and others announce and display their new creations to the public.

Watches – Which is Best for You Comparing a robust “mans” chronograph with a modern gold iWatch with a red-band is eye catching, the primary purpose. However, when one acquires Mechanical-Chronographs with Complications in its Face, other than the watch-band, your use and visuals are Fixed. With iWatch other than your choice of the Gold, Stainless, or Aluminum alloy case, all else may be changed including the bands.

With the iWatch, Fixed only applies to your choice of how tall the watch body is, either 38mm or 42mm, and your choice of metal, Gold, Stainless, or Aluminum… all else you may change. The Watch Face may look anyway you desire, with Complications or not, thousands of possibilities, that you may change anytime. Directly under iWatch’s highly polished scratch-proof Sapphire Crystal, is a brilliant OLEM retina touch-display.

iWatch Face may display whatever information you desire, Day, Date, Graphics, Animations, iMessages, eMail, Weather, your next Calendar event, an incoming Call or Text, the position of Planet Earth in its solar system, your Heart rate, your Friend’s Heart Rate, anything or everything you desire, including the local Time. Want the Second-Hand on an analog face, turn it on or off. Want Digital or Analog time display, Want the Day/Date, turn these on or off, as you desire. Bands and Materials may be easily changed, choose from Leather bands, Stainless, Links, Sports elastomer Bands, however your use and venue dictates. Have a sports band for daily use, and have a elegant band for evening wear. You may easily change the iWatch Band, with no tools whatsoever.

iWatch Graphics. These two graphics shows the 42mm and 38mm iWatch faces and an overlay. The 38mm iWatch face graphic has an Overlay (the blue left and bottom edges) highlighting the 42mm iWatch face to show the size comparisons.

iWatch’s Introduction and Demo. Apple announced September 9, 2014 the highly anticipated iPhone 6 at its Major press conference at the Flint Center, Cupertino, California. After completing the iPhone 6 announcement, Apple’s CEO, Tim Cook mentioned just “One more thing…” a famous Steve Jobs saying, and went on to Announce the Apple Watch. This Video Link takes you directly to the iWatch segment of the Program, which announces the iWatch and gives a demonstration of its use and settings. The video is inspirational, as it shows how Apple, the Nation’s Largest Company develops and announces a new innovative reinvention of the Watch, a device that has been with civilization since the year 1530 AD.

▶️ http://youtu.be/bdyVH5LqneU.

Apple Watch certainly is not intended for everyone, neither is the Montblanc, a more limited audience for sure. Lets face it, “old fashioned electro-mechanical” wrist watches have an appeal to more mature affluent audiences, while possess “retro attraction” to the yuppie millennials. However, these classic mechanicals may be 42mm in diameter by 12mm, fragile, relatively expensive, and many amazingly keep terrible time. The iWatch has a 42mm face that rests 12mm on your wrist, and a second iWatch model of 38mm.

Apple Watch embodies many interesting aspects, as under its highly polished Sapphire Crystal is a brilliant OLED very high resolution “retina” touch-screen, that may Display hundreds of possible iWatch Faces. I’m imagining that the iWatch face is a rounded-rectangular shape so that the four-corners may house miniature Informative-Icons, or other Graphic Signals, or not.

Apple Watch’s Display is Strategic, meaning that with careful software graphics capabilities, one may design a “Perpetual Calendar Chronograph” digital iWatch face with unlimited complications, being mindful not to make it too confusing. On the other hand, one may choose an uncluttered iWatch face, or something in between, all user selectable.

🍎⌚️ Apple Engineers Completing iWatch Software. Apple has ceded the 4th beta of its iOS8.2 software today, largely dealing with the iWatch interface and its connectivity with iPhones. Apple is finishing up work on the Apple Watch’s complex iOS operating system software.

🍎⌚️ Sources familiar with iWatch development say the Apple Watch is currently ahead of schedule and on track to ship in the United States in March according to 9to5MAC, who has a very good track record and sources, in predicting product releases. Apple previously stated that the wearable product will ship in “early 2015” certainly not a very precise phrase.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch engineers have been “polishing up” the iWatch iOS operating system and putting the device’s Battery through very extensive testing. Apple engineers have also been “working overtime to improve the inductive charging system necessary for “contact-less” charging-up the device’s internal Lithium Polymer, LiON battery each night.” Tim Cook stated during an October 2014 press event that: “We think you’re going to end up charging the Apple Watch daily. Overnight, that’s what we think.”

iWatch Show-Floor DemoThis link shows an on-floor Apple-Show 5 minute raw employee-demo of the use and settings of the iWatch: http://youtu.be/rwv-3wZocK4.

🍎⌚️ iWatch Survey. Notice the Graph above drawn from the statistics from a recent extensive survey (conducted by finance company Credit Suisse) of current iPhone owners approximately
⌚️ 18% of iPhone Owners will Definitely Buy iWatch
⌚️ 10% of iPhone Owners will Probably Buy iWatch
⌚️ 27% of iPhone Owners will May Buy iWatch
⌚️ 27% of iPhone Owners will Probably Not Buy iWatch
⌚️ 18% of iPhone Owners will Definitely Not Buy iWatch
⌚️ 100% of iPhone Owners that are Considering the Purchase of the iWatch

🍎⌚️ iWatch Survey Extrapolation Assumptions . Lets extrapolate these statistics further. For the 10% of those stating they will Probably Buy, what portion of this group will actually buy, lets estimate that if 1000 people in the Apple Store stated they Probably will buy, lets say 500 of the 1000, about 1/2 of this group, will actually buy the iWatch; Similarly, For the 27% of those stating they will May Buy, what portion of this group will actually buy; lets estimate that if 2700 people in the Apple Store stated they are Maybe Buyers, lets say 700 of the 2700, about 1/4th of this group will actually buy the iWatch.

🍎⌚️ iWatch Survey Extrapolation. Using the logic and assumptions above, lets restate three of the above groups of Likely Buyers, Probable Buyers, and Maybe Buyers, into a Single grouping of what we’ll call “Very Likely” Buyers
⌚️ 18% of iPhone Owners that stated they’d Definitely Buy, will actually Buy iWatch
⌚️ 5% of iPhone Owners that stated they’d Probably Buy, will actually Buy iWatch
⌚️ 7% of iPhone Owners that stated they May Buy, will actually Buy iWatch
⌚️ 30% of iPhone Owners therefore are “Very Likely” Buyers of the iWatch

🍎⌚️ Your Wait for Apple Watch may be over… sooner than you may have thought. According to news reports, Apple Watch iOS version software has been finalized. Apple is preparing a massive training session for Apple Store employees. The Apple Watch wearable device is on track for a March 2015 release timeframe, although no specific date is available. These news reports trim the previous timeline quite a bit. Fairly soon you may see long lines forming outside at an Apple Store in your neighborhood. I witnessed the unruly lines at 2am outside Apple’s Boca Raton store for the iPhone 6 Friday morning release, September 19, 2014.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch wearable device is on track for March, 2015 release, although no more detail on a specific release date is currently known. These news reports trim the timeline, and provide more precision on the iWatch release, then you’ll see the long lines forming at an Apple Store in your neighborhood. Prior to this News, Apple stated an imprecise phrase “Early 2015” as the iWatch release schedule. Another Senior Corporate spokesperson was even more vague stating a “Spring 2015” iWatch release schedule. Take a moment to view these beautifully produced Apple Watch videos.

▶️ http://www.apple.com/watch/films/

▶️ http://www.apple.com/watch/apple-watch-edition/

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Production will begin this month, January, 2015, whereas the iWatch was once scheduled to be rolling off Apple contracted lines in February.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Production Orders. Apple has reportedly ordered 24 million iWatches from their contracted supplier, Quanta. In response to this relatively strong initial production order, Quanta has increased its workforce five-fold, increasing it from 2,000 workers to 10,000 workers. It’s expected that Quanta will then double again its workforce to 20,000 as the Apple Watch develops its sales momentum as 2015 progresses.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch 24 million unit Initial Production Order. One may consider a 24 million initial order seemingly aggressive; However, if recent polling is correct, 24 million iWatches may be on the mark or somewhat conservative. Current polling indicates that about 10% of iPhone users are actually “Very Likely” to buy the Apple Watch; Combine this 10% in the “Very Likely” Group, with an even larger group of iWatch iFolks, that say they are “Somewhat Likely” may increase the total “Likely Buyers Group” by another 5%. If predictive of actual demand, this trend will stress the supply-line for the 24 million iWatch initial production order.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Time will Tell, this high level of predictive demand may give the impression of production constraints, although, having the effect of keeping iWatch stocks flowing out of Apple retail stores, as fast as inventory arrives. Our guess, for the initial 12 months that iWatch is available, there may be some 30 million to 38 million iWatches sold.

🍎⌚️ Think about it. IMHO, Apple “pre Announced” the Apple Watch in September last year for multiple purposes
(🍎) Apple Defines this new product’s concepts early, rather than the rumor-mills and leaks
(🍎🍎) Provides sufficient time for the market-place, the iPhone folks to digest this entirely new product concepts
(🍎🍎🍎) Six months of assimilation, the iWatch pre-announcement to its formal release, gives everyone time to imagine having this unique Wearable, a marketing marvel by Apple.

🍎⌚️ History of 2007 iPhone. Recall Eight years ago, on Jan. 9, 2007, Steve Jobs on stage during Apple’s annual Macworld conference, announced Apple’s very first iPhone. Starting off with the words “We’re gonna make some history today” Apple’s cofounder Steve Jobs tricked the audience by claiming he was going to introduce three new products: an iPod with touch controls, a mobile phone and an Internet communications device, knowing that all three components were built into Apple’s newly Announced iPhone.

🍎⌚️ First iPhone Announcement. Similarly, when the Original iPhone was Announced January 9, 2007, 6 months later its was Release on June 29, 2007. This 6 months duration gave the World, the Market, the Apple Analysts, and Clients an “assimilation” period to digest The New iPhone Concept.

🎬 http://tiny.cc/qe68rx The iWatch presentation given September, 2014 is presently being “assimilated” just as the iPhone was exactly 8 years Ago, January 9, 2007 at its announcement. Presently, Apple has sold more than 530,000,000 iPhones, and is expected to sell some 220,000,000 iPhones this year.

🎬 http://tiny.cc/cd48rx The First iPhone, 8 years ago (21m:15s into the Macworld Keynote speech delivered by Steve Jobs the iPhone is Reinvented).

🎬 http://tiny.cc/zx48rx. The First iPad was Reinvented on April 3, 2010. In sum there are over 750,000,000 iPhones and iPads in circulation, by year-end 1,000,000,000 iDevices enhancing peoples lives.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch 24 million Production Schedule. The News Reports do not specifically outline the reasons for Apple moving iWatch production up; However, there were vague references that “production yield issues” have been resolved. This could be referring to either the LiON Battery, Sapphire Crystal, the Touch Display, or a mix of the three. If the iWatch is as popular as we think it will be, Apple will need as much of a production head-start as they can.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Display. The centerpiece of the Apple Watch is an bright AMOLED display (newly designed for Apple) that is estimated to be more costly than traditional LCD screens Apple uses in its iPhones and iPads, which are not AMOLED displays. According to Taiwan’s Apple Daily, the alleged terms of the Quanta deal limit Quanta from partnering with any competing device makers building wearable electronics. This News Report aligns with earlier rumors suggesting that Quanta had secured “exclusive manufacturing rights” for the Apple Watch, although some reporters are suggesting that Foxconn and Inventec may “muscle their way” into the iWatches’ supply chain.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Associate Training. iWatch training courses will commence February 9th through February 16th. The core training will take place at Apple’s Cupertino headquarters and a satellite office in Austin, Texas. Direct training will be given to one or two representatives from each of the 263 USA Apple Stores. At the completion of the iWatch Training, the Store Associates are then tasked to return to their Apple store, to train the Store sales staff. Apple has currently 444 retail stores operating in 16 countries, including 263 in the USA, plus an online store available in 39 countries.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Training is said to commence in early February; however, the Apple Watch release date is set for March. According to news reports, those who completed Direct Corporate Headquarters training will thereafter be training their Home-Based Apple store staff. This follow-up training will occur in the days just before the Apple Watch release Event. Apparently since Apple’s CEO, Tim Cook, told the pre-release iWatch story at the announcement of the iPhone 6 in September, 2014, Apple is not concerned with pre-release leaks from its 30,000 retail store associates.

🍎⌚️ iWatch, Apple Watch is the most personal iDevice ever. Apple’s goal has always been to make powerful technology more accessible, more relevant and ultimately more personal.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch represents a new chapter in the relationship people have with technology. It’s the most personal product Apple has ever made, because it’s the first Apple product to be worn.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch. Apple took a very unusual step in pre-announcing an entirely new Product Category BEFORE it was ready for release. Granted, Apple announces its iPhones, iPads, MacBooks before actual product release; however, for these MAC and iDevices, there was a 7 to 11 day period one waited for delivery of the New product released. In contrast Apple “Announced” the AppleWatch in late September, 2014 concurrently with its iPhone 6 announcement; however, Apple indicated then, that the iWatch would be Available in “early 2015.”

🍎⌚️ Apple will release iWatch in Early 2015. I can imagine Five vocabulary words for defining “when” in 2015 other than mentioning a chosen Calendar Quarter or a particular Month. Apple could have used these Four phrases: Beginning, Early, Middle, Late 2015. Late 2015 could mean November-December 2015, Middle could indicate May-June-July 2015.

🍎⌚️ What does “Early 2015” tell us? Since Apple chose not to use a particular Month like January 2015, January likely not what Apple had in mind. However, “Early, 2015” could mean either February, March, or April. Lets Add one more factor. Apple’s reports its financial results on a fiscal basis, where its 1st fiscal Quarter is defined as December 1st through February 28. Since the iPhone 6 is selling strongly, perhaps Apple desires the AppleWatch to make its Sales-Splash beginning in March of 2015 the start of Apple’s 2nd fiscal quarter.

🍎⌚️ Apple – One thing I have learned about Apple… “Apple does everything on purpose, with all aspects thoroughly thought out.”

🍎⌚️ Apple is Driven culturally to deliver. Apple is proud and patient with all product releases by “getting it right” technology-wise, market-wise, and timing-wise, getting most of the bugs out before the public see it, and before its critics see it. Apple may also desire to give its stable of independent developers, some time for iWatch Application (App) Development. Apple may desire the “kick off” the iWatch in its 2nd fiscal quarter of 2015.

🍎⌚️ Apple prefers to release new products on Friday for a Three-Day, Friday-Saturday-Sunday “weekend” sales splash. Looking at our Calendar, February 27, 28, March 1st, is the first weekend containing a March date; however, March 6, 7 and 8 is the first all March Weekend.

🍎⌚️ Apple Factoid to Consider. Apple is somewhat constrained in the fabrication of the Sapphire Crystals used on the WATCH and its WATCH EDITION product lines (the Sports models have hardened glass crystals not sapphire), Apple may be scheduling the Apple Watch in March giving sufficient time to build up a reasonable inventory of all the iWatch models. Its illogical for Apple to create huge anticipation, and not have a reasonable inventory of iWatch models to satisfy its Loyal Following.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch Release Date: March 6, 7, 8, 2015, total conjecture though, as we have NO internal sources whatsoever.

🍎⌚️ Mobile Phones. The iPhone is mentioned in this article, as the adoption of the iWatch may follow the adoption-history of the iPhone. Apple reinvented the mobile phone with their first iPhone in 2007, 30 years after Motorola literally “invented” their very popular, however, expensive Star•TAC 8500XL. I bought this Motorola “Brick” 30 years ago for $4200 in 1985, weighing in at 28oz. I retained it as a souvenir of the times, then the most portable cellular phone.

🍎⌚️ 30 Million to 38 Million iWatch customers may be “voting” with their Wallets in its first 12 months of availability. Lets see how we get to these numbers. Looking at Apple’s iPhone sales history, it showed an adoption rate of 11 million iPhones in its 1st fiscal year (21 million in the 2nd fiscal year, 39 million in year 3, 72 million in year 4, 125 million units sold in the 5th year of the iPhone). Our guess is the adoption rate of the AppleWatch may follow the growth rate history of the iPhone, as both devices (iPhone and iWatch) were totally new Apple products.

🍎⌚️ iPhones are currently selling at 72 million units per quarter, capturing 51.3% of all global smartphone activations, 3 Times that of Samsung’s. With about 469 million iPhones currently in circulation, if 6.5% iPhone users adopt the iWatch, this may yield about 30 million iWatch 1st year sales, then say 60 million 2nd year sales, 120 million 3rd year sales… this are our guesstimates.

🍎⌚️ AppleWatch Likely Buyers. A recent survey by Quartz (QZ.com) shows that about 14% of iPhone Owners who indicated that they are either Very Likely, Likely and Somewhat Likely to buy the new iWatch this year; however, some 86% are not interested in adopting for the iWatch in 2015. The Quartz Survey chart is displayed for your review. Lets use this 14% extrapolation.

🍎⌚️ Apple’s recent Annual Report, iPhone Sales represents about $101.9 Billion in iPhone Sales, for 169.2 Million iPhone unit sales, amounts to an average iPhone sales price of $602.72/unit. If in fact for the first 12 months of iWatch sales, 14% of iPhone owners buy the AppleWatch, then about 23 million iWatches may be purchased.

🍎⌚️ 469,000 iPhones reportedly are in Circulation, remove the 169 million iPhones sold last year, lets consider the remaining 300 million iPhone owners that purchased iPhones in years before 2014. Lets assume just 5% of those remaining iPhone owners buy the iWatch, this would add 15 million of possible iWatch buyers. Combine these two assumptions 23 million + 15 million = 38 million iWatch sales may occur in the first 12 months of AppleWatch sales.

🍎⌚️ Apple’s creation of the iPhone seven years ago, Apple literally reinvented the mobile cellular phone, into a very crowded market; However Apple literally changed the Mobile Phone into a “SmartPhone” weighing in at 6oz and sized at 0.46″x2.4″x4.5″ that continues to be improved and enhanced, today with their iPhone 6 sized at 0.27″x2.6″x5.4″ and 6 Plus sized at 0.28″x3.1″x6.2″.

🍎 Today, January 9th is the 8th Anniversary for the First iPhone. This was a great Day for Apple and an incredible Proud Day for Steve Jobs!

🍎 See the First Look at the iPhone, 8 years ago: <u http://tiny.cc/jsl7rx (21m:50s into the Keynote speech delivered by Steve Jobs as the very First iPhone is Announced).

🍎 iWatch 🍎 Apple Watch – Apple’s Entry into Electronic Wearables

🍎⌚️ Mobile Phones. 22 years after the Motorola 8500XL known as “the Brick”, Apple reinvented the mobile phone with their first iPhone in 2007, which was so much more than a mobile phone, literally a “smartphone” weighing in at 6oz and about 1/4″ thin, 2.5″x0.26″x4.0″ that Apple continues to enhanced with the iPhone 6 and 6 Plus.

🍎⌚️ Apple’s critics reported that Apple has no business getting into the mature field of experienced mobile phone makers.

🍎⌚️ In 7 years Apple has delivered 500,000,000 premium priced iPhones, and are now selling iPhone 6 and 6+ at a pace well over 200,000,000 yearly. Not a typo, Apple is currently selling premium iPhones at a pace of 72 million units reportedly per calendar quarter with a profit margin over 30%. Its been also been reported that, based on actual cellular activations, iPhone 6 models were 51.3% of all global smartphone sales in December, 2014, outselling Samsung 3-to-1. Marilyn and I each own the iPhone 6 Plus and love them.

🍎⌚️ Tablets. Similarly, tablets were available several years before Apple reinvented it with the iPad in 2010. Apple carefully examined how Apple could develop such a device that folks would really want and use. Apple’s critics again reported that Apple was waisting their energies on tablets into such a mature tablet-marketplace, where Apple would be lucky of it could sell 5 million units in a good year.

🍎⌚️ The market place “voted” with their Wallets as iPads are selling at a clip 60 million units yearly with over 250 million in use today. Marilyn has the iPad mini, fits perfectly in here handbag, and I have the iPad Air 2, fits perfectly into my nifty DECODED black leather case.

🍎⌚️ 30,000,000 iWatch sales may “vote” their Wallets in 2015. Looking at Apple’s iPhone sales history, they show an adoption rate of 11 million units in its 1st fiscal year (21 million 2nd fiscal year, 39 million 3rd year, 72 million 4th year, 125 million 5th year) compared to current iPhone sales of 72 million units per quarter. With about 450 million iPhones currently in circulation, if 6.5% iPhone users adopt the iWatch, this may yield about 30 million iWatch 1st year sales, then 60 million 2nd year sales, 120 million 3rd year sales, your guess thereafter…

🍎⌚️ Watch. Some Watch history. The watch which was developed in the 16th century (circa 1530) was a mechanical device, powered by winding a mainspring which turned gears which moved the hands, and kept time with a rotating balance wheel. Most of the subsequent 500 year history of watches was devoted to refining the mechanical watch.

🍎⌚️ The Quartz Watch in the 1960s, which ran on electricity and kept time with a vibrating quartz crystal, proved a radical departure for the industry. During the 1980s quartz watches took over the market from mechanical watches, an event referred to as the “quartz crisis”. Although mechanical watches still sell at the high end of the market, the vast majority of watches now have quartz movements.

🍎⌚️ The origin of the word “Watch” is that it came from the Old English word woecce which meant “watchman”, because it was used by town watchmen to keep track of their shifts. Another says that the term came from 17th century sailors, who used the new mechanisms to time the length of their shipboard watches (duty shifts).

🍎⌚️ First watches were strictly mechanical, driven by spring-powered clockwork. As technology progressed, mechanical devices, used to control the speed of the watch, were largely superseded by vibrating quartz crystals, producing accurately timed electronic pulses. Some watches use radio-clock-technology to regularly correct the time. The first digital electronic watch was developed in 1970, the Pulsar LED.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch. Apple again, is reinventing the Watch, certainly entering a very mature field, dating back to the 16th century, 500 years ago and the “electronic” watch of 1970’s, some 50 years in the making. Apple’s entry into the “Watch” arena may be similar to its entry into Mobile Phones, when it made cell phones literally “Smart.” With the iWatch, Apple will be making the timekeeping wearable very “Smart” too.

🍎⌚️ Apple Watch. Apple has created three venues for their Wearable: Apple Watch, Sports, and the Edition, each containing many designs, metals, and bands, generating thousands of possibilities to reach a huge audience, with no compromise with its core capability. Presently I am wearing a RADO for the past 10 years, loving it. However, with the release of the Apple Watch, I’m highly motivated towards the Apple Watch.

Pleased you’re reading, with over 77,000 readers world-wide, growing by 2000/month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Story: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

25,290,651

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,000,000 visits as of December, 2014: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

🇺🇸 TRUMP Poll Plummets to 17% from 26% in Post FOX Presidential Debate 🇺🇸 Is this the Beginning of the END for TRUMP 🇺🇸

1439338440.jpg

🇺🇸 Donald Trump remains the “numerical leader” in the 2016race for the Republican Presidential nomination process, but his support has fallen by 33% over the past week-and-a-half. Presidential Debate performance has its risks. Many say Trump’s misogynistic remarks had a terrible effect on his electability.

🇺🇸 Marco Rubio doubled his Poll Results to 10%, Carly Fiorina moved up to 8%, Huckabee now at 3% has lost more than half his support from 7% 10 days ago. Presidential Debates can significantly help a candidate or hurt, based on one’s performance and their ability to stand-out in this crowded field.

🇺🇸 Rasmussen Reports post-Debate National Telephone Survey finds Trump with 17% support among Likely Republican Primary Voters plummeted, down by a third from 26% in late July before the first GOP debate. This may be a statistical anomaly, or is this the initial signs of the bursting of Trump’s Blustering Bubble. Pardon the cliche, but time will tell, if the national audience will become tired of Trump’s “bomb throwing & blustering” by Trump, with no apparent solutions.

🇺🇸 Senator Marco Rubio and former Florida Governor Jeb Bush are in second place with 10% support. Carly Fiorina and Wisconsin Governor Scott Walker both earn 9% of the likely primary vote.

🇺🇸 Rubio has doubled his level of support to 10% from 5% in late July. Carson has gained significantly. For these two candidates, good Debate Performance has registered with Voters.

🇺🇸 Walker’s support has fallen dramatically to back five percentage points to 9% from 14% 10 days ago, while support for Bush and Cruz has held steady. Next with 8% is retired neurologist Dr. Ben Carson and Senator Ted Cruz at 7%.

🇺🇸 Mike Huckabee, who unsuccessfully ran for the GOP nomination in 2012, also lost ground to 3%, more than a 50% drop in his support, among likely primary voters, falling from 7% support to 3% in Rasmussen Reports’ post FOX Presidential debate National Polling.

🇺🇸 National Survey of 651 GOP Primary Voters, Conducted August 9-10, 2015, By Rasmussen Reports. As most professional polling enterprises know, the Rasmussen Reports is one of most accurate non-partisan polling organizations.

Below is a direct link to Rasmussen Reports, the primary source for this article http://www.rasmussenreports.com/public_content/politics/elections/election_2016/has_the_donald_peaked

🇺🇸 Exact Wording of the Polling Question:

“At this time, 17 major candidates have officially announced that they are running for the Republican presidential nomination in 2016. If the 2016 Republican presidential primary were held in your state TODAY, for whom would you vote: Jeb Bush, Ben Carson, Chris Christie, Ted Cruz, Carly Fiorina, Jim Gilmore, Lindsey Graham, Mike Huckabee, Bobby Jindal, John Kasich, George Pataki, Rand Paul, Rick Perry, Marco Rubio, Rick Santorum, Donald Trump or Scott Walker?

🇺🇸 Statistical Margin of Error for the sampling is +/- 4%, with a 95% level of confidence. Mathematically speaking, applying the +/- 4% Margin of Error for this Rasmussen sampling to five of the Top Tier Candidates, all FIVE of the Top Tier Candidates are “Statistically Tied” at 13% to 14%.

Statistically speaking the Media could accurately report the following headline:

Marco Rubio and Jeb Bush are statistically tied at 14%, with Trump, Walker and Carly Fiorina are tied at 13%.

🇺🇸 Marco Rubio 10%+4% = 14%
🇺🇸 Jeb Bush 10%+4% = 14%
🇺🇸 Donald Trump 17%-4% = 13%
🇺🇸 Scott Walker 9%+4% = 13%
🇺🇸 Carly Fiorina 9%+4% = 13%

🇺🇸 FOX’s August Debate Thursday at 5pm for the Bottom 7 in the recent National Average of 5 recent polls. At 8:50pm FOX’s second Debate will be held for the Top 10 Presidential Candidates running for 2 hours, followed by 60 minutes of analysis.

🇺🇸 FOX NEWS 2016 has developed an iPhone App named Election HQ where users can participate using the App indicating that you either AGREE with the Candidate’s response {Live in Real Time} DISAGREE, or the Candidate is DODGING the question or being non-responsive. FOX will be showing these live statistics throughout their BROADCAST. This should add some fun and interactivity with the Debate Audience while the debate is underway.

🇺🇸 The Political Science of Polling in a very imprecise statistical sampling is the topic of this article. However, this topic will be utilizing the principal of “keep it simple” so everyone will learn how to Digest the figures that the News Media throw at us every Day.

🇺🇸 The Panel above is what you’d be looking for in Apple’s APP STORE. It is a free App that works on an iPhone or iPad. FOX also has an Android version.

🇺🇸 Understanding the Numbers is not the easy task of simply looking at which figure is bigger. Polling analysis also requires carefully examination of the Question given to the Statistically Sampled Population, and the Methodology of selecting the Sampled Group of participants.

🇺🇸 Meaning of the Polling Statistics is determined by the
(A) Group Sampled, is the group representative of the whole
(B) Question Asked, is the question direct and unambiguous
(C) Polling Question that are improperly worded and/or ambiguous may likely deliver inconsistent responses to the Poll Database.

🇺🇸 FOX Presidential Prime Time August 2015 Debate. Above is the podium layout for FOX’s broadcast to begin at 8:50pm on Thursday, August 6th. FOX used the current average of five national polling statistics, where the Top Two Candidates are at Center-Stage, then Scott Walker is 3rd at Left, and Huckabee 4th on the Right, and likewise for the other 6 candidates.

🇺🇸 FOX Presidential 5PM Broadcast August 2015 Debate. Above is the podium layout for FOX’s broadcast to begin at 5:00pm for one Hour on Thursday, August 6th. FOX used the current average of five national polling statistics, where the Top Two Candidates of the bottom 7, are at Center-Stage, then the next ranking is at Left, and the next on the Right, and likewise for the remaining candidates.

🇺🇸 Larry Sabado’s Crystal Ball internet site created at University of Virginia, as Larry is the Chair of the nationally known Center for Politics. The three panels below Sabado updated on August 3rd, 2015.
http://www.centerforpolitics.org/crystalball/2016-president/

🇺🇸 Scientific, Non Biased Public Opinion Poll is a type of survey or inquiry designed to measure the public’s views regarding a particular topic or Candidates, or series of topics. Carefully trained interviewers ask precisely scripted questions, of people that may be chosen at random from the population being measured, or pelople that are stratified by “Likely Voters” or “Voted in the 2012 Election.”

🇺🇸 Public Opinion Polling Responses are collected, and interpretations of the statistics are made based on examination of the responses. It is important in a Random-Sampling that everyone in the population being studied has an equal chance of participating. Otherwise, the results could be biased and, therefore, not representative of the population. Representative samples are chosen in order to make generalizations about a particular population being studied.

🇺🇸 Professor Ian McAllister has studied trends of federal elections since 1987. “Voters like to back a winner, they don’t like to back a loser so if they see a Party or Individual leading in the polls they’re much more likely to gravitate towards it,” he says.

🇺🇸 Research into the ‘bandwagon effect’ in the United States and the UK have been widely quoted. In terms of the actual elections themselves, nobody wants to be the early-leader, everybody wants to be the underdog. The political party leading in the polls can get a bounce of one, two, or three percent at the Ballot Box as young, undecided voters jump on the bandwagon.

🇺🇸 Bandwagon Effect Theory, it’s not a huge effect in percentage terms; However, in closely fought elections, 0.5% to 1.0% can be the difference between Winning or Loosing the Election. Particularly, in the United States, the bandwagon effect has been extensively analyzed and debated during presidential and primary elections.

🇺🇸 Polls tell us what proportion of a population has a specific viewpoint towards a Political Candidate or topic. They do not explain why respondents believe as they do or how to change their minds. This is the work of social scientists and scholars. Polls are simply a measurement tool that tells us how a population “thinks and feels” about any given Political Candidate or topic, at this precise Moment in Time.

🇺🇸 Polling can be useful in helping different cultures understand one another because it gives the people a chance to speak for themselves instead of letting only vocal media {stars} speak on behalf of all. Opinion polling gives people who do not usually have access to the media an opportunity to be heard.

🇺🇸 Reading Opinion Polls. Percentages in an opinion poll reflect the proportion of a given population that has a particular response. If the results of a scientific poll claiming a 3% Margin of Error {MoE} say that 30% of Americans like Vanilla Ice Cream, this means that if we asked all Americans this identical question, we would expect between 27% and 33% to say they like Vanilla Ice Cream.

🇺🇸 Scientific Polls compared to Snap Polling. When a radio or TV station asks its listeners to call in to vote on a particular issue, the results of this polling activity are not scientific because the sample is not representative of the population in the listening area. The sample reflects only the people who happen to be watching or listening to the Broadcast and are also motivated to call in. This polling data cannot be extrapolated or generalized to represent the whole population because the respondents were not randomly selected, and therefore, they are not uniformly representative.

🇺🇸 Current Polling of the Presidential Candidates may be more indicative of the level of TV and Print coverage than one’s true preference when voting. Briefly, Hillary Clinton and Donald Trump are receiving almost all of the current Media Coverage, and accordingly they are receiving higher and increasing polling results.

🇺🇸 Hillary Clinton however, the current news is unfavorable regarding her destroying information that was Subpoenaed by Congress, and now a DC Judge is threatening judicial action for the non-delivery of information and the insecure home-brew server.



🇺🇸 🇺🇸 🇺🇸 🇺🇸 🇺🇸 Trump Polling Anomaly 🇺🇸 🇺🇸 🇺🇸 🇺🇸 🇺🇸

🇺🇸 The Trump Anomaly. What is causing the apparent “surge” in the polling for Donald Trump, and what do these number mean? For the Republican candidates the Donald is a “Media Sensation” because of his brash and insulting remarks. Trump is very effectively manipulating the media. Every Day Trump develops another annoying or prejudicial remark and the media follows Trump wherever he goes… So it should be no surprise that current polling reflects increasing polling results for Trump.

🇺🇸 Trump currently holds 23.2% of the Republican Polling Preferences as of August 3, 2015 according to the Real Clear Politics {RCP} average of the most recent 5 National Polls. Looking at the RCP statistics, if Trump holds 23% favorable, then 77% are not supporting Trump. Importantly, it is not a surprise that remaining 15 republican candidates cannot garner a significant percentage. Simply dividing the remaining 77% by 15 yields an average of about 5%. If one factors in the +3%|-3% sampling Margin of Error, (MOE) the “statistical average” is similar to 8%, adding in the sampling margin of error.

🇺🇸 What does the Margin of Error really mean. Lets look at the NBC/WSJ polling through 7/30, TRUMP leads with 19%, Walker at 15% and Bush at 14%. If one applies the MOE to these statistics, Trump could be 19%-3%=16%, Walker at 15%+3%=18%, and Bush at 14%+3%=17%. Therefore, anyone familiar with interpreting statistics that involve a sampling margin of error, these 3 Candidates are all Statistically Tied.

🇺🇸 The Media is looking for Startling Headlines, so they run the story “Trump is Surging.” IMHO the Media is creating the TRUMP statistics, as that’s what they want to cover.

🇺🇸 Here’s what I think about the Trump Factor. Twenty Percent of the voters are angry and what the politicians out. Trump is appealing to this sentiment and is garnering their poll call. Add to this factor that the Media is almost exclusively covering Trump, which is creating a “self fulfilling prophecy”.

🇺🇸 Media Coverage of Presidential Candidates. When the media covers the another Presidential candidates, the Media interviewers are asking what they think about Trump and his bombastic remarks, rather than what these Candidates think about their issue positions. Eventually, the Media will calm themselves, as Trump’s stats will eventually plateau.

🇺🇸 What do You Think ?

🇺🇸 Real Clear Politics on-line publishes the most current Polling Preferences for all Presidential Candidates, past and present, with an excellent and comprehensive archive of data.

🇺🇸 http://www.realclearpolitics.com/epolls/2016/president/us/2016_republican_presidential_nomination-3823.html#polls

★ FOX News Methodology: (For Example) All results are for release after 6:00 P.M. ET Monday, August 3, 2015. The Fox News Poll is conducted under the joint direction of Anderson Robbins Research (D) and Shaw & Company Research (R). The poll was conducted by telephone with live interviewers July 30-August 2, 2015 among a random national sample of 1,306 registered voters (RV).

★ FOX Polling Results is based on the full sample have a margin of sampling error of +/-3% {plus or minus three percentage points}. Landline and cell phone telephone numbers were randomly selected for inclusion in the survey using a probability proportionate to size method, which means that phone numbers for each state are proportional to the number of voters in each state.
Results are of registered voters, unless otherwise noted.



Pleased you’re reading, with about 87,500 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

🚖 Broward Forces UBER OUT with Oppressive County Regulation & Political Cronyism 🚖 RIDERS are MAD 🚕🚖🚕

1439290970.jpg

🚖 UBER “Forced” to Turn OFF their system in BROWARD County. As of July 31, 2015 UBER had little choice but to "Turn-Off" its System for all of Broward County, to the dismay of hundreds of thousands of UBER Riders. WHY a reasoned person would ask???

🚖 ANSWER – Huge Political Contributions by TAXI tycoon Jesse Gaddis to several Broward County County Commissioners, including Mayor Tim Ryan. Why else would Broward County give special treatment and Dispatcher privileges to the Fort Lauderdale International Airport for over 700 Gaddis owned & operated TAXI, LIMOUSINE, and SHUTTLES, to the dismay of other smaller TAXI competitors. UBER is not the first to be on the Wrong Side of this Corruption on the County Commission.

🚖 Broward County Commission Disrupted the UBER System because of Political Cronyism & Oppressive Regulation, forcing UBER to pull the plug on their highly desired system. It has been said that a number of County Commissioners are in the "Pocket" for the TAXI and Limousine drivers and Companies owned by Jesse Gaddis. From everything we’ve heard, and what has been reported by the media, UBER Cars and Drivers are Superior to the Gaddis’s TAXI, Limousines, and most of the Drivers in most respects.

🚖 MONEY, POLITICAL CONTRIBUTIONS to COUNTY COMMISSION Political CAMPAIGNS. Jesse Gaddis, TAXI tycoon now 83 years old, owns a huge Yellow Cab system, leasing and dispatching most of Broward’s Cabs, over 550 Cars. Gaddis also owns Go Airport Service that spans 150 limos and shuttles, plus Gaddis’s B&L Services Group has the Exclusive contract to Dispatch all cabs, limos and shuttles at the airport, a thorn in the side of many smaller cab companies that also service the airport. How does this happen one would ask?

🚖 Friendliness of the UBER Drivers, On-Time Arrival of the Drivers, Clean Modern of the UBER Cars, and Competitive ride-cost are the frequent complements given the UBER system, as compared to Broward County TAXI services.

🚖 South Florida Business Journal published an article in today’s Journal, mentioning that from Friday 7am July 31 through Midnight Sunday August 2nd, about 40,000 UBER Riders found the System Turned OFF, preventing UBER Riders from being able to hail any UBER Drivers.

🚖 UBER, the Riders and Drivers, the $13 Million/Year Quagmire. Lets talk about the Dollars at stake with the Politicians, the Public and UBER. Media sources say that UBER has Delivered over 1 million Safe Rides in the 11 months Uber has been active in Broward County. As an experienced Uber Driver and a Uber Rider the average Uber Ride {for 77 recent rides} in my case as a Driver is $13.75/Ride. Other industry sources say the average ride is $10 or so, lets use $12/Ride for this analysis.

🚖 Uber Average Ride = $12/Ride for 1,090,900 Rides/Year. One million rides in 11 months equates to roughly 90,900 Rides/Month, or 1,090,900 Uber Rides/Year. If the average ride is $12/ride, then 1,090,900 rides equates to $13,090,800 in Annual revenues paid by Uber Riders through the Uber system. Its well known that Uber/Driver revenue-split is 20%/80%, where Uber is retaining 20% of the Rider’s Fare.

🚖 UBER Company Gross Revenues equals $2,618,000/Year for Broward County Uber traffic; Uber Drivers are receiving $10,472,000 in Uber Rider Fares. {Math: UBER Gross Income = 1,090,900x$12×20% = $2,618,000/Year.}

🚖 UBER, whose APPLE iPhone App allows passengers to Arrange for a Uber Ride, plus pay for the trip with the Rider’s iPhone using their pre-registered Credit Card registered within the UBER’s secure system. UBER still operates in Palm Beach and Miami-Dade counties, where new regulations are in the works.

🚖 Palm Beach County agreed to “TRIAL” compromise arrangements with UBER, established in March 2015 for a 6 month period. Therefore in September the Palm Beach County Commission will reexamine the trial period to see if everything is “working properly” and according to the trial period agreements and conditions.

🚖 UBER passengers can be dropped off in Broward County if the UBER Ride is originated outside Broward; however, folks located anywhere in Broward County cannot use the UBER system to originate a Ride anywhere inside Broward County or to anywhere outside Broward County.

🚖 According to UBER sources they say “Broward’s new law is too onerous” the company said Monday, {Aug 10th}. The Broward County rules are oppressive and require each driver to obtain a county chauffeur registration {which is absurd for a standard passenger car}. The County is requiring UBER Drivers to have a Car permit {even though Uber Drivers dive properly registered and ASE Inspected Vehicle.

🚖 Broward requires “county-run” background check {even though UBER conducts thorough Criminal Background check and Driving Records checks using reputable third-party investigation firms} plus Uber Drivers must carry state-required commercial insurance {even though UBER provides blanket $1million commercial insurance for all its Drivers}.

🚖 UBER has met most of the Background-Check requirements all over the country. However the Broward’s requirements are excessive and onerous according to UBER officials.

🚖 Uber: “Broward County Officials implemented one of the most onerous regulatory frameworks for ridesharing in the nation, in a written statement to the media. UBER had no choice but to suspend operations on July 31. UBER hopes the Board of County Commissioners will revisit the issue when they return from break and work with UBER to bring the UBER System back to Broward. UBER has been valued by some investment bankers at somewhere around $50 billion.

🚖 Broward Mayor Tim Ryan said he thought the county and Uber were working toward compromise, and he found the news “surprising and disappointing.” “To me it’s clear that Uber provides a very good service that people want,” said Ryan, who is asked about UBER everywhere he goes. “The regulations Broward County imposed are very reasonable. The county only asked that Uber have safe drivers, safe vehicles and insurance.”

🚖 Dan Lindblade, president of the Greater Fort Lauderdale Chamber of Commerce, said the county went too far in requiring individual licensure for drivers of Uber or other “transportation network companies.” “There regulations are bad for the citizens, bad for our tourism industry, bad for our economy,” he said. “The County is just over-regulating. They could have done something else than just hammer it all the way to the wall. They went too far.”

🚖 UBER’s popularity hinged on the disdain for traditional cabs and Fare cost. At public hearings and in emails that poured into county commissioners’ in-boxes over the past year, customers said they favored Uber’s lower fares, cleaner cars and friendlier drivers.

🚖 Retiree Steve Machoian, an occasional visitor to Fort Lauderdale who said he is planning a move to South Florida from Maryland, said he would never get in a traditional cab here. “Not only are they rude, the Cars A/C rarely works, they take you for long rides, most claim not to speak English, the cars are filthy, and most cases old and broken down,” he said when he learned of UBER decision. “If I can’t get a UBER ride in Broward, I’m going to take my second choice and move to Delray Beach.”

🚖 Gaddis and his TAXI interests have contributed BIG money to County Commission campaigns and have hired a bevy of lobbyists, including Bernie Friedman, George Platt and Judy Stern, to push for the new regulations that have UBER threatening to leave. Ryan, however, said Gaddis and his companies, which also have to follow the fingerprinting provision, had no special influence on the April vote {Its hard to swallow that statement}.

🚖 Mayor Ryan says Gaddis’ campaign contributions he’s personally received from Gaddis-related taxi industry and their lobbyists had no effect on his vote…. {Really, do you all believe that large campaign contributions from UBER’s competition with Gaddis’s TAXI business had no effect on the Mayor’s decision.}

🚖 Commissioner Chip LaMarca, a pro-UBER County Commissioner, said the new background checks are unnecessary, since UBER is already providing third-Party Background Criminal Checks and Driving Records Checks. “The County setting up this whole new level of regulation in Broward County, to me is a complete waste of taxpayers’ money,” he said. LaMarca said UBER background checks, which track criminal records and other data, are sufficient. “I can’t understand why a progressive commission wouldn’t see this ride-sharing shared economy, what’s going on in this country, really in the world, as a benefit to open competition,” LaMarca said.

🚖 Ryan said the commission will take up the Uber issue when it returns from summer break in August after Uber has promised to stop conducting pickups in the county. Ryan said he wants to negotiate with the company, but he doesn’t understand why it is so dead set against the fingerprint requirement when Uber continues to provide service in three cities that have the same requirement: Columbus, Ohio, Houston and New York City.

🚖 Broward County is New Requiring UBER Drivers
• FBI background checks. Uber already requires their drivers to submit to rigorous, nationally recognized background-check process used by hotels, hospitals and other industries. Forcing drivers to undergo another level of review, one that includes fingerprints, only adds bureaucracy and cost, with little evidence for the need… lets face it fingerprints are used in Crime Scenes. Criminals have their records already in the data-base, no prints are needed.
• Chauffeur licenses for every driver. While most cab drivers work full-time, most Uber drivers only work part-time. In Broward, this means several thousand Uber drivers must dig into their pockets to pay over $80 for a two-year license. Uber fears that if their drivers’ names become public, competitors will alert insurance carriers and put the Uber drivers’ personal coverage premiums at risk for driving for the services, even though Uber provides a $1 million commercial umbrella coverage
• Around-the-clock 24/7 Commercial Car Insurance for every driver. Again, while cabs may be on the road 24 hours a day, Uber drivers most-times use their personal cars for only a few hours per day. Every time Uber Drivers pick up a Uber passenger, the Uber-Ride is covered by the company’s $1 million commercial insurance policy, which is 4-times what taxis are required to have in Florida. Yet Broward wants part-time drivers to carry personal insurance that matches what’s required of cab and limo drivers.

🚖 {Absurd, an obvious conflict of interest comes to bear on any County Commissioners that have taken contributions from the TAXI Cab owners including Gaddis}.

🚖 UBER Rider App and the UBER Driver App, Sounds Simple, however, the UBER systems that support these Apps are extremely sophisticated and revolutionary. The Apps were created by Uber Technologies, a/k/a UBER.

🚖 UBER Rider App. The Uber App may be downloaded from Apple’s App Store free for everyone. When the UBER App is launched you’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver that the Uber System has determined to be closest to you. GPS pinpoints you ad the Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Displayed on the Uber Rider’s iPhone is the Uber Driver’s Car, Color, TAG number, the Driver’s picture. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

UBER App has a companion Watch App, which permits the Uber Rider to request a Driver directly from one’s Watch. Marilyn and I decided to go out to the Waterstone Resort Hotel for Happy Hour which is about a 2 mile trip from our Royal Palm apartment. So instead of driving our own Car, we summoned a Uber Driver using my Watch Uber App. The ride is about $4 each way; however, we save the $8 Valet and Tip cost, and the aggravation of getting our Car from the Garage. The Uber Drivers are terrific with modern, late-model, clean Cars.

UBER Local Statistics. Uber launched their system in south Florida June, 2014, and August for Broward and Palm Beach Counties. Over the represented 11 to 12 month period, Uber has logged over 1,000,000 safe Rides in Broward County. Miami-Dade county Drivers have delivered over 1,300,000 safe Rides and Palm Beach county has delivered 900,000 safe Rides. For the three south Florida Counties, the total safe rides equates to roughly (by data extrapolation) 3.3 Million Safe Rides in slightly less than 12 months, or 300,000 Rides per Month, or 10,000 Safe Rides every Day.

UBER Driver App is downloadable only to Approved Uber Drivers’ iPhones or Android device. Once the Uber Driver downloads the App, Drivers open the App, the UBER Driver-Partner system, for your first time use, directs you to Verify your Account, by providing the Driver’s ID and Password, the first time only, thereafter the Login is automated, when the App is launched.

Uber Partner App is specially designed only for UBER DRIVERS, not Uber Riders. The Uber Partner App is available by “Invitation Only” from the UBER’s Corporate site upon “approval.” This App is not available on Apple’s App store. This article is written from the perspective of the UBER Partner Driver.

UBER Driver Applicant passed: Screening, Background Checks, Auto Insurance verification, Clear Driving Record, Review of the Auto Registration, Uber’s approval of the Driver’s Vehicle ASE certification… When Uber verifies and approves the documentation, UBER issues a TEXT message directly to the Uber Driver’s iPhone, providing a Link to download the UBER PATNER App directly from UBER’s Corporate offices in California.

Uber Partner App. Once the UBER PARTNER Driver opens the App, UBER’s system requests the Driver to GO ONLINE. By a simple TAP on the blue GO ONLINE bar, the UBER System locates the Uber Driver, and the Uber Driver is displayed as an Available Car that UBER Riders will be able to visualize on their UBER App, within a several mile circle around the Uber Rider looking for a Ride. If the Uber Driver is within several minutes of arrival to the Requesting Rider, the Closest Uber Driver is Notified of the rider’s hail.

Uber Driver App and Uber Rider App. The Uber Driver is hailed on his Driver App, the system makes a Request for the Driver to Accept the Rider’s request. If the Driver does not accept the rider’s hail in 60 seconds, the system looks for the next closest Uber Driver. Once a Driver accepts the rider’s request, the Rider can Visually see the Uber Driver’s map location, and tracks the driver’s route to the Rider using the iPhone’s GPS capability. As the Uber Driver arrives at the Rider’s location, the Uber Driver Taps the ARRIVED button on his App.

A notification is sent to the Rider, stating that the Driver has Arrived. Once the Uber Rider is identified by name and confirmed, the Uber Driver Taps a Button “Commence Ride to Destination.” Typically the Rider initially inputs the destination for the Ride. The Uber Driver’s App gives the Driver turn-by-turn directions to locate the Rider; Once the Ride begins, the Driver App gives turn-by-turn directions to the Driver, to the Rider’s Destination.

Uber Technologies Inc. is an American international transportation network company headquartered in San Francisco, California. It develops, markets and operates the Uber mobile app, which allows consumers with smartphones to submit a Ride request which is then routed to carefully screened and background checked Uber Drivers who use their own Cars that are annually Safety Inspected, with proper Insurance coverage. As of May 28, 2015, the service was available in 58 countries and 300 cities worldwide.

Safety is a top priority at Uber, which is why every driver-partner in Florida must undergo stringent local, state and federal background checks and every single trip is covered by a $1M commercial insurance policy, four times what taxis are required to have in the state of Florida

UberX Driver’s Gross Compensation Average $1.55/mile, however, net about $1.25/mile, as Uber’s share is 20% of the Driver’s gross. On average for short Rides of 4 to 10 miles the Rider is charged about $2/mile for the Ride. The Uber Driver receives 80% of $2/mile or $1.60/mile driven. For longer destinations of 25 to 50 miles the Rider pays roughly $1.20/mile. UberXL Drivers earn roughly twice that of UberX. See Fee Charts for details.

UberX Driver’s Net-Net $1.00/mile including Fuel Cost, but no maintenance costs are accounted for. Detailing my particular scenario, my Honda Crosstour consumes roughly 15¢/mile for Fuel only. Since we already own the Car in Warranty, Insurance, Licenses, and giving no deductions for Tires, Wear and Tear, if I net from Uber $1.25/mile and my fuel cost is 15¢/mile, then we’re receiving about $1.10/mile net of Fuel cost; lets round down another 10¢/mile for down-time, to $1.00/mile. Simple, Drive 125 miles/Day (assume 5-hour Driving Day) and earn supplemental income of $125/Day, not accounting for Auto Maintenance or Tires.

Personal Opinion. If you already own a late model UberX qualified car, and want to earn some supplemental income, using your spare time to be a Uber Driver to earn some extra Cash, UBER may be something to consider. However, to buy or lease a vehicle, obtain insurance, maintenance, license tags, etc, Earning $1.00/mile makes no sense whatsoever, IMHO.

UBER Partner App. If you want to GO ONLINE as a Uber Driver AVAILABLE to be Hailed by a requesting Rider, DRIVERS simply open the App, TAP onto the blue GO ONLINE Bar, then the System confirms your Location, and the Driver is Live and OnLine for all potential Uber App Riders to “see.” The beautiful part of the Uber System is the requesting Rider waits only several minutes for an available Uber Driver.

Uber Busy times are from 7am to 11am, and 4pm to 7pm in the evening, plus 9pm to 11:30pm on weekends.

UberX is an inexpensive Ride. The cost of the Ride is automated by the UBER System, and is determined by the type of CAR, the Miles Driven, and the Time of the Trip, and Tolls if any. Everything about the RIDE transaction is Automated, including your Payment when you Arrive at your destination. No Cash needed, except if you want to TIP the Driver, which is not necessary, however appreciated.

Uber, upon arrival at your destination your UBER Private Driver, with his iPhone Uber Partner App, slides the ARRIVAL button to the Right, indicating the trip is complete, the FARE is Computed and displayed the RIDER’s iPhone. The Uber Rider confirms the Charge, selects Five Stars ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️ {hopefully} and the Rider, is Good to exit the Car, collecting their possessions, luggage, etc. The Driver should make sure all the Rider’s possessions are collected before departing.

Uber Experiences. The Uber Ride is really surprisingly nice. The Uber Partner’s Cars are super clean, odor free, late-model fully inspected vehicles, plus the Uber Drivers are motivated to give great service, as there is a ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️, 5-Star rating offered by the Passengers when they Pay; and similarly a 5-Star rating by the Uber-Driver is awarded to the Passenger.

Personally, I was surprised with the quality of the Uber Passengers, FAU students, Private School Students, Folks traveling to Italy needing a Ride to the Airport, Apartment dwellers in the City of Boca Raton, riding to Publix to grocery shop, a Housewife whose Car is at Service needing a Ride home because of a 2-Day repair, a Restaurant manager Riding home for a mid-day nap between shifts, a disabled businessman needing a ride to a Client’s office…

Uber Rides are roughly 25% to 30% less expensive than a typical TAXI Commercial services, plus the Uber RIDE arrives for the pickup within 2 to 5 minutes, where a TAXI may arrive in 20 to 25 minutes, or not arrive at all. These estimates were offered by my Uber Riders when I “interviewed” each for this article.

UBER’s system is a very efficient and provides an easy method to connect to Your own Personal Driver, hailing a Ride, and payment in a CASH-less environment with your Credit Card. Tipping is not required, however, Uber Drivers may accept cash tips.

UBER cities. There are hundreds of Uber Cities that provides this service. If you’re looking for, and need a private driver, you can find one with the UBER App. The Uber App will locate and request a Uber Driver as well as let the Uber Driver know exactly where you are located to pick you up.

Uber Riders. You’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

Uber Riders will be emailed a detailed receipts, plus Riders and Drivers will each be able to view their history in their respective Apps.

Uber Riders. When it comes to requesting a Uber RIDE you may choose from three Cars: uberX (standard 4-door sedan), uberXL (6-seat SUV), and uber SELECT (high value Cars such as Mercedes, BMW or LEXUS). You’ll be able to view a Fare-Estimate, and if you received a “Promotion” Code, you may enter it. Uber Drivers register their Car[s], and based on the Vehicle ID Number, UBER determines whether your is uberX, uberXL or uberSELECT.

Uber App. We’ve found UBER system to be very simple and easy-to-navigate App. The App gives you all the details you need about hailing for the Ride, actually seeing your Uber Driver as he/she travels to your Location, and walks you through the entire process keeping you in the loop until you Arrive and 5-Star your Driver.

UBER Driver Background Checks. Every UBER Driver in the USA is thoroughly screened and background investigated with a multi-step process that includes County, State, Federal, and multi-State Criminal Background checks, that reach back in date, as far as the Driver’s State Law allows, plus ongoing review of the Uber Drivers’ motor vehicle records throughout the UBER Driver’s time driving as a “Uber Partner.” In south Florida, Palm Beach County for example, requires that UBER Driver’s automobiles are Checked annually with a comprehensive 33-point inspection performed by an ASE Certified Technician.

UBER Driver. In effort to verify the facts in this article, I became a Uber Driver, submitted my personal information for UBER’s thorough background investigations that required about three weeks to complete. I also submitted my HONDA automobile inspected by a Certified ASE automotive mechanic, required annually, evidence of Automobile Insurance, a copy of the Vehicle’s Registration.

Riders should be impressed and comforted with the thoroughness of UBER’s investigative process for their Drivers. Uber Driver candidates may check a BOX that on the Investigative Reporting forms, such that the candidate receives all the investigative reporting results, that is discovered in the Public Records and the Criminal Background Checks. Roughly weekly for three weeks, I received email updates on UBER’s investigative process.

As a UBER Driver, giving a number of rides in south Florida, I had many conversations with the Riders, asking them if they liked the UBER experience, the time required for the Uber Driver to arrive, did they like the Drivers, did they like the Cars, the Price of the Ride, etc. In sum, all those that I’ve “interviewed” were thoroughly pleased with the entire UBER Experience, and were impressed with the Clean Cars, and the excellent Uber Drivers. BTW, the Washington Post conducted an extensive survey recently and determined that nearly 50% of the UBER Drivers have College Degrees.

UBER. Make good money driving as a Uber Partner, you may love it like the other 200,000 Uber Drivers world-wide. Get details with this link: https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue When you click onto this link, the image below is a copy of the Uber Form to begin your Enrollment process.

UBER Riders should be comforted with the extensive effort UBER employs to screen all their UBER Driver Partners initially and on an ongoing basis.

UBER has 162,037 Active Drivers in the US. The Washington Post completed an analysis that revealed in January, 2015 that the size of Uber’s Driver pool in the United States and the rapid rate at which it’s expanding, accounted for 162,037 Active Drivers that completed at least four or more trips for the service as of December, 2014. The number of new Uber drivers signing up has doubled every six months for the past two years.

Uber has grown into a tech giant valued by investors at more than $40 billion, and has become something of an economic Rorschach test. Some see in it the hopeful future of work in a digital age, where almost anyone with a car with a clear-background check, (or a home, or a service to offer) can be his own boss, choosing hours and determining income with a flexibility that makes other pursuits — like raising children or going back to school — more feasible.

Make great money driving with Uber, you may love it too. Get details with this link:

https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue

UBER App is compatible: iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, iPhone 4S, iPhone 5, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPod touch (3rd generation and above), all iPads using iOS 5.0 through iOS 8.4



Pleased you’re reading, with about 87,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

🚖 Broward County Disrupts UBER System with Oppressive Regulation 🚖 RIDERS are MAD 🚕🚖🚕

1439233474.jpg

🚖 UBER Turned OFF in BROWARD County. As of July 31, 2015 UBER was forced to "Turn-Off" its System for all of Broward County, at the dismay to hundreds of thousands of UBER Riders.

🚖 Broward County Commission has Disrupted the UBER System with Oppressive Regulation, and forced UBER to pull the plug on their highly desired system. It has been said that the County Commissioners are in the "Pocket" for the TAXI and Limousine drivers Associations. From everything we’ve heard, the UBER Cars and Drivers are Superior to any of the Cabs and Cab Drivers in almost every respect.

🚖 Friendliness of the UBER Drivers, On-Time Arrival of the Drivers, Clean Modern of the UBER Cars, and Competitive ride-cost are the frequent complements given the UBER system, as compared to Broward County TAXI services.

🚖 South Florida Business Journal published an article in today’s Journal, mentioning that from Friday 7am July 31 through Midnight Sunday August 2nd, about 40,000 UBER Riders found the System Turned OFF, preventing UBER Riders from being able to hail any UBER Drivers.

🚖 UBER, the Riders and Drivers, the $13 Million/Year Quagmire. Lets talk about the Dollars at stake with the Politicians, the Public and UBER. Media sources say that UBER has Delivered over 1 million Safe Rides in the 11 months Uber has been active in Broward County. As an experienced Uber Driver and a Uber Rider the average Uber Ride {for 77 recent rides} in my case as a Driver is $13.75/Ride. Other industry sources say the average ride is $10 or so, lets use $12/Ride for this analysis.

🚖 Uber Average Ride = $12/Ride for 1,090,900 Rides/Year. One million rides in 11 months equates to roughly 90,900 Rides/Month, or 1,090,900 Uber Rides/Year. If the average ride is $12/ride, then 1,090,900 rides equates to $13,090,800 in Annual revenues paid by Uber Riders through the Uber system. Its well known that Uber/Driver revenue-split is 20%/80%, where Uber is retaining 20% of the Rider’s Fare.

🚖 UBER Company Gross Revenues equals $2,618,000/Year for Broward County Uber traffic; Uber Drivers are receiving $10,472,000 in Uber Rider Fares. {Math: UBER Gross Income = 1,090,900x$12×20% = $2,618,000/Year.}

🚖 UBER, whose APPLE iPhone App allows passengers to Arrange for a Uber Ride, plus pay for the trip with the Rider’s iPhone using their pre-registered Credit Card registered within the UBER’s secure system. UBER still operates in Palm Beach and Miami-Dade counties, where new regulations are in the works.

🚖 Palm Beach County agreed to “TRIAL” compromise arrangements with UBER, established in March 2015 for a 6 month period. Therefore in September the Palm Beach County Commission will reexamine the trial period to see if everything is “working properly” and according to the trial period agreements and conditions.

🚖 UBER passengers can be dropped off in Broward County if the UBER Ride is originated outside Broward; however, folks located anywhere in Broward County cannot use the UBER system to originate a Ride anywhere inside Broward County or to anywhere outside Broward County.

🚖 According to UBER sources they say “Broward’s new law is too onerous” the company said Monday, {Aug 10th}. The Broward County rules are oppressive and require each driver to obtain a county chauffeur registration {which is absurd for a standard passenger car}. The County is requiring UBER Drivers to have a Car permit {even though Uber Drivers dive properly registered and ASE Inspected Vehicle.

🚖 Broward requires “county-run” background check {even though UBER conducts thorough Criminal Background check and Driving Records checks using reputable third-party investigation firms} plus Uber Drivers must carry state-required commercial insurance {even though UBER provides blanket $1million commercial insurance for all its Drivers}.

🚖 UBER has met most of the Background-Check requirements all over the country. However the Broward’s requirements are excessive and onerous according to UBER officials.

🚖 Uber: “Broward County Officials implemented one of the most onerous regulatory frameworks for ridesharing in the nation, in a written statement to the media. UBER had no choice but to suspend operations on July 31. UBER hopes the Board of County Commissioners will revisit the issue when they return from break and work with UBER to bring the UBER System back to Broward. UBER has been valued by some investment bankers at somewhere around $50 billion.

🚖 Broward Mayor Tim Ryan said he thought the county and Uber were working toward compromise, and he found the news “surprising and disappointing.” “To me it’s clear that Uber provides a very good service that people want,” said Ryan, who is asked about UBER everywhere he goes. “The regulations Broward County imposed are very reasonable. The county only asked that Uber have safe drivers, safe vehicles and insurance.”

🚖 Dan Lindblade, president of the Greater Fort Lauderdale Chamber of Commerce, said the county went too far in requiring individual licensure for drivers of Uber or other “transportation network companies.” “There regulations are bad for the citizens, bad for our tourism industry, bad for our economy,” he said. “The County is just over-regulating. They could have done something else than just hammer it all the way to the wall. They went too far.”

🚖 UBER’s popularity hinged on the disdain for traditional cabs and Fare cost. At public hearings and in emails that poured into county commissioners’ in-boxes over the past year, customers said they favored Uber’s lower fares, cleaner cars and friendlier drivers.

🚖 Retiree Steve Machoian, an occasional visitor to Fort Lauderdale who said he is planning a move to South Florida from Maryland, said he would never get in a traditional cab here. “Not only are they rude, the Cars A/C rarely works, they take you for long rides, most claim not to speak English, the cars are filthy, and most cases old and broken down,” he said when he learned of UBER decision. “If I can’t get a UBER ride in Broward, I’m going to take my second choice and move to Delray Beach.”

🚖 Gaddis and his TAXI interests have contributed BIG money to County Commission campaigns and have hired a bevy of lobbyists, including Bernie Friedman, George Platt and Judy Stern, to push for the new regulations that have UBER threatening to leave. Ryan, however, said Gaddis and his companies, which also have to follow the fingerprinting provision, had no special influence on the April vote {Its hard to swallow that statement}.

🚖 Mayor Ryan says Gaddis’ campaign contributions he’s personally received from Gaddis-related taxi industry and their lobbyists had no effect on his vote…. {Really, do you all believe that large campaign contributions from UBER’s competition with Gaddis’s TAXI business had no effect on the Mayor’s decision.}

🚖 Commissioner Chip LaMarca, a pro-UBER County Commissioner, said the new background checks are unnecessary, since UBER is already providing third-Party Background Criminal Checks and Driving Records Checks. “The County setting up this whole new level of regulation in Broward County, to me is a complete waste of taxpayers’ money,” he said. LaMarca said UBER background checks, which track criminal records and other data, are sufficient. “I can’t understand why a progressive commission wouldn’t see this ride-sharing shared economy, what’s going on in this country, really in the world, as a benefit to open competition,” LaMarca said.

🚖 Ryan said the commission will take up the Uber issue when it returns from summer break in August after Uber has promised to stop conducting pickups in the county. Ryan said he wants to negotiate with the company, but he doesn’t understand why it is so dead set against the fingerprint requirement when Uber continues to provide service in three cities that have the same requirement: Columbus, Ohio, Houston and New York City.

🚖 Broward County is New Requiring UBER Drivers
• FBI background checks. Uber already requires their drivers to submit to rigorous, nationally recognized background-check process used by hotels, hospitals and other industries. Forcing drivers to undergo another level of review, one that includes fingerprints, only adds bureaucracy and cost, with little evidence for the need… lets face it fingerprints are used in Crime Scenes. Criminals have their records already in the data-base, no prints are needed.
• Chauffeur licenses for every driver. While most cab drivers work full-time, most Uber drivers only work part-time. In Broward, this means several thousand Uber drivers must dig into their pockets to pay over $80 for a two-year license. Uber fears that if their drivers’ names become public, competitors will alert insurance carriers and put the Uber drivers’ personal coverage premiums at risk for driving for the services, even though Uber provides a $1 million commercial umbrella coverage
• Around-the-clock 24/7 Commercial Car Insurance for every driver. Again, while cabs may be on the road 24 hours a day, Uber drivers most-times use their personal cars for only a few hours per day. Every time Uber Drivers pick up a Uber passenger, the Uber-Ride is covered by the company’s $1 million commercial insurance policy, which is 4-times what taxis are required to have in Florida. Yet Broward wants part-time drivers to carry personal insurance that matches what’s required of cab and limo drivers.

🚖 {Absurd, an obvious conflict of interest comes to bear on any County Commissioners that have taken contributions from the TAXI Cab owners including Gaddis}.

🚖 UBER Rider App and the UBER Driver App, Sounds Simple, however, the UBER systems that support these Apps are extremely sophisticated and revolutionary. The Apps were created by Uber Technologies, a/k/a UBER.

🚖 UBER Rider App. The Uber App may be downloaded from Apple’s App Store free for everyone. When the UBER App is launched you’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver that the Uber System has determined to be closest to you. GPS pinpoints you ad the Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Displayed on the Uber Rider’s iPhone is the Uber Driver’s Car, Color, TAG number, the Driver’s picture. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

UBER App has a companion Watch App, which permits the Uber Rider to request a Driver directly from one’s Watch. Marilyn and I decided to go out to the Waterstone Resort Hotel for Happy Hour which is about a 2 mile trip from our Royal Palm apartment. So instead of driving our own Car, we summoned a Uber Driver using my Watch Uber App. The ride is about $4 each way; however, we save the $8 Valet and Tip cost, and the aggravation of getting our Car from the Garage. The Uber Drivers are terrific with modern, late-model, clean Cars.

UBER Local Statistics. Uber launched their system in south Florida June, 2014, and August for Broward and Palm Beach Counties. Over the represented 11 to 12 month period, Uber has logged over 1,000,000 safe Rides in Broward County. Miami-Dade county Drivers have delivered over 1,300,000 safe Rides and Palm Beach county has delivered 900,000 safe Rides. For the three south Florida Counties, the total safe rides equates to roughly (by data extrapolation) 3.3 Million Safe Rides in slightly less than 12 months, or 300,000 Rides per Month, or 10,000 Safe Rides every Day.

UBER Driver App is downloadable only to Approved Uber Drivers’ iPhones or Android device. Once the Uber Driver downloads the App, Drivers open the App, the UBER Driver-Partner system, for your first time use, directs you to Verify your Account, by providing the Driver’s ID and Password, the first time only, thereafter the Login is automated, when the App is launched.

Uber Partner App is specially designed only for UBER DRIVERS, not Uber Riders. The Uber Partner App is available by “Invitation Only” from the UBER’s Corporate site upon “approval.” This App is not available on Apple’s App store. This article is written from the perspective of the UBER Partner Driver.

UBER Driver Applicant passed: Screening, Background Checks, Auto Insurance verification, Clear Driving Record, Review of the Auto Registration, Uber’s approval of the Driver’s Vehicle ASE certification… When Uber verifies and approves the documentation, UBER issues a TEXT message directly to the Uber Driver’s iPhone, providing a Link to download the UBER PATNER App directly from UBER’s Corporate offices in California.

Uber Partner App. Once the UBER PARTNER Driver opens the App, UBER’s system requests the Driver to GO ONLINE. By a simple TAP on the blue GO ONLINE bar, the UBER System locates the Uber Driver, and the Uber Driver is displayed as an Available Car that UBER Riders will be able to visualize on their UBER App, within a several mile circle around the Uber Rider looking for a Ride. If the Uber Driver is within several minutes of arrival to the Requesting Rider, the Closest Uber Driver is Notified of the rider’s hail.

Uber Driver App and Uber Rider App. The Uber Driver is hailed on his Driver App, the system makes a Request for the Driver to Accept the Rider’s request. If the Driver does not accept the rider’s hail in 60 seconds, the system looks for the next closest Uber Driver. Once a Driver accepts the rider’s request, the Rider can Visually see the Uber Driver’s map location, and tracks the driver’s route to the Rider using the iPhone’s GPS capability. As the Uber Driver arrives at the Rider’s location, the Uber Driver Taps the ARRIVED button on his App.

A notification is sent to the Rider, stating that the Driver has Arrived. Once the Uber Rider is identified by name and confirmed, the Uber Driver Taps a Button “Commence Ride to Destination.” Typically the Rider initially inputs the destination for the Ride. The Uber Driver’s App gives the Driver turn-by-turn directions to locate the Rider; Once the Ride begins, the Driver App gives turn-by-turn directions to the Driver, to the Rider’s Destination.

Uber Technologies Inc. is an American international transportation network company headquartered in San Francisco, California. It develops, markets and operates the Uber mobile app, which allows consumers with smartphones to submit a Ride request which is then routed to carefully screened and background checked Uber Drivers who use their own Cars that are annually Safety Inspected, with proper Insurance coverage. As of May 28, 2015, the service was available in 58 countries and 300 cities worldwide.

Safety is a top priority at Uber, which is why every driver-partner in Florida must undergo stringent local, state and federal background checks and every single trip is covered by a $1M commercial insurance policy, four times what taxis are required to have in the state of Florida

UberX Driver’s Gross Compensation Average $1.55/mile, however, net about $1.25/mile, as Uber’s share is 20% of the Driver’s gross. On average for short Rides of 4 to 10 miles the Rider is charged about $2/mile for the Ride. The Uber Driver receives 80% of $2/mile or $1.60/mile driven. For longer destinations of 25 to 50 miles the Rider pays roughly $1.20/mile. UberXL Drivers earn roughly twice that of UberX. See Fee Charts for details.

UberX Driver’s Net-Net $1.00/mile including Fuel Cost, but no maintenance costs are accounted for. Detailing my particular scenario, my Honda Crosstour consumes roughly 15¢/mile for Fuel only. Since we already own the Car in Warranty, Insurance, Licenses, and giving no deductions for Tires, Wear and Tear, if I net from Uber $1.25/mile and my fuel cost is 15¢/mile, then we’re receiving about $1.10/mile net of Fuel cost; lets round down another 10¢/mile for down-time, to $1.00/mile. Simple, Drive 125 miles/Day (assume 5-hour Driving Day) and earn supplemental income of $125/Day, not accounting for Auto Maintenance or Tires.

Personal Opinion. If you already own a late model UberX qualified car, and want to earn some supplemental income, using your spare time to be a Uber Driver to earn some extra Cash, UBER may be something to consider. However, to buy or lease a vehicle, obtain insurance, maintenance, license tags, etc, Earning $1.00/mile makes no sense whatsoever, IMHO.

UBER Partner App. If you want to GO ONLINE as a Uber Driver AVAILABLE to be Hailed by a requesting Rider, DRIVERS simply open the App, TAP onto the blue GO ONLINE Bar, then the System confirms your Location, and the Driver is Live and OnLine for all potential Uber App Riders to “see.” The beautiful part of the Uber System is the requesting Rider waits only several minutes for an available Uber Driver.

Uber Busy times are from 7am to 11am, and 4pm to 7pm in the evening, plus 9pm to 11:30pm on weekends.

UberX is an inexpensive Ride. The cost of the Ride is automated by the UBER System, and is determined by the type of CAR, the Miles Driven, and the Time of the Trip, and Tolls if any. Everything about the RIDE transaction is Automated, including your Payment when you Arrive at your destination. No Cash needed, except if you want to TIP the Driver, which is not necessary, however appreciated.

Uber, upon arrival at your destination your UBER Private Driver, with his iPhone Uber Partner App, slides the ARRIVAL button to the Right, indicating the trip is complete, the FARE is Computed and displayed the RIDER’s iPhone. The Uber Rider confirms the Charge, selects Five Stars ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️ {hopefully} and the Rider, is Good to exit the Car, collecting their possessions, luggage, etc. The Driver should make sure all the Rider’s possessions are collected before departing.

Uber Experiences. The Uber Ride is really surprisingly nice. The Uber Partner’s Cars are super clean, odor free, late-model fully inspected vehicles, plus the Uber Drivers are motivated to give great service, as there is a ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️, 5-Star rating offered by the Passengers when they Pay; and similarly a 5-Star rating by the Uber-Driver is awarded to the Passenger.

Personally, I was surprised with the quality of the Uber Passengers, FAU students, Private School Students, Folks traveling to Italy needing a Ride to the Airport, Apartment dwellers in the City of Boca Raton, riding to Publix to grocery shop, a Housewife whose Car is at Service needing a Ride home because of a 2-Day repair, a Restaurant manager Riding home for a mid-day nap between shifts, a disabled businessman needing a ride to a Client’s office…

Uber Rides are roughly 25% to 30% less expensive than a typical TAXI Commercial services, plus the Uber RIDE arrives for the pickup within 2 to 5 minutes, where a TAXI may arrive in 20 to 25 minutes, or not arrive at all. These estimates were offered by my Uber Riders when I “interviewed” each for this article.

UBER’s system is a very efficient and provides an easy method to connect to Your own Personal Driver, hailing a Ride, and payment in a CASH-less environment with your Credit Card. Tipping is not required, however, Uber Drivers may accept cash tips.

UBER cities. There are hundreds of Uber Cities that provides this service. If you’re looking for, and need a private driver, you can find one with the UBER App. The Uber App will locate and request a Uber Driver as well as let the Uber Driver know exactly where you are located to pick you up.

Uber Riders. You’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

Uber Riders will be emailed a detailed receipts, plus Riders and Drivers will each be able to view their history in their respective Apps.

Uber Riders. When it comes to requesting a Uber RIDE you may choose from three Cars: uberX (standard 4-door sedan), uberXL (6-seat SUV), and uber SELECT (high value Cars such as Mercedes, BMW or LEXUS). You’ll be able to view a Fare-Estimate, and if you received a “Promotion” Code, you may enter it. Uber Drivers register their Car[s], and based on the Vehicle ID Number, UBER determines whether your is uberX, uberXL or uberSELECT.

Uber App. We’ve found UBER system to be very simple and easy-to-navigate App. The App gives you all the details you need about hailing for the Ride, actually seeing your Uber Driver as he/she travels to your Location, and walks you through the entire process keeping you in the loop until you Arrive and 5-Star your Driver.

UBER Driver Background Checks. Every UBER Driver in the USA is thoroughly screened and background investigated with a multi-step process that includes County, State, Federal, and multi-State Criminal Background checks, that reach back in date, as far as the Driver’s State Law allows, plus ongoing review of the Uber Drivers’ motor vehicle records throughout the UBER Driver’s time driving as a “Uber Partner.” In south Florida, Palm Beach County for example, requires that UBER Driver’s automobiles are Checked annually with a comprehensive 33-point inspection performed by an ASE Certified Technician.

UBER Driver. In effort to verify the facts in this article, I became a Uber Driver, submitted my personal information for UBER’s thorough background investigations that required about three weeks to complete. I also submitted my HONDA automobile inspected by a Certified ASE automotive mechanic, required annually, evidence of Automobile Insurance, a copy of the Vehicle’s Registration.

Riders should be impressed and comforted with the thoroughness of UBER’s investigative process for their Drivers. Uber Driver candidates may check a BOX that on the Investigative Reporting forms, such that the candidate receives all the investigative reporting results, that is discovered in the Public Records and the Criminal Background Checks. Roughly weekly for three weeks, I received email updates on UBER’s investigative process.

As a UBER Driver, giving a number of rides in south Florida, I had many conversations with the Riders, asking them if they liked the UBER experience, the time required for the Uber Driver to arrive, did they like the Drivers, did they like the Cars, the Price of the Ride, etc. In sum, all those that I’ve “interviewed” were thoroughly pleased with the entire UBER Experience, and were impressed with the Clean Cars, and the excellent Uber Drivers. BTW, the Washington Post conducted an extensive survey recently and determined that nearly 50% of the UBER Drivers have College Degrees.

UBER. Make good money driving as a Uber Partner, you may love it like the other 200,000 Uber Drivers world-wide. Get details with this link: https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue When you click onto this link, the image below is a copy of the Uber Form to begin your Enrollment process.

UBER Riders should be comforted with the extensive effort UBER employs to screen all their UBER Driver Partners initially and on an ongoing basis.

UBER has 162,037 Active Drivers in the US. The Washington Post completed an analysis that revealed in January, 2015 that the size of Uber’s Driver pool in the United States and the rapid rate at which it’s expanding, accounted for 162,037 Active Drivers that completed at least four or more trips for the service as of December, 2014. The number of new Uber drivers signing up has doubled every six months for the past two years.

Uber has grown into a tech giant valued by investors at more than $40 billion, and has become something of an economic Rorschach test. Some see in it the hopeful future of work in a digital age, where almost anyone with a car with a clear-background check, (or a home, or a service to offer) can be his own boss, choosing hours and determining income with a flexibility that makes other pursuits — like raising children or going back to school — more feasible.

Make great money driving with Uber, you may love it too. Get details with this link:

https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue

UBER App is compatible: iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, iPhone 4S, iPhone 5, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPod touch (3rd generation and above), all iPads using iOS 5.0 through iOS 8.4



Pleased you’re reading, with about 87,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

🚖 UBER Apple Watch App Connects RIDERS to DRIVERS 🚖🚕🚖🚕🚖

1436646485.jpg

UBER Rider App and the UBER Driver App, Sounds Simple, however, the UBER systems that support these Apps are extremely sophisticated and revolutionary. The Apps were created by Uber Technologies, a/k/a UBER.

UBER Rider App. The Uber App may be downloaded from Apple’s App Store free for everyone. When the UBER App is launched you’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver that the Uber System has determined to be closest to you. GPS pinpoints you ad the Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Displayed on the Uber Rider’s iPhone is the Uber Driver’s Car, Color, TAG number, the Driver’s picture. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

UBER App has a companion Watch App, which permits the Uber Rider to request a Driver directly from one’s Watch. Marilyn and I decided to go out to the Waterstone Resort Hotel for Happy Hour which is about a 2 mile trip from our Royal Palm apartment. So instead of driving our own Car, we summoned a Uber Driver using my Watch Uber App. The ride is about $4 each way; however, we save the $8 Valet and Tip cost, and the aggravation of getting our Car from the Garage. The Uber Drivers are terrific with modern, late-model, clean Cars.

UBER Local Statistics. Uber launched their system in south Florida June, 2014, and August for Broward and Palm Beach Counties. Over the represented 11 to 12 month period, Uber has logged over 1,000,000 safe Rides in Broward County. Miami-Dade county Drivers have delivered over 1,300,000 safe Rides and Palm Beach county has delivered 900,000 safe Rides. For the three south Florida Counties, the total safe rides equates to roughly (by data extrapolation) 3.3 Million Safe Rides in slightly less than 12 months, or 300,000 Rides per Month, or 10,000 Safe Rides every Day.

UBER Driver App is downloadable only to Approved Uber Drivers’ iPhones or Android device. Once the Uber Driver downloads the App, Drivers open the App, the UBER Driver-Partner system, for your first time use, directs you to Verify your Account, by providing the Driver’s ID and Password, the first time only, thereafter the Login is automated, when the App is launched.

Uber Partner App is specially designed only for UBER DRIVERS, not Uber Riders. The Uber Partner App is available by “Invitation Only” from the UBER’s Corporate site upon “approval.” This App is not available on Apple’s App store. This article is written from the perspective of the UBER Partner Driver.

UBER Driver Applicant passed: Screening, Background Checks, Auto Insurance verification, Clear Driving Record, Review of the Auto Registration, Uber’s approval of the Driver’s Vehicle ASE certification… When Uber verifies and approves the documentation, UBER issues a TEXT message directly to the Uber Driver’s iPhone, providing a Link to download the UBER PATNER App directly from UBER’s Corporate offices in California.

Uber Partner App. Once the UBER PARTNER Driver opens the App, UBER’s system requests the Driver to GO ONLINE. By a simple TAP on the blue GO ONLINE bar, the UBER System locates the Uber Driver, and the Uber Driver is displayed as an Available Car that UBER Riders will be able to visualize on their UBER App, within a several mile circle around the Uber Rider looking for a Ride. If the Uber Driver is within several minutes of arrival to the Requesting Rider, the Closest Uber Driver is Notified of the rider’s hail.

Uber Driver App and Uber Rider App. The Uber Driver is hailed on his Driver App, the system makes a Request for the Driver to Accept the Rider’s request. If the Driver does not accept the rider’s hail in 60 seconds, the system looks for the next closest Uber Driver. Once a Driver accepts the rider’s request, the Rider can Visually see the Uber Driver’s map location, and tracks the driver’s route to the Rider using the iPhone’s GPS capability. As the Uber Driver arrives at the Rider’s location, the Uber Driver Taps the ARRIVED button on his App.

A notification is sent to the Rider, stating that the Driver has Arrived. Once the Uber Rider is identified by name and confirmed, the Uber Driver Taps a Button “Commence Ride to Destination.” Typically the Rider initially inputs the destination for the Ride. The Uber Driver’s App gives the Driver turn-by-turn directions to locate the Rider; Once the Ride begins, the Driver App gives turn-by-turn directions to the Driver, to the Rider’s Destination.

Uber Technologies Inc. is an American international transportation network company headquartered in San Francisco, California. It develops, markets and operates the Uber mobile app, which allows consumers with smartphones to submit a Ride request which is then routed to carefully screened and background checked Uber Drivers who use their own Cars that are annually Safety Inspected, with proper Insurance coverage. As of May 28, 2015, the service was available in 58 countries and 300 cities worldwide.

Safety is a top priority at Uber, which is why every driver-partner in Florida must undergo stringent local, state and federal background checks and every single trip is covered by a $1M commercial insurance policy, four times what taxis are required to have in the state of Florida

UberX Driver’s Gross Compensation Average $1.55/mile, however, net about $1.25/mile, as Uber’s share is 20% of the Driver’s gross. On average for short Rides of 4 to 10 miles the Rider is charged about $2/mile for the Ride. The Uber Driver receives 80% of $2/mile or $1.60/mile driven. For longer destinations of 25 to 50 miles the Rider pays roughly $1.20/mile. UberXL Drivers earn roughly twice that of UberX. See Fee Charts for details.

UberX Driver’s Net-Net $1.00/mile including Fuel Cost, but no maintenance costs are accounted for. Detailing my particular scenario, my Honda Crosstour consumes roughly 15¢/mile for Fuel only. Since we already own the Car in Warranty, Insurance, Licenses, and giving no deductions for Tires, Wear and Tear, if I net from Uber $1.25/mile and my fuel cost is 15¢/mile, then we’re receiving about $1.10/mile net of Fuel cost; lets round down another 10¢/mile for down-time, to $1.00/mile. Simple, Drive 125 miles/Day (assume 5-hour Driving Day) and earn supplemental income of $125/Day, not accounting for Auto Maintenance or Tires.

Personal Opinion. If you already own a late model UberX qualified car, and want to earn some supplemental income, using your spare time to be a Uber Driver to earn some extra Cash, UBER may be something to consider. However, to buy or lease a vehicle, obtain insurance, maintenance, license tags, etc, Earning $1.00/mile makes no sense whatsoever, IMHO.

UBER Partner App. If you want to GO ONLINE as a Uber Driver AVAILABLE to be Hailed by a requesting Rider, DRIVERS simply open the App, TAP onto the blue GO ONLINE Bar, then the System confirms your Location, and the Driver is Live and OnLine for all potential Uber App Riders to “see.” The beautiful part of the Uber System is the requesting Rider waits only several minutes for an available Uber Driver.

Uber Busy times are from 7am to 11am, and 4pm to 7pm in the evening, plus 9pm to 11:30pm on weekends.

UberX is an inexpensive Ride. The cost of the Ride is automated by the UBER System, and is determined by the type of CAR, the Miles Driven, and the Time of the Trip, and Tolls if any. Everything about the RIDE transaction is Automated, including your Payment when you Arrive at your destination. No Cash needed, except if you want to TIP the Driver, which is not necessary, however appreciated.

Uber, upon arrival at your destination your UBER Private Driver, with his iPhone Uber Partner App, slides the ARRIVAL button to the Right, indicating the trip is complete, the FARE is Computed and displayed the RIDER’s iPhone. The Uber Rider confirms the Charge, selects Five Stars ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️ {hopefully} and the Rider, is Good to exit the Car, collecting their possessions, luggage, etc. The Driver should make sure all the Rider’s possessions are collected before departing.

Uber Experiences. The Uber Ride is really surprisingly nice. The Uber Partner’s Cars are super clean, odor free, late-model fully inspected vehicles, plus the Uber Drivers are motivated to give great service, as there is a ⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️, 5-Star rating offered by the Passengers when they Pay; and similarly a 5-Star rating by the Uber-Driver is awarded to the Passenger.

Personally, I was surprised with the quality of the Uber Passengers, FAU students, Private School Students, Folks traveling to Italy needing a Ride to the Airport, Apartment dwellers in the City of Boca Raton, riding to Publix to grocery shop, a Housewife whose Car is at Service needing a Ride home because of a 2-Day repair, a Restaurant manager Riding home for a mid-day nap between shifts, a disabled businessman needing a ride to a Client’s office…

Uber Rides are roughly 25% to 30% less expensive than a typical TAXI Commercial services, plus the Uber RIDE arrives for the pickup within 2 to 5 minutes, where a TAXI may arrive in 20 to 25 minutes, or not arrive at all. These estimates were offered by my Uber Riders when I “interviewed” each for this article.

UBER’s system is a very efficient and provides an easy method to connect to Your own Personal Driver, hailing a Ride, and payment in a CASH-less environment with your Credit Card. Tipping is not required, however, Uber Drivers may accept cash tips.

UBER cities. There are hundreds of Uber Cities that provides this service. If you’re looking for, and need a private driver, you can find one with the UBER App. The Uber App will locate and request a Uber Driver as well as let the Uber Driver know exactly where you are located to pick you up.

Uber Riders. You’re able to pinpoint a location of the Uber Driver, so there is no wasted time for the Driver looking to find you. Upon arrival at your destination, you finish the ride by “charging” the fare right to your credit card that you “registered” into your Personal Uber Account, linked to your iPhone. That means you don’t need the physical plastic card with you.

Uber Riders will be emailed a detailed receipts, plus Riders and Drivers will each be able to view their history in their respective Apps.

Uber Riders. When it comes to requesting a Uber RIDE you may choose from three Cars: uberX (standard 4-door sedan), uberXL (6-seat SUV), and uber SELECT (high value Cars such as Mercedes, BMW or LEXUS). You’ll be able to view a Fare-Estimate, and if you received a “Promotion” Code, you may enter it. Uber Drivers register their Car[s], and based on the Vehicle ID Number, UBER determines whether your is uberX, uberXL or uberSELECT.

Uber App. We’ve found UBER system to be very simple and easy-to-navigate App. The App gives you all the details you need about hailing for the Ride, actually seeing your Uber Driver as he/she travels to your Location, and walks you through the entire process keeping you in the loop until you Arrive and 5-Star your Driver.

UBER Driver Background Checks. Every UBER Driver in the USA is thoroughly screened and background investigated with a multi-step process that includes County, State, Federal, and multi-State Criminal Background checks, that reach back in date, as far as the Driver’s State Law allows, plus ongoing review of the Uber Drivers’ motor vehicle records throughout the UBER Driver’s time driving as a “Uber Partner.” In south Florida, Palm Beach County for example, requires that UBER Driver’s automobiles are Checked annually with a comprehensive 33-point inspection performed by an ASE Certified Technician.

UBER Driver. In effort to verify the facts in this article, I became a Uber Driver, submitted my personal information for UBER’s thorough background investigations that required about three weeks to complete. I also submitted my HONDA automobile inspected by a Certified ASE automotive mechanic, required annually, evidence of Automobile Insurance, a copy of the Vehicle’s Registration.

Riders should be impressed and comforted with the thoroughness of UBER’s investigative process for their Drivers. Uber Driver candidates may check a BOX that on the Investigative Reporting forms, such that the candidate receives all the investigative reporting results, that is discovered in the Public Records and the Criminal Background Checks. Roughly weekly for three weeks, I received email updates on UBER’s investigative process.

As a UBER Driver, giving a number of rides in south Florida, I had many conversations with the Riders, asking them if they liked the UBER experience, the time required for the Uber Driver to arrive, did they like the Drivers, did they like the Cars, the Price of the Ride, etc. In sum, all those that I’ve “interviewed” were thoroughly pleased with the entire UBER Experience, and were impressed with the Clean Cars, and the excellent Uber Drivers. BTW, the Washington Post conducted an extensive survey recently and determined that nearly 50% of the UBER Drivers have College Degrees.

UBER. Make good money driving as a Uber Partner, you may love it like the other 200,000 Uber Drivers world-wide. Get details with this link: https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue When you click onto this link, the image below is a copy of the Uber Form to begin your Enrollment process.

UBER Riders should be comforted with the extensive effort UBER employs to screen all their UBER Driver Partners initially and on an ongoing basis.

UBER has 162,037 Active Drivers in the US. The Washington Post completed an analysis that revealed in January, 2015 that the size of Uber’s Driver pool in the United States and the rapid rate at which it’s expanding, accounted for 162,037 Active Drivers that completed at least four or more trips for the service as of December, 2014. The number of new Uber drivers signing up has doubled every six months for the past two years.

Uber has grown into a tech giant valued by investors at more than $40 billion, and has become something of an economic Rorschach test. Some see in it the hopeful future of work in a digital age, where almost anyone with a car with a clear-background check, (or a home, or a service to offer) can be his own boss, choosing hours and determining income with a flexibility that makes other pursuits — like raising children or going back to school — more feasible.

Make great money driving with Uber, you may love it too. Get details with this link:

https://partners.uber.com/drive/?invite_code=jamesw5755ue

UBER App is compatible: iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, iPhone 4S, iPhone 5, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPod touch (3rd generation and above), all iPads using iOS 5.0 through iOS 8.4



http://www.kantarworldpanel.com/global/smartphone-os-market-share/

Pleased you’re reading, with about 85,000 readers world-wide, growing by thousands each month, giving motivation as new topics are published every day. Spread the Word to your friends, family, and associates; Forward the link below, post it on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Social Networks for their review,, Anyone may subscribe, its secure and confidential; Every time I publish an article, WordPress will send a reminder (no Ads of course) with a link to my new Article: http://FAU4U2.WordPress.com/

Perspective: These articles are created to inform a diverse audience, whether it be photography, digital cameras, lenses, Image editing, Apps, Smartphones, iPads, iPhones, Laptops and related products, Health & Wellness, or any news-worthy topic. The purpose is to inform, from sources that are believed to be reliable, and stimulate Dialogue.

To learn more about what else we do, take a moment and visit these links, browse around. We are pleased with over 25,900,000 visits as of January, 2015: http://www.416-1100.com.

If digital Imaging is of interest, I teach a course named "Principles of Digital Imaging and Post Image Processing" as an Adjunct Prof at FAU: http://www.416-1100.com/FAU-Classes/Principles-of-Digital

When I do what I do… I usually do it here.

As a "Health Nut" for Health & Wellness; http://www.Jim.Wilson.Isagenix.com

As many of my friends, family and students know, I am an avid iPad adopter since its release April, 2010. With Apple’s release of the Retina-Display iPad Air 2, (I sold iPad 4 to Gazelle.com) applied the proceeds to purchase the "mini" with 128GB of Storage, AT&T connectivity, plus added Logitech’s UltraThin Keyboard Cover, and a DECODED natural leather thin slip-over protective case.

🇺🇸 Presidential Debate Thursday at 5pm & 9pm 🇺🇸 Debate Performance 🇺🇸 Polling Results 🇺🇸

1438891463.jpg

🇺🇸 FOX’s August Debate Thursday at 5pm for the Bottom 7 in the recent National Average of 5 recent polls. At 8:50pm FOX’s second Debate will be held for the Top 10 Presidential Candidates running for 2 hours, followed by 60 minutes of analysis.

🇺🇸 FOX NEWS 2016 has developed an iPhone App named Election HQ where users can participate using the App indicating that you either AGREE with the Candidate’s response {Live in Real Time} DISAGREE, or the Candidate is DODGING the question or being non-responsive. FOX will be showing these live statistics throughout their BROADCAST. This should add some fun and interactivity with the Debate Audience while the debate is underway.

🇺🇸 The Political Science of Polling in a very imprecise statistical sampling is the topic of this article. However, this topic will be utilizing the principal of “keep it simple” so everyone will learn how to Digest the figures that the News Media throw at us every Day.

🇺🇸 The Panel above is what you’d be looking for in Apple’s APP STORE. It is a free App that works on an iPhone or iPad. FOX also has an Android version.

🇺🇸 Understanding the Numbers is not the easy task of simply looking at which figure is bigger. Polling analysis also requires carefully examination of the Question given to the Statistically Sampled Population, and the Methodology of selecting the Sampled Group of participants.

🇺🇸 Meaning of the Polling Statistics is determined by the
(A) Group Sampled, is the group representative of the whole
(B) Question Asked, is the question direct and unambiguous
(C) Polling Question that are improperly worded and/or ambiguous may likely deliver inconsistent responses to the Poll Database.

🇺🇸 FOX Presidential Prime Time August 2015 Debate. Above is the podium layout for FOX’s broadcast to begin at 8:50pm on Thursday, August 6th. FOX used the current average of five national polling statistics, where the Top Two Candidates are at Center-Stage, then Scott Walker is 3rd at Left, and Huckabee 4th on the Right, and likewise for the other 6 candidates.

🇺🇸 FOX Presidential 5PM Broadcast August 2015 Debate. Above is the podium layout for FOX’s broadcast to begin at 5:00pm for one Hour on Thursday, August 6th. FOX used the current average of five national polling statistics, where the Top Two Candidates of the bottom 7, are at Center-Stage, then the next ranking is at Left, and the next on the Right, and likewise for the remaining candidates.

🇺🇸 Larry Sabado’s Crystal Ball internet site created at University of Virginia, as Larry is the Chair of the nationally known Center f